diff options
author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2006-01-11 23:49:54 +0000 |
---|---|---|
committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2006-01-11 23:49:54 +0000 |
commit | 2bbad84a3ea318feba6156d09780f64fd986678f (patch) | |
tree | 5cbd0dca0980b2c9c6cb1f32baab5205356a0021 | |
parent | 1defb76eaaa651e4057ee693344d6b47876cae43 (diff) |
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@125 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
-rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx | 12782 | ||||
-rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.ins | 58 |
2 files changed, 12840 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9dbf142a2c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,12782 @@ +% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch +% AASTeX.dtx: document class for AAS journal. +% Copyright(C) 2003 American Astronomical Society. +% +% Disclaimer: +% This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; +% without even the implied warranty of +% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. +% +% ReadMe: +% For the documentation and more detailed instructions for +% installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX. +% +% \fi +% \CheckSum{5961} +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}% +% +% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch +%%% @LaTeX-file{ +%%% filename = "aastex.dtx", +%%% version = "5.2", +%%% date = "2005/06/22", +%%% time = "16:23:00 GMT", +%%% checksum = "5964", +%%% author = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:ogawa@teleport.com)", +%%% revised by = "SR Nova Private Ltd." +%%% copyright = "Copyright (C) 2003 American Astronomical Society +%%% +%%% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the +%%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 +%%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +%%% The latest version of this license is in +%%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%%% version 2003/12/01 or later. +%%% +%%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +%%% +%%% The Current Maintainer of this work is the American Astronomical Society. +%%% +%%% This work consists of all files listed in the document README. +%%% +%%% address = "American Astronomical Society +%%% USA", +%%% telephone = "+1 ???", +%%% FAX = "", +%%% email = "aastex-help@aas.org", +%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII", +%%% keywords = "latex, AAS, journal", +%%% supported = "yes", +%%% abstract = "formatter for AAS journal submissions", +%%% docstring = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc", +%%% } +% \fi +% +% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch +% The following references the \file{Read.Me} file, +% which contains basic information about this document class. +% The contents of this file are generated when +% you typeset the programmer's documentation. +% Search on "{filecontents*}{Read.Me}" to locate it. +% \fi\input{Read.Me}% +% +% \subsection{Bill of Materials} +% +% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged +% according to provenance. +% +% \subsubsection{Primary Source}% +% One single file generates all macro files and documentation. +% \begin{verbatim} +%aasclass.dtx +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex aasclass.dtx}}% +% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\ +% generates the readme, the installer, and a configuration file for +% this run. +% \begin{verbatim} +%Read.Me aasclass.ins ltxdoc.cfg +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex aasclass.ins}}% +% Typesetting the installer generates +% the class file, style file, user guide, and sample documents, +% \begin{verbatim} +%aastex.cls aastex.sty aasclass.tex aasguide.tex +%sample.tex table.tex +% +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \subsubsection{Documentation}% +% The following are the online documentation: +% \begin{verbatim} +%aasclass.dvi aasguide.dvi +%sample.dvi table.dvi +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}% +% The following are auxiliary files generated +% in the course of running \LaTeX: +% \begin{verbatim} +%aasclass.aux aasclass.toc +%aasclass.idx aasclass.ilg aasclass.ind +%aasguide.aux aasguide.toc +%aasguide.idx aasguide.ilg aasguide.ind +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \subsubsection{Font files}% +% In support of the |astro| font, certain files are provided. +% +% For those running Metafont, the primary source for the |astro| font is +% at |CTAN://tex-archive/fonts/astro| and consists of: +% \begin{verbatim} +%astrosym.doc +%astrosym.mf +%astrosym.uni +%astrosym.mac +%astrosym.com +%astrosym.tex +% \end{verbatim} +% with the first-mentioned file representing the documentation. +% +% Metrics for the font are provided as: +% \begin{verbatim} +%astrosym.tfm +%astrosym.pl +% \end{verbatim} +% +% For those with PostScript-capable previewers and printers, +% we provide the font in an ATM-compatible PostScript Type~1 format. +% +% For MacOS with ATM, +% \begin{verbatim} +%Astrosym.sit.bin +% metrics +% astrosym metrics % For Textures +% font +% Astro +% Astrosym.bmap +% \end{verbatim} +% +% For MacOS with ATM, +% \begin{verbatim} +%ASTROSYM.72 +%ASTROSYM.FON +%ASTROSYM.INF +%ASTROSYM.PFB +%ASTROSYM.PFM +% \end{verbatim} +% +% For UNIX, +% \begin{verbatim} +%72.Astrosym +%Astrosym.afm +%Astrosym.pfa +% \end{verbatim} +% +% +% \section{The {\sc docstrip} modules} +% +% \subsection{Code common to all modules}% +% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we +% want to require only one place in this file +% where the version number is stated, +% and we also want to ensure that the version +% number is embedded into every generated file. +% +% Here is some code for the document style, +% which can be run under both \LaTeX2.09 or +% \LaTeXe. +% If the latter, we terminate reading of the +% style file and +% simply load the document class instead. +% If the former, we provide dummy +% definitions for the \LaTeXe\ commands +% appearing in the style file. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<style>\ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined +%<style> \def\next{}% +%<style>\else +%<style> \def\next{% +%<style> \endinput +%<style> \@obsoletefile{aastex.cls}{aastex.sty}\LoadClass{aastex}% +%<style> }% +%<style>\fi\next +%<style>\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{\message{File: #1 #2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% To start with, we declare that +% this file can only be used with \LaTeXe. +% An appropriate message is displayed if +% a different \TeX{} format is used. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*doc|class|guide|sample|table> +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]% +%</doc|class|guide|sample|table> +% \end{macrocode} +% As desired, the following modules all +% take common version information: +% \begin{macrocode} +%<class>\ProvidesClass{aastex}% +%<style>\ProvidesFile{aastex.sty}% +%<guide>\ProvidesFile{aasguide.tex}% +%<symbols>\ProvidesFile{aassymbols.tex}% +%<sample>\ProvidesFile{sample.tex}% +%<table>\ProvidesFile{table1.tex}% +%<*doc> +\expandafter\ProvidesFile\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}% +%</doc> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Version and Date}% +% +% The following line contains, for once and for all, +% the version and date information. +% By various means, this information is reproduced +% consistently in all generated files and in the +% typeset documentation. +% \begin{macrocode} + [2005/06/22 5.2/AAS markup document class]% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{The driver module \texttt{doc}} +% +% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of +% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself, +% we can simply typeset the |.dtx| file directly, +% and there is thus rarely any need to +% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module. +% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that +% this code does not find its way into the other modules. +% +% The |\end{document}| command concludes the typesetting run. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*doc> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{The ltxdoc configuration file} +% +% This {\sc docstrip} module generates a local file \file{ltxdoc.cfg}, +% which contains customizing commands for +% when the programmer documentation \file{aasclass.dtx} is typeset. +% +% In particular, we request the production of an index of macros. +% +% For more information on such proccessing options, +% see the standard \LaTeX\ file \file{ltxdoc.dtx}. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{filecontents}{ltxdoc.cfg} +% ltxdoc.cfg - local copy for aasclass directory +\AtBeginDocument{\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs} +\AtEndDocument{\PrintIndex} +\end{filecontents} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{The Document Class Statement} +% The programmers documentation is formatted +% with the |ltxdoc| class. +% \begin{macrocode} +\documentclass[draft]{ltxdoc} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{Indexing directives} +% We don't want everything to appear in the index +% \begin{macrocode} +\DoNotIndex{\',\.,\@M,\@@input,\@Alph,\@alph,\@addtoreset,\@arabic} +\DoNotIndex{\@badmath,\@centercr,\@cite} +\DoNotIndex{\@dotsep,\@empty,\@float,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ignoretrue} +\DoNotIndex{\@input,\@ixpt,\@m,\@minus,\@mkboth} +\DoNotIndex{\@ne,\@nil,\@nomath,\@plus,\roman,\@set@topoint} +\DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta,\@tempdima,\@tempdimb} +\DoNotIndex{\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@viipt,\@viiipt,\@vipt} +\DoNotIndex{\@vpt,\@warning,\@xiipt,\@xipt,\@xivpt,\@xpt,\@xviipt} +\DoNotIndex{\@xxpt,\@xxvpt,\\,\ ,\addpenalty,\addtolength,\addvspace} +\DoNotIndex{\advance,\ast,\begin,\begingroup,\bfseries,\bgroup,\box} +\DoNotIndex{\bullet} +\DoNotIndex{\cdot,\cite,\CodelineIndex,\cr,\day,\DeclareOption} +\DoNotIndex{\def,\DisableCrossrefs,\divide,\DocInput,\documentclass} +\DoNotIndex{\DoNotIndex,\egroup,\ifdim,\else,\fi,\em,\endtrivlist} +\DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\end@dblfloat,\end@float,\endgroup} +\DoNotIndex{\endlist,\everycr,\everypar,\ExecuteOptions,\expandafter} +\DoNotIndex{\fbox} +\DoNotIndex{\filedate,\filename,\fileversion,\fontsize,\framebox,\gdef} +\DoNotIndex{\global,\halign,\hangindent,\hbox,\hfil,\hfill,\hrule} +\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\if@tempswa,\ifcase,\or,\fi,\fi} +\DoNotIndex{\ifhmode,\ifvmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi} +\DoNotIndex{\input} +\DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\let,\leftmark} +\DoNotIndex{\list,\llap,\long,\m@ne,\m@th,\mark,\markboth,\markright} +\DoNotIndex{\month,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newenvironment} +\DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newdimen} +\DoNotIndex{\newlength,\newpage,\nobreak,\noindent,\null,\number} +\DoNotIndex{\numberline,\OldMakeindex,\OnlyDescription,\p@} +\DoNotIndex{\pagestyle,\par,\paragraph,\paragraphmark,\parfillskip} +\DoNotIndex{\penalty,\PrintChanges,\PrintIndex,\ProcessOptions} +\DoNotIndex{\protect,\ProvidesClass,\raggedbottom,\raggedright} +\DoNotIndex{\refstepcounter,\relax,\renewcommand} +\DoNotIndex{\rightmargin,\rightmark,\rightskip,\rlap,\rmfamily} +\DoNotIndex{\secdef,\selectfont,\setbox,\setcounter,\setlength} +\DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sfcode,\skip,\sloppy,\slshape,\space} +\DoNotIndex{\symbol,\the,\trivlist,\typeout,\tw@,\undefined,\uppercase} +\DoNotIndex{\usecounter,\usefont,\usepackage,\vfil,\vfill,\viiipt} +\DoNotIndex{\viipt,\vipt,\vskip,\vspace} +\DoNotIndex{\wd,\xiipt,\year,\z@} +\DoNotIndex{\next} +% \end{macrocode} +% We \emph{do} want an index, using linenumbers +% \begin{macrocode} +\EnableCrossrefs +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives} +% We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the +% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1. +% \begin{macrocode} +\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1} +% \end{macrocode} +% The following command retrieves the date and version information +% from this file. +% \begin{macrocode} +\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Direct \file{ltxdoc} to produce an index and cross references. +% \begin{macrocode} +\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{Macros} +% Some commonly used abbreviations +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf {#1}}% +%\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt {#1}}% +\newcommand*{\Lcount}[1]{\textsl {\small#1}}% +\newcommand*{\pstyle}[1]{\textsl {#1}}% +\newcommand\aastex{AAS\TeX}% +\setlength\arraycolsep{0pt}% +\let\oarg\undefined +% \end{macrocode} +% Modify |theindex| environment so that it produces a TOC entry +% \begin{macrocode} +\makeatletter +\renewenvironment{theindex} + {\if@twocolumn + \@restonecolfalse + \else + \@restonecoltrue + \fi + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35\p@ + \twocolumn[\section{\indexname}]% +% \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% +% {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem} + {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} +\makeatother +% \end{macrocode} +% Look out! We are about to reach deep. +% \begin{macrocode} +\makeatletter +% \end{macrocode} +% We paste in a bit of very useful code extracted from +% \file{ltxguide.cls}, by Alan Jeffrey. +% \begin{macrocode} + % This code stolen from ltxguide.cls: +% Some hacks with verbatim... NB: this would be better done with the +% verbatim package, but this document has to run on any LaTeX +% installation. + +\let\o@verbatim\verbatim +\def\verbatim{% + \ifhmode\unskip\par\fi +% \nopagebreak % Overridden by list penalty + \ifx\@currsize\normalsize + \small + \fi + \o@verbatim +} + +% Here we extend the font-setting command to include making <> active +% (ie adjusting the input encoding). +\renewcommand \verbatim@font {% + \normalfont \ttfamily + \catcode`\<=\active + \catcode`\>=\active +} + +% Make |...| a synonym for \verb|...|. +\RequirePackage{shortvrb} +\MakeShortVerb{\|} + + +% Make active <...> produce italics surrounded by angle brackets +% (used in verbatim and \verb). +% << produces a less-than, and >> produces a greater-than. + +\begingroup + \catcode`\<=\active + \catcode`\>=\active + \gdef<{\@ifnextchar<\@lt\@meta} + \gdef>{\@ifnextchar>\@gt\@gtr@err} + \gdef\@meta#1>{\m{#1}} + \gdef\@lt<{\char`\<} + \gdef\@gt>{\char`\>} +\endgroup +\def\@gtr@err{% + \ClassError{ltxguide}{% + Isolated \protect>% + }{% + In this document class, \protect<...\protect> + is used to indicate a parameter.\MessageBreak + I've just found a \protect> on its own. + Perhaps you meant to type \protect>\protect>? + }% +} +\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`\do\,\do\'\do\-} + +% Various forms of argument: + +\newcommand{\m}[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it #1\/$\rangle$}} +\renewcommand{\arg}[1]{{\tt\string{}\m{#1}{\tt\string}}} +\newcommand{\oarg}[1]{{\tt[%] +}\m{#1}{\tt%[ +]}} +\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}} +\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax} +\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} +\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% + % end of code stolen from ltxguide.cls. Thanks, Alan. +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Define sectioning command below |\subsubsection| +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\subsubsubsection{% + \@startsection{subsubsection}{4}% + {\z@}{-15\p@\@plus-5\p@\@minus-2\p@}% + {5\p@}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Coax the version number into |filecontents|-generated files. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\endfilecontents{% + \immediate\write\reserved@c{% + \string\iffalse\space ltxdoc klootch^^J% + This file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.% + \string\fi + }% + \immediate\closeout\reserved@c + \def\T##1##2##3{% + \ifx##1\@undefined\else + \@latex@warning@no@line{##2 has been converted to Blank ##3e}% + \fi + }% + \T\L{Form Feed}{Lin}% + \T\I{Tab}{Spac}% + \immediate\write\@unused{}% +}% +\expandafter\let\csname endfilecontents*\endcsname\endfilecontents +% \end{macrocode} +% +% OK, an end to the hacking! +% \begin{macrocode} +\makeatother +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{The installer file} +% +% The installer \file{aasclass.ins} appears here. +% If you have retrieved the standard distribution of this class, +% the installer file is already on your filesystem. +% If you are bootstrapping, +% the first typesetting of the \file{.dtx} file +% will cause the installer to be generated. +% +% The following modules are used to direct +% {\sc docstrip} in generating the external files: +% \begin{center} +% \begin{tabular}{lll} +% \textbf{Module}&\textbf{File}&\textbf{Description}\\ +% class &\file{aastex.cls} &document class\\ +% style &\file{aastex.sty} &document style\\ +% doc &\file{aasclass.tex}&driver for programmer's documantation\\ +% guide &\file{aasguide.tex}&user guide\\ +% symbols &\file{aassymbols.tex}&AAS and AMS symbols crib sheet\\ +% sample &\file{sample.tex} &sample\\ +% table &\file{table.tex}&complex table\\ +% \end{tabular} +% \end{center} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{filecontents}{aasclass.ins} +%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files +%% from aasclass.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX. +\input docstrip +\preamble + +This is a generated file; +altering it directly is inadvisable; +instead, modify the original source file. +%See the URL in the file Read.Me. + +Copyright notice. + + These files are distributed + WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +\endpreamble +\keepsilent +\generate{% + \file{aastex.cls}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{class}}% + \file{aastex.sty}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{style}}% + \file{aasclass.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{doc}}% + \file{aasguide.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{guide}}% + \file{aassymbols.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{symbols}}% + \file{sample.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{sample}}% + \file{table.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{table}}% +}% +\ifToplevel{ +\Msg{***********************************************************} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move the following} +\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* \space\space aastex.cls} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* To produce the user documentation, + run aasguide.tex through LaTeX.} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* To produce the AAS and AMS symbols crib sheet, + run aassymbols.tex through LaTeX.} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* To typeset the aastex sample document, + run sample.tex and table.tex + through LaTeX.} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* To produce the programmer documentation, + run aasclass.dtx through LaTeX.} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* Happy TeXing} +\Msg{***********************************************************} +} +\endbatchfile +\end{filecontents} +% \end{macrocode} +% Note that, because all of the files generated by the installer +% are part of the standard distribution, it will +% be necessary to run the installer only when bootstrapping +% (or, of course, during development). +% Note, too, that it is rare to generate the |doc| +% module because it suffices to simply typeset the |.dtx| file itself. +% +% \subsubsection{The \file{Read.Me} File} +% As promised above, here is the contents of the +% readme file. That file serves a double purpose, +% since it also constitutes the beginining of the +% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after +% all, to have appear at the beginning of the +% typeset documentation? +% +% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in +% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This'' +% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58. +% +% Note the appearance of the +% |\StopEventually| command, which marks the +% dividing line between the user documentation +% and the programmer documentation. +% The former simply summarize the installation +% instructions and refers the reader to +% the user guide \file{awljavgd}. +% +% The usual user will not be asked to +% do a full build, not to speak +% of the bootstrap. +% Instructions for carrying these processes +% begin the programmer's manual. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{filecontents*}{Read.Me} +\title{% + The \aastex\ Document Class For \LaTeXe\\ + Programmer's Manual% + \thanks{% + This file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.% + % For version number and date, search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file, + % or see the end of the Read.Me file. + }% +}% + +\author{% +Chris Biemesderfer (\texttt{mailto:chris@seagoat.com}), v4\\ +Arthur Ogawa (\texttt{mailto:ogawa@teleport.com}), v\fileversion\\ +Copyright (C) 1998 AAS +}% +\maketitle + +\aastex\ provides a markup system and formatter for authoring +papers to be submitted electronically to a number of +astonomy journals. +This file embodies the document class, +the implementation, and the user documentation. + +The distribution point for \aastex\ is +\file{ftp://ftp.aas.org/pubs/aastex50.zip}, which contains +fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation. + +To use this document class, you must have a working +\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe. +Certain features of \aastex\ (such as landscape tables) +require a PostScript printer. + +To install, retrieve the distribution, +unpack it into a directory on the target computer, +and move the file \file{aastex.cls} +into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX. + +If you will be using the |astro| font in your \aastex\ documents, +put the file \file{Astrosym.tfm} where \TeX\ can find it +(Textures users will put \file{Astrosym metrics} into their \file{TeX fonts} folder). +Now either install the (ATM-compatible) PostScript Type~1 fonts +appropriate to your operating system and \TeX\ implementation, +or install the MetaFont source (both provided with \aastex). +In any case, you are responsible for properly installing the +|astro| font on your system. + +Then print out the user guide \file{aasguide.dvi} and +the two sample documents, \file{sample.dvi} and \file{table.dvi}. +If need be, print the programmer's manual \file{aasclass.dvi}. + +\StopEventually{}\tableofcontents + +\section{Processing Instructions} + +The document class \file{aastex.cls} (plus other macro files), +the user documentation \file{aasguide.tex}, +and the sample documents +are generated from this file, \file{aasclass.dtx}, +via the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX. +The documentation that you are now reading is generated from +the same file by simply typesetting it with \LaTeX. + +\subsection{Build Instructions for V5.0} + +You may bootstrap \aastex\ solely from \file{aasclass.dtx}. +Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ on your computer, +then carry out the following steps: +\begin{enumerate} + +\item +Within an otherwise empty directory, +typeset \file{aasclass.dtx} with \LaTeX; +you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading, +along with the installer \file{aasclass.ins} and the file \file{Read.Me}. + +Note that you will have to run MakeIndex (using the \LaTeX\ standard +\file{gind.ist}) and retypeset with \LaTeX\ as appropriate. + +\item +Now typeset \file{aasclass.ins}, thereby generating +macro files \file{aastex.cls}, and \file{aastex.sty}, user documentation \file{aasguide.tex}, \file{aassymbols.tex}, +the sample file \file{sample.tex} and the sample table +\file{table.tex}. + +\item +Install \file{aastex.cls} and \file{aastex.sty}: +move them to a location +in your file system where they will be found by \LaTeX. + +\item +Typeset \file{aasguide.tex} to obtain the user documentation +(you will have to run MakeIndex and retypeset as needed), + +\item +Typeset the sample file \file{sample.tex}. +\end{enumerate} + +For your reference, +there are six \TeX\ log files appended to this file +(locate them by searching on |preloaded format=|). +They result respectively from typesetting +\file{aasclass.dtx}, \file{aasclass.ins}, \file{aasguide.tex}, +\file{aassymbols.tex}, +\file{sample.tex}, \file{table.tex}. + +\subsection{Build Instructions for V4.1} + +When you bootstrap V5.0, you automatically create the files rquired for the +V4.1 distribution, which consists of a number of the documents for V4.0 +along with style files to patch it, plus revised sample documents. +The user guide for V5.0 is also the guide for 4.1; relevant differences +appear in an appendix. + +The files for version~4.1 are located in a separate part of the distribution tree, +a directory called \file{./V4.1/}. + +To build, simply copy the file +\file{aastex.sty} into the 4.1 directory. +Then copy +the sample files \file{sample.tex}, \file{sample2.tex}, and \file{samptbls.tex}, +and the sample tables +\file{table1.tex}, \file{table2.tex}, \file{table3.tex}, and \file{complext.tex} +into the same directory. +Finally, copy +\file{aasguide.dvi} and \file{aasguide.ps} into the same directory. + +\end{filecontents*} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{The Body of the Programmers Documentation} +% Here is the document body, containing only a +% |\DocInput| directive---referring to this very file. +% This very cute self-reference is a common |ltxdoc| idiom. +% \begin{macrocode} +\begin{document}% +\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}% +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}% +\PrintIndex +% ^^A\PrintChanges +\end{document} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% End of the |doc| module: +% \begin{macrocode} +%</doc> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% \section{Common to Document Style and Class}% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\substitute@option} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\substitute@option#1#2{% + \ClassWarning{aastex}{% + Substyle #1 is deprecated in aastex. + Using #2 instead (please fix your document). + }\@nameuse{ds@#2}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%</class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \section{Document Style Module}% +% +% The document style is provided for compatibility sake. +% If the user's document has +% \begin{verbatim} +%\documentstyle[<options>]{aastex}% +% \end{verbatim} +% and it is run under \LaTeXe, then this style file will be called, +% but the document class will be loaded instead. +% A warning message is given admonishing the user to switch to +% using |\documentclass|. +% +% If the same document is run under \LaTeX 2.09, \aastex\ will run +% version 4.1 (which is an updated version~4.0). +% +% Here begins the style file: +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Document Style Options}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\ClassWarning} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ClassWarning#1#2{\@warning{Style #1: #2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{ds@manuscript} +% \begin{macro}{ds@preprint} +% \begin{macro}{ds@preprint2} +% The substyle options are defined here. +% As in the document class, exactly one substyle will be in effect; +% the default being the |manuscript| substyle. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ds@manuscript{\def\aastex@substyle{aasms4}}% +\def\aastex@substyle{aasms4}% +\def\ds@preprint{\def\aastex@substyle{aaspp4}}% +\@namedef{ds@preprint2}{\def\aastex@substyle{aas2pp4}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{ds@aasms4} +% \begin{macro}{ds@aaspp4} +% \begin{macro}{ds@aas2pp4} +% \begin{macro}{ds@ajpt4} +% \begin{macro}{ds@apjpt4} +% For backward compatibility, we declare options corresponding to V4.0 +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{ds@aasms4}{\substitute@option{aasms4}{manuscript}}% +\@namedef{ds@aaspp4}{\substitute@option{aaspp4}{preprint}}% +\@namedef{ds@aas2pp4}{\substitute@option{aas2pp4}{preprint2}}% +\@namedef{ds@aj_pt4}{\substitute@option{aj_pt4}{preprint}}% +\@namedef{ds@apjpt4}{\substitute@option{apjpt4}{preprint}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{ds@eqsecnum} +% \begin{macro}{ds@tighten} +% \begin{macro}{ds@flushrt} +% The remaining document style options are defined here. +% They have the same significance as those of the +% document class. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ds@eqsecnum{\AtEndOfClass{\eqsecnum}}% +\def\ds@tighten{\AtEndOfClass{\tightenlines}}% +\def\ds@flushrt{% + \AtEndOfClass{% + \@rightskip=\z@\rightskip\@rightskip % Flush right + \pretolerance=100\relax % Enable hyphenation + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{\LaTeXe\ Equipment Needed}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@testopt} +% The following is snitched from \LaTeX2e. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@testopt#1#2{% + \@ifnextchar[{#1}{#1[#2]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% The remaining definitions merely provide for +% a bare emulation of \LaTeXe. +% +% \begin{macro}{\AtEndOfClass} +% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\appdef#1#2{% + \toks@\expandafter{#1}\toks\@ne{#2}\edef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks\@ne}% +}% +\def\AtEndOfClass{\appdef\@styleh@@k}% +\def\@styleh@@k{}% +\def\AtBeginDocument{\appdef\@begindocumenthook}% +\def\@begindocumenthook{}% +\appdef\document{\@begindocumenthook}% +\def\@latex@warning{\@warning}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% Some low-level macros. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\protected@edef{\edef}% +\def\@finalstrut#1{\strut}% +\let\color@begingroup\begingroup +\let\color@endgroup\endgroup +\def\G@refundefinedtrue{}% +\long\def\@firstofone#1{#1}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Font-oriented macros. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\rmfamily{\rm}% +\def\itshape{\it}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Base Document Style and Packages}% +% +% Read in the base document style, the \LaTeX\ standard +% article style. +% It will execute the document style options. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@@input article.sty\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Add in the |natbib| package for \LaTeX2.09 +% \begin{macrocode} +\@@input natbib209.sty\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Most of the remainder of the document style +% is drawn from the code going into \file{aastex.cls}. +% +% We first read in the kernel modifications, +% then read in the selected V4.0 substyle, +% insert our V4.1 overrides, +% then act on the document style options. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \section{Document Class Module} +% The document class module comprises this and the next +% five sections. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*class> +\ClassInfo{aastex}{% + Original \protect\LaTeX2.09 style + by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@seagoat.com). + Adapted to \protect\LaTeXe\space + by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com)% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Type Size} +% \begin{macro}{\aas@ptsize} +% The macro |\aas@ptsize| works very much like +% the |\@ptsize| macro of \file{classes.dtx}, +% but in this class. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\iflong@abstract +\global\long@abstractfalse +\DeclareOption{10pt}{\newcommand\aas@ptsize{0}}% +\DeclareOption{11pt}{\newcommand\aas@ptsize{1}}% +\DeclareOption{12pt}{\newcommand\aas@ptsize{2}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Landscape Orientation} +% The option \Lopt{landscape} is disabled in this document class. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{landscape}{\OptionNotUsed}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Equations Numbered by Section} +% +% The option \Lopt{eqsecnum} invokes |\eqsecnum|, q.v. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{eqsecnum}{\AtEndOfClass{\eqsecnum}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Longabstract} +% The option \Lopt{longabstract} cause the long abstract text to break into +% next page within preprint2. Using this option has no effect with other styles. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{longabstract}{\global\long@abstracttrue} +% use when abstract exceed title page +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Set Text Justified Rather Than Ragged Right} +% +% The option \Lopt{flushrt} causes the text to set +% justified, hyphenated rather than ragged right, nohyphens +% as is normal in the |manuscript| substyle. +% +% Asserting this option presently has no effect in +% the other substyles because they make no changes +% to the justification. If this situation changes, +% be careful to supply the appropriate hook as needed. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{flushrt}{\let\opt@just\just@just}% +\let\opt@just\@empty +\def\just@just{% + \@rightskip\z@skip + \rightskip\@rightskip + \pretolerance=100\relax +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Use Tight Leading Rather Than Doublespace} +% +% The option \Lopt{tighten} causes the text to set +% with tight leading rather than double spacing +% as is normal in the |manuscript| substyle. +% +% Asserting this option presently has no effect in +% the other substyles because they make no changes +% to the justification. If this situation changes, +% be careful to supply the appropriate hook as needed. +% +% Not! In the manuscript substyle, leading is doubled and +% the |\tightenlines| command is effectively disabled. +% So, what gives? +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{tighten}{\def\opt@tighten{\tightenlines}}% +\let\opt@tighten\@empty +% \end{macrocode} + +% \subsection{Summary}% +% The following are local options to this document class. +% +% \begin{center} +% \begin{tabular}{ll} +% |eqsecnum|&equations numbered by section\\ +% |flushrt|&set text justified\\ +% |tighten|&use tight leading\\ +% \end{tabular} +% \end{center} +% +% \subsection{Substyle Options}% +% An \aastex\ document must have exactly one class option selected from +% the following list; the default is |manuscript|. +% This option determines the substyle, signifying the +% basic formatting choice for the document. +% \begin{center} +% \begin{tabular}{ll} +% \bfseries Class Option&\bfseries Purpose\\ +% |manuscript|&Manuscript (the default)\\ +% |preprint|&Preprint\\ +% |preprint2|&Preprint in two columns +% \end{tabular} +% \end{center} +% Note that in the case of |preprint2|, we immediately signal +% the base document class that the two-column grid will be used. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{manuscript}{\def\aas@substyle{manuscript}\long@abstractfalse} +\DeclareOption{preprint}{\def\aas@substyle{preprint}\long@abstractfalse} +\DeclareOption{preprint2}{\def\aas@substyle{preprint2}\@twocolumntrue} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% For backward compatibility, we declare options corresponding to V4.0 +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{aasms4}{\substitute@option{aasms4}{manuscript}}% +\DeclareOption{aaspp4}{\substitute@option{aaspp4}{preprint}}% +\DeclareOption{aas2pp4}{\substitute@option{aas2pp4}{preprint2}}% +\DeclareOption{aj_pt4}{\substitute@option{aj_pt4}{preprint}}% +\DeclareOption{apjpt4}{\substitute@option{apjpt4}{preprint}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\aas@substyle} +% At the end of package processing, we invoke the selected +% substyle. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\aas@substyle{manuscript}% +\AtEndOfPackage{% + \@nameuse{aas@\aas@substyle}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Font Complement} +% \begin{macro}{astro} +% Invoking the |astro| class option causes the +% astro font to be loaded at the appropriate size. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{astro}{\AtBeginDocument{\load@astro}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Default Option}% +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Executing Options} +% +% Here we execute the default options to initialize certain +% variables. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,oneside,onecolumn,final}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The |\ProcessOptions| command causes the execution of the code +% for every option \Lopt{FOO} +% which is declared and for which the user typed +% the \Lopt{FOO} option in his +% |\documentclass| command. For every option \Lopt{BAR} he typed, +% which is not declared, the option is assumed to be a global option. +% All options will be passed as document options to any +% |\usepackage| command in the document preamble. +% +% Note that |\ProcessOptions| is followed by |\relax| in order to +% signal conclusively that the *-form has not been used. +% \begin{macrocode} +\ProcessOptions\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{aas@size@manuscript} +% \begin{macro}{aas@size@preprint} +% \begin{macro}{aas@size@preprint2} +% Now that local options have been processed, we know what substyle to use. +% We execute a procedure to pass the proper type size option to +% the base class. +% Note that the macro |\aas@ptsize| acquires a value as a side effect of this +% processing. +% +% As should be evident, the manuscript substyle mandates 12point, the default +% size for preprint is 11 point, and that for two-column preprint is 10 point. +% +% Implementation note: here we must use \LaTeXe's cumbersome methods because we +% have not yet defined the Boolean control macros. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{aas@size@manuscript}{% + \def\aas@ptsize{2}% + \pass@aassize +}% +\@namedef{aas@size@preprint}{% + \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi + {\def\aas@ptsize{1}}{}% + \pass@aassize +}% +\@namedef{aas@size@preprint2}{% + \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi + {\def\aas@ptsize{0}}{}% + \pass@aassize +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pass@aassize} +% The procedure |\pass@aassize| is the bottleproc for passing the size option +% down to the base class, which is taken to be the |article| class. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pass@aassize{% + \expandafter\PassOptionsToClass\expandafter{\expandafter1\aas@ptsize pt}{article}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% Now exercise the selected substyle option. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@nameuse{aas@size@\aas@substyle}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% \section{Loading the Base Document Class and Packages} +%\aastex\ is a variant of the standard \LaTeX\ article class: +% |CTAN://macros/latex/unpacked|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\LoadClass{article}[1995/12/01]% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We always load the standard \LaTeX\ symbol package: +% |CTAN://macros/latex/base|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{latexsym}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We always load the standard \LaTeX\ extended graphics package: +% |CTAN://macros/latex/packages/graphics|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{graphicx}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The AMS |amssym| package provides access to symbols in the AMS fonts: +% |CTAN://macros/latex/packages/amslatex|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{amssymb}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The contributed \LaTeX\ |natbib| package: +% |CTAN://macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{natbib}% +\newcommand{\bibstyle@aas}{\bibpunct{(}{)}{;}{a}{}{,}} +\@citestyle{aas} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The standard \LaTeX\ verbatim package may not be really necessary, but +% this code may serve as a model for loading other classes: +% |CTAN://macros/latex/packages/tools|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\RequirePackage{verbatim}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Here ends the code for the document class. +% The next section provides code that is common to +% the document class and document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</class> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \section{Extensions to the \LaTeX\ Kernel}% +% We extend and modify \LaTeX. +% Most of these tools are to help make the job of the +% class file writer easier; some correct errors introduced +% in \LaTeXe. +% +% All of the kernel extensions are incorporated into +% the document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{New Tools}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@to} +% \begin{macro}{\ulap} +% \begin{macro}{\dlap} +% +% The macro |\@to| is simple shorthand for |to|; +% the user commands |\ulap| and |\dlap| augment |\llap| and |\rlap|. +% \begin{verbatim} +% \ulap{<vertical mode material>} % Will protrude upward +% \dlap{<vertical mode material>} % Will protrude downward +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@to{to}% +\newcommand\ulap[1]{\vbox\@to\z@{{\vss#1}}}% +\newcommand\dlap[1]{\vbox\@to\z@{{#1\vss}}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\let@environment} +% The directive |\let@environment| takes care of a common programming +% idiom whereby one environment is made a synonym for another. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\let@environment[2]{% + \expandafter\let + \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname#2\endcsname + \expandafter\let + \csname end#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname end#2\endcsname + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\say} +% \begin{macro}{\sayythe} +% The commands |\say| and |\saythe| cause diagnostic messages in the +% \TeX\ log that give the value of a control sequence name or a register +% respectively. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\say[1]{\typeout{<\noexpand#1=\meaning#1>}}% +\newcommand\saythe[1]{\typeout{<\noexpand#1=\the#1>}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\tracingplain} +% The command |\tracingplain| causes \TeX's tracing parameters to +% return to the values set by default. This command is sometimes +% useful when you have said |\tracingall| somewhere and want to +% restore. +% The |\traceoutput| command causes |\tracingoutput| diagnostics +% upon |\shipout|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\tracingplain{% + \tracingonline\z@\tracingcommands\z@\tracingstats\z@ + \tracingpages\z@\tracingoutput\z@\tracinglostchars\@ne + \tracingmacros\z@\tracingparagraphs\z@\tracingrestores\z@ + \showboxbreadth5\showboxdepth3\relax %\errorstopmode + }% +\newcommand\traceoutput{% + \appdef\@resetactivechars{\showoutput}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\nohyphenation} +% \begin{macro}{\offhyphenation} +% The command |\nohyphenation| immediately preceding a word will +% prevent \TeX\ from hyphenating that word; +% the |\offhyphenation| command causes \TeX\ to not hyphenate within its +% scope. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\nohyphenation{\kern\z@}% +\newcommand\offhyphenation{% + \lefthyphenmin\maxdimen\emergencystretch8\p@ +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\substitute@command} +% \begin{macro}{\remove@command} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\substitute@command#1#2{% + \ClassWarning{aastex}{% + Command \protect#1\space is deprecated in aastex. + Using \protect#2\space instead (please fix your document). + }% + #2% +}% +\def\remove@command#1{% + \ClassWarning{aastex}{% + Command \protect#1\space is deprecated in aastex. + Please remove it from your document% + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \subsection{Boolean Control}% +% \begin{macro}{\prepdef} +% \begin{macro}{\appdef} +% +% Provide the capability of performing head- and tail patches. +% The procedure |\prepdef| prepends to the given macro +% the tokens specified in its second argument. +% Likewise for |\appdef|, except that it appends. +% Note that the first 10 toks registers are utility registers, +% and we simply make a control sequence name, |\toks@ii|, for one of +% them. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@provide#1{%Implicit #2 + \@ifxundefined#1{\def#1}{\def\@tempa}% +}% +\def\prepdef#1#2{% + \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}% + \toks@ii{#2}% + \edef#1{\the\toks@ii\the\toks@}% +}% +\def\appdef#1#2{% + \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}% + \toks@ii{#2}% + \edef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks@ii}% +}% +\def\appgdef#1#2{% + \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}% + \toks@ii{#2}% + \xdef#1{\the\toks@\the\toks@ii}% +}% +\toksdef\toks@ii=\tw@ +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ifxundefined} +% We introduce just enough of the Boolean calculus for \TeX. +% Alan Jeffrey was the pioneer here, with an article in TUGboat +% (Vol. 11, No. 2, page 237). +% This implementation owes a debt to +% William Baxter (web@superscript.com). +% See articles by Baxter and Ogawa in the proceedings of the +% 1994 TUG meeting. +% +% Other utility procedures used |\@ifxundefined|, +% which is defined here in terms of |\@ifx|. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\@ifxundefined#1{\@ifx{\undefined#1}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@boolean} +% \begin{macro}{\@boole@def} +% In order to define |\@ifx|, we first must create the +% ``defining word'' (term taken form our Forth vocabulary) +% |\@boole@def|, which employs |\@boolean| to do its job. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@boolean#1#2{% + \long\def#1{% + #2% \if<something> + \expandafter\boolean@true + \else + \expandafter\boolean@false + \fi + }% +}% +\def\@boole@def#1#{\@boolean{#1}}% Implicit #2 +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ifx} +% \begin{macro}{\@ifx@empty} +% We can now invoke the defining word to create +% the procedure |\@ifx|. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\@boole@def\@ifx#1{\ifx#1}% +\@boole@def\@ifx@empty#1{\ifx\@empty#1}% +\@boole@def\@ifnum#1{\ifnum#1}% +\@boole@def\@ifdim#1{\ifdim#1}% +\@boole@def\@ifvoid#1{\ifvoid#1}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\boolean@true} +% \begin{macro}{\boolean@false} +% +% Note that when a Boolean operator expands, it +% employs two macros that act as selectors, defined here. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\boolean@true#1#2{#1}% +\long\def\boolean@false#1#2{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Damage Control}% +% +% \subsubsection{Vertical Stuff}% +% \begin{macro}{\addpenalty} +% \begin{macro}{\addvspace} +% Repair some \LaTeX\ damage. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand\addpenalty[1]{% + \ifvmode + \if@minipage + \else + \if@nobreak + \else + \ifinner + \@tempskipa\lastskip \unskip + \@tempcnta\lastpenalty \unpenalty + \ifnum#1<\@tempcnta + \penalty#1\relax + \else + \penalty\@tempcnta + \fi + \vskip\@tempskipa + \else + \ifdim\lastskip=\z@ + \penalty#1\relax + \else + \@tempskipb\lastskip + \vskip-\lastskip + \penalty#1% + \vskip\@tempskipb + \fi + \fi + \fi + \fi + \else + \@noitemerr + \fi +}% +% +\renewcommand\addvspace[1]{% + \ifvmode + \if@minipage + \else + \ifinner + \@tempskipa\lastskip \unskip + \ifdim\@tempskipa=\z@ + \vskip#1\relax + \else + \@tempskipb#1\relax + \ifdim\@tempskipa<\@tempskipb + \vskip\@tempskipb + \else + \ifdim\@tempskipb<\z@ + \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@ + \vskip\@tempskipa + \else + \advance\@tempskipb\@tempskipa + \vskip\@tempskipb + \fi + \else + \vskip\@tempskipa + \fi + \fi + \fi + \else + \ifdim\lastskip=\z@ + \vskip#1\relax + \else + \@tempskipb#1\relax + \@xaddvskip + \fi + \fi + \fi + \else + \@noitemerr + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Title Page Formatting}% +% \begin{macro}{\maketitle@page} +% The |\maketitle| (for a title page) of \file{classes.dtx}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\maketitle@page{% + \maketitle@disarm + \begin{titlepage}% + \let\footnotesize\small + \let\footnoterule\relax + \let \footnote \thanks +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \@maketitle +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \@thanks + \vfil\null + \end{titlepage}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \after@maketitle +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\maketitle@runin} +% The |\maketitle| (for a run-in title page) of \file{classes.dtx} +% appears to be broken. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\maketitle@runin{% + \par + \maketitle@disarm + \begingroup + %%%%\renewcommand\thefootnote{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}% + \def\@makefnmark{\rlap{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}}}% + \long\def\@makefntext##1{% + \parindent 1em\noindent + \hb@xt@1.8em{% + \hss\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}% + }% + ##1% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% Here, we swap the two predicates: +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@twocolumn + \@ifnum{\col@number=\@ne}{% + \global\let\@title@footnote@text\@empty% + \twocolumn[\let\@footnotetext\@title@footnotetext\@maketitle]% + \@title@footnote@text% + }{% + \@maketitle + }% + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \newpage + \global\@topnum\z@ % Prevents figures from going at top of page. + \@maketitle + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + %\thispagestyle{plain}% + \@thanks +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \endgroup + \after@maketitle +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\after@maketitle} +% Common processing for title whether run-in or page. And switching from one-column +% to two-column mode if \Lopt{longabstract} option is used. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\after@maketitle{% + \iflong@abstract % + \let\@makecol\@makecol@pptt + \let\@outputdblcol\@outputdblcol@pptt + \global\columnwidth\textwidth% + \global\advance\columnwidth-\columnsep + \global\divide\columnwidth\tw@ + \global\hsize\columnwidth + \global\linewidth\columnwidth + \global\@twocolumntrue + \global\@firstcolumntrue + \col@number \tw@ + \@ifnextchar [\@topnewpage\@floatplacement + \begin{strip}% separate the abstract text from two-column text + \end{strip} + \fi + %%%\setcounter{footnote}{0}% + \global\let\thanks\@gobble + \global\let\maketitle\relax + \global\let\@maketitle\relax + \global\let\@thanks\@empty + \global\let\@author\@empty + \global\let\@date\@empty + \global\let\@title\@empty + \global\let\title\relax + \global\let\author\relax + \global\let\date\relax + \global\let\and\relax + \global\let\email\@text@email + \global\firsttabskip\z@ +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% Defer until the end of the processing for the document class +% the decision between the two formatting procedures. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndOfClass{% + \if@titlepage + \let\maketitle\maketitle@page + \else + \let\maketitle\maketitle@runin + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \subsubsection{Repairing Footnotes}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@mpfootnotetext} +% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext} +% Reparametrize so that |\footnotesize| (a user-level command) +% is not invoked---use |\footnote@size| instead. +% In general, user-level commands should not be invoked by +% low-level formatting procedures. +% +% Also, factor out the shared code into a procedure called |\set@footnotetext|. +% \begin{macrocode} +% +\def\open@footnotetext{% + \insert\footins\bgroup % \egroup in \close@footnotetext + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \splittopskip\footnotesep + \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox + \floatingpenalty \@MM + \reset@font\footnote@size + \hsize\columnwidth + \@parboxrestore +}% +\def\close@footnotetext#1{% + \color@begingroup + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces + #1\@finalstrut\strutbox + }% + \color@endgroup + \egroup +}% +\def\@footnotetext{% Implict #1 + \open@footnotetext + \set@footnotetext{p@footnote}% +}% +% +\def\@mpfootnotetext{% Implict #1 + \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox\bgroup % \egroup in \set@footnotetext + \unvbox\@mpfootins + \set@footnotetext{p@mpfootnote}% +}% +\long\def\set@footnotetext#1{%Implicit #2 + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{% + \csname #1\endcsname\@thefnmark + }% + \close@footnotetext +}% +\def\@title@footnotetext#1{% + \protected@edef\@tempa{\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% + \expandafter\appgdef + \expandafter\@title@footnote@text + \expandafter{% + \expandafter\insert@footnotetext + \expandafter{\@tempa}{#1}}% +}% +\def\insert@footnotetext#1{%Implicit #2 + \open@footnotetext + \def\@thefnmark{#1}% + \def\@currentlabel{#1}% + \close@footnotetext +}% +% +\AtBeginDocument{% + \ifx\footnote@size\undefined + \let\footnote@size\footnotesize + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \subsection{Eqnarray Correction}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\eqnarray@broken} +% \begin{macro}{\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed} +% Team \LaTeX\ still hasn't repaired Leslie's broken +% definition of |eqnarray|. +% Let us be bold\dots. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\eqnarray@broken{% + \stepcounter{equation}\def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% + \global\@eqnswtrue\m@th\global\@eqcnt\z@ + \tabskip\mathindent + \let\\=\@eqncr + \setlength\abovedisplayskip{\topsep}% + \ifvmode\addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\partopsep}\fi + \addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\parskip}% + \setlength\belowdisplayskip{\abovedisplayskip}% + \setlength\belowdisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}% + \setlength\abovedisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}% + $$% + \everycr{}% + \halign to\linewidth\bgroup + \hskip\@centering$\displaystyle\tabskip\z@skip{##}$\@eqnsel + &\global\@eqcnt\@ne + \hskip\tw@\arraycolsep + \hfil${##}$\hfil + &\global\@eqcnt\tw@ + \hskip\tw@\arraycolsep + $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil\tabskip\@centering + &\global\@eqcnt\thr@@\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup + \tabskip\z@skip + \cr +}% +\long\def\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed{% + \stepcounter{equation}\def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% + \global\@eqnswtrue\m@th\global\@eqcnt\z@ + \tabskip\mathindent + \let\\=\@eqncr + \setlength\abovedisplayskip{\topsep}% + \ifvmode\addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\partopsep}\fi + \addtolength\abovedisplayskip{\parskip}% + \setlength\belowdisplayskip{\abovedisplayskip}% + \setlength\belowdisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}% + \setlength\abovedisplayshortskip{\abovedisplayskip}% + $$% + \everycr{}% + \halign\@to\linewidth\bgroup + \hskip\@centering$\displaystyle\tabskip\z@skip{##}$\@eqnsel + &\global\@eqcnt\@ne + \hskip\tw@\eqncolsep + \hfil${{}##{}}$\hfil + &\global\@eqcnt\tw@ + \hskip\tw@\eqncolsep + $\displaystyle{##}$\hfil\tabskip\@centering + &\global\@eqcnt\thr@@\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss##\egroup + \tabskip\z@skip + \cr +}% +\ifx\eqnarray\eqnarray@broken + \ClassWarningNoLine{aastex}{Repairing broken {eqnarray} definition}% + \let\eqnarray\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed +\fi +\let\eqnarray@broken\relax +\let\eqnarray@fleqn@fixed\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Customization of Sections}% +% \begin{macro}{\@startsection} +% Patch a head hook into the basic sectioning command. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{% + \@startsection@hook + \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi + \par + \@tempskipa #4\relax + \@afterindenttrue + \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@ + \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse + \fi + \if@nobreak + \everypar{}% + \else + \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa + \fi + \@ifstar + {\@ssect{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}% + {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}% +}% +\def\@startsection@hook{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@sect} +% \begin{macro}{\@ssect} +% Adjust section heading typography slightly. The manuscript editors +% seem to like the idea that the heads will be centered, and that there +% will be a |.| trailing the section number. This requires hacking +% below the normal \LaTeX\ programming interface (|\@startsection|), +% since the centering has to be turned on and off again before the +% section starts. +% +% FIXME: cf \LaTeX\ standard definitions. Hooks for |\sec@upcase| and +% centering. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth + \let\@svsec\@empty + \else + \refstepcounter{#1}\protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax} + \fi + \@tempskipa #5\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ + \begingroup \section@centering#6{% + \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}\interlinepenalty \@M\sec@upcase{#8}\@@par}% + \endgroup + \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}\addcontentsline + {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi + #7}\else + \def\@svsechd{% + #6{\hskip#3\relax\@svsec + \sec@upcase{#8}}% + \csname #1mark\endcsname + {#7}\addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{% + \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth + \else + \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}% + \fi + #7}}\fi + \@xsect{#5}% +}% +% +\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax + \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ + \begingroup + \section@centering + #4{% + \@hangfrom{\hskip #1}\interlinepenalty \@M + \sec@upcase{#5}\@@par}\endgroup + \else + \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax \sec@upcase{#5}}}\fi + \@xsect{#3}}% +\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad} +\def\section@centering{\centering}% +\def\sec@upcase#1{\relax{#1}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Customization of Citations}% +% \begin{macro}{\@citex} +% Modify |\@citex| so that individual citation texts are {\em not} +% |\hbox|ed. +% +% This allows \TeX\ to break lines at spaces between words in citations. +% Remove the obnoxious |{\bf ?}| that was inserted in the text when +% undefined citations are encountered; here, the warning message is +% printed only on the terminal. +% +% FIXME: doublecheck compatibility with natbib! +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@citex[#1]#2{% + \let\@citea\@empty + \@cite{% + \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% + \@citea + \def\@citea{,\penalty\@m\ }% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}% + \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{% +% \mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}% + \G@refundefinedtrue + \@latex@warning{% + Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined% + }% + }{% +% \hbox{% + \csname b@\@citeb\endcsname +% }% + }% + }% + }{#1}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% All of the kernel extensions have been incorporated into +% the document class and document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \section{More of the Document Style Module}% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Now that kernel modifications are complete, read in the selected substyle. +% \begin{macrocode} +\expandafter\@@input\aastex@substyle.sty\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% +% And begin patching the code. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\revtex@ver{4.1}% +\def\revtex@date{25 Jan 99}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Undefine commands that we are about to override. +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\lefthead\undefined +\let\righthead\undefined +\let\references\undefined +\let\reference\undefined +\let\markcite\undefined +\let\colhead\undefined +\let\tablecolumns\undefined +\let\tablecaption\undefined +\let\tablehead\undefined +\let\tabletail\undefined +\let\tablewidth\undefined +\let\tableheadfrac\undefined +\let\deluxetable\undefined +\let\startdata\undefined +\let\tablevspace\undefined +\let\tablebreak\undefined +\let\cutinhead\undefined +\let\sidehead\undefined +\let\tablerefs\undefined +\let\tablecomments\undefined +\let\phn\undefined +\let\phd\undefined +\let\phs\undefined +\let\phm\undefined +\let\sq\undefined +\let\arcdeg\undefined +\let\arcmin\undefined +\let\arcsec\undefined +\let\fd\undefined +\let\fh\undefined +\let\fm\undefined +\let\fs\undefined +\let\fdg\undefined +\let\fp\undefined +\let\micron\undefined +\let\case\undefined +\let\slantfrac\undefined +\let\onehalf\undefined +\let\onethird\undefined +\let\twothirds\undefined +\let\onequarter\undefined +\let\threequarters\undefined +\let\ubvr\undefined +\let\ub\undefined +\let\bv\undefined +\let\vr\undefined +\let\ur\undefined +\let\ion\undefined +\let\nodata\undefined +\let\sun\undefined +\let\earth\undefined +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The overrides and additions to the V4.0 +% document style are drawn from the same code that goes into +% the document class. +% +% Once those emendments have been read in, +% we will return to the document style to finish things off. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \section{\aastex\ Additions and Amendments} +% This section presents commands that are specific to the \aastex\ +% macro package. +% +% All of the \aastex\ emendments are incorporated into the document class. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*class> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{A Special Note on the Two-Column Preprint Style}% +% +% It is not the objective of the \aastex\ project to develop \LaTeX\ +% styles that produce pages that mimic the appearance of specific AAS +% journals. +% However, it would be nice to offer format options within the preprint +% styles so that output format can be changed. +% (Within the ``manuscript'' +% style, |\tighten| is available, and this effectively turns off the +% doublespacing.) The primary motivation behind this idea is to provide +% some definitions that permit institutions to distribute ``pretty'' +% preprints with this package. +% (Of course, I make the glaring assumption that I +% can determine what someone else will think is pretty.) +% +% This style has the principle function of setting up two-column output. +% Although it should be painfully obvious, it is important to remember +% that text lines are considerably shorter when two of them are typeset +% side by side on a page. Long equations, wide tables and figures, and +% the like, may not slide into this format without some adjustments. +% It is our opinion that great effort to adapt copy and markup for +% two-column pages is counterproductive; remember that the main goals +% of this package are to enable comprehensive tagging of the article +% and, secondarily, to produce ``correct'' draft (or referee) format +% pages. +% +% I elect not to impose a format for the front matter, although I feel +% it looks best if the title, author, abstract, and keyword material is +% typeset on its own page at full text width. The author may supply the +% |\twocolumn| command wherever desired, and, for that matter, is free +% to switch between |\onecolumn| and |\twocolumn| modes. +% (However, this is bad form.) +% \begin{verbatim} +% \twocolumn % Enter two-column page grid +% \onecolumn % Enter one-column page grid +% \end{verbatim} +% Note that the two-column page grid begins at the point |\twocolumn| +% appears in the text, and if that point is before the frontmatter, +% the latter will get typeset in two-column mode +% along with the rest of it. +% For purposes of producing ``pretty'' output, +% it is probably desirable to +% put this command after the abstract and keywords, just before the body +% of the paper. +% If the command is not specified explicitly, +% the document class will automatically switch between the one-column +% and two-column page grid as needed. +% +% \subsection{Configuration Information} +% +% \begin{macro}{\revtex@ver} +% \begin{macro}{\revtex@date} +% \begin{macro}{\revtex@org} +% \begin{macro}{\revtex@jnl} +% \begin{macro}{\revtex@genre} +% \begin{macro}{\revtex@pageid} +% My convention for identifying configuration information is for styles +% to define the following five parameters: +% |\revtex@ver| is the version number of this file; +% |\revtex@date| signifies the revision date; +% |\revtex@org| is the sponsoring organization; +% and +% |\revtex@genre| gives the applicable journal, if specified. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\revtex@ver{5.2}% +\def\revtex@date{12 Dec 2003}% +\def\revtex@org{AAS}% +\def\revtex@jnl{AAS}% +\def\revtex@genre{manuscript}% +%\def\revtex@genre{preprint}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Display identifying message on screen and in logfile. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\class@typeout{% + \typeout{% + \revtex@org\space +% \revtex@jnl\space + \revtex@genre\space substyle, v\revtex@ver\space <\revtex@date>.% + }% +}% +\def\class@typeout@jnl{% + \typeout{% + \revtex@org\space + \revtex@jnl\space + \revtex@genre\space substyle, v\revtex@ver\space <\revtex@date>.% + }% +}% +\AtBeginDocument{% + \class@typeout +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The following mini-colophon identifies the article as having been +% prepared with this macro package. The |\revtex@pageid| command only +% defines the formatting of this colophon; its existence and placement +% within the printed article is controlled by the use of this command +% in the style file. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\revtex@pageid{% + \xdef\@thefnmark{\null}% + \@footnotetext{% + This \revtex@genre\space was prepared with the + \revtex@org\space \LaTeX\ macros v\revtex@ver.% + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Page Style} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ps@plaintop} +% Create |plaintop| page style that has folios at top of page, +% and use |plaintop| pagestyle by default. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ps@plaintop{% + \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo + \def\@oddfoot{}% + \def\@oddhead{\rmfamily\hfil--\space\thepage\space--\hfil}% + \def\@evenfoot{}% + \let\@evenhead\@oddhead +}% +\def\ps@msstitle{% mss ID on title page + \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo + \def\@oddfoot{}% + \def\@oddhead{\rmfamily\hfil\ms@id}% + \def\@evenfoot{}% + \let\@evenhead\@oddhead +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Page Layout} +% +% \subsubsection{The pica area} +% +% \begin{macro}{\textwidth} +% Set the text width +% \begin{macrocode} +\setlength\textwidth{6.5in}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\textheight} +% The |\textheight| is the height of text +% (including footnotes and figures, excluding running head and +% foot). +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\setlength\textheight{8.4in}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Vertical spacing} +% +% \begin{macro}{\headheight} +% \begin{macro}{\headsep} +% \begin{macro}{\topskip} +% The |\headheight| is the height of the box that will contain the +% running head. The |\headsep| is the distance between the bottom +% of the running head and the top of the text. The |\topskip| is +% the |\baselineskip| for the first line on a page; \LaTeX's output +% routine will not work properly if it has the value 0pt, so do not +% do that! +% \begin{macrocode} +\setlength\headheight{.15in}% +%\setlength\headsep {.35in}% +%\setlength\topskip {10\p@}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Margins} +% +% \begin{macro}{\marginparsep} +% \begin{macro}{\marginparpush} +% The horizontal space between the main text and marginal notes is +% determined by |\marginparsep|, the minimum vertical separation +% between two marginal notes is controlled by |\marginparpush|. +% \begin{macrocode} + \setlength\marginparsep {10\p@}% + \setlength\marginparpush{5\p@}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% Now we can give the values for the other margin parameters. For +% native \LaTeXe, these are calculated. +% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin} +% \begin{macro}{\evensidemargin} +% \begin{macro}{\marginparwidth} +% +% Values for two-sided printing: +% \begin{macrocode} + \setlength\oddsidemargin {0in}% + \setlength\evensidemargin {0in}% + \setlength\marginparwidth {0in}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\topmargin} +% The |\topmargin| is the distance between the top of `the +% printable area'---which is 1 inch below the top of the +% paper--and the top of the box which contains the running head. +% +% \begin{macrocode} + \setlength\topmargin{0in}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Paragraphing} +% +% \begin{macro}{\lineskip} +% \begin{macro}{\normallineskip} +% These parameters control \TeX's behavior when two lines tend to +% come too close together. +% \begin{macrocode} +\setlength\lineskip{1\p@}% +\setlength\normallineskip{1\p@}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@doubleleading} +% \begin{macro}{\@tightleading} +% The two alternatives for leading are defined here. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@doubleleading{1.6}% +\def\@tightleading{1.1}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\baselinestretch} +% This is used as a multiplier for |\baselineskip|. +% Note that if this command +% doesn't resolve to ``empty'' any \texttt{plus} or \texttt{minus} +% part in the specification of |\baselineskip| is ignored. +% +% Double spacing is the default: the style uses +% the \@doubleleading factor, defined above. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\tighten} +% The |\tighten| command merely resets the |\baselinestretch| to a +% smaller factor, resulting in single-column text that is more closely +% spaced. (This will always work.) Tightening the vertical spacing +% in the text results in output that is more attractive for distribution +% to colleagues who are primarily interested in reading the paper, as +% opposed to copy editing it. Double-spaced output for referees and +% copy editors is, however, the main objective of this style, hence +% double-spacing occurs by default. The same effect as |\tighten| +% can be achieved by using the |tighten| document style option. +% +% The |\tighten| command is intended for use in the preamble of the +% article. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\tighten{\def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}}% +\newcommand\tightenlines{\tighten}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\singlespace} +% \begin{macro}{\doublespace} +% For authors who feel compelled to change between single and double +% spacing in the manuscript, |\singlespace| and |\doublespace| commands +% are provided. (Following recommendations of AAS Publications Board +% Subcommittee on Preprints.) These are no-ops in manuscript style. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\singlespace{% + \def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}% + \normalsize +}% +\newcommand\doublespace{% + \def\baselinestretch{\@doubleleading}% + \normalsize +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Here are the corresponding command definitions for the ApJ style: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\singlespace@apj{% + \def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}% + \def\arraystretch{\@tightleading}% + \normalsize +}% +\def\doublespace@apj{% + \def\baselinestretch@apj{\@doubleleading}% + \def\arraystretch{\@doubleleading}% + \normalsize +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\sec@upcase} +% Upper case for sections (optional upper case items). These are +% created so that some headings can be toggled between mixed case and +% upper case readily. +% Headings that might be changed can be wrapped in the style file in +% |\sec@upcase{|\m{text}|}| constructs; +% the expansion of |\sec@upcase| is +% controlled here. It is |\relax| by default (mixed case heads), and +% can easily be changed to |\uppercase| if desired. +% If mixed case headings are wanted by the editor, authors {\em must} +% supply mixed case text, although this is what authors should be doing +% anyway. +% (Mixed can be converted to upper, +% but the reverse transformation cannot be automated.) +% +% \begin{macrocode} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\parskip} +% \begin{macro}{\parindent} +% |\parskip| gives extra vertical space between paragraphs and +% |\parindent| is the width of the paragraph indentation. The value +% of |\parindent| depends on whether we are in two column mode. +% \begin{macrocode} +\setlength\parskip{1.5ex}% +\setlength\parindent{2em}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\smallskipamount} +% \begin{macro}{\medskipamount} +% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount} +% The values for these three parameters are set in the \LaTeX\ +% kernel. +% \begin{macrocode} +\setlength\smallskipamount{3\p@\@plus1\p@\@minus1\p@}% +\setlength\medskipamount{6\p@\@plus2\p@\@minus2\p@}% +\setlength\bigskipamount{12\p@\@plus4\p@\@minus4\p@}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@lowpenalty} +% \begin{macro}{\@medpenalty} +% \begin{macro}{\@highpenalty}% +% The commands |\nopagebreak| and |\nolinebreak| put in penalties +% to discourage these breaks at the point they are put in. +% They use |\@lowpenalty|, |\@medpenalty| or |\@highpenalty|, +% dependent on their argument. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@lowpenalty 51 +\@medpenalty 151 +\@highpenalty 301 +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\clubpenalty} +% \begin{macro}{\widowpenalty} +% These penalties are use to discourage club and widow lines. +% Because we use their default values we only show them here, +% commented out. +% \begin{macrocode} +% \clubpenalty 150 +% \widowpenalty 150 +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\displaywidowpenalty} +% \begin{macro}{\predisplaypenalty} +% \begin{macro}{\postdisplaypenalty} +% Discourage (but not so much) widows in front of a math display +% and forbid breaking directly in front of a display. Allow break +% after a display without a penalty. Again the default values are +% used, therefore we only show them here. +% \begin{macrocode} +% \displaywidowpenalty 50 +% \predisplaypenalty 10000 +% \postdisplaypenalty 0 +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\interlinepenalty} +% Allow the breaking of a page in the middle of a paragraph. +% \begin{macrocode} +% \interlinepenalty 0 +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\brokenpenalty} +% We allow the breaking of a page after a hyphenated line. +% \begin{macrocode} +% \brokenpenalty 100 +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Layout for Landscape Tables}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\ptlandscape} +% This command switches to a page layout appropriate to +% a table in landscape orientation. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\ptlandscape{% + \setlength\textwidth{9in}% + \setlength\textheight{6.5in}% + \setlength\pt@width{\textwidth}% + \setlength\hoffset{0.0in}% + \setlength\voffset{-0.25in}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \subsection{Formatting Options} +% +% \begin{macro}{\eqsecnum} +% Sometimes authors want to number equations by section, +% rather than sequentially through the whole paper. +% +% To invoke this processing option, the user may +% give the following command in the document preamble: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \eqsecnum +% \end{verbatim} +% The preferred way is to call |eqsecnum| as a +% document class option: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \documentclass[eqsecnum]{aastex} +% \end{verbatim} +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\eqsecnum{% + \@addtoreset{equation}{section}% + \def\theequation{% + %\mbox{\normalsize\arabic{section}-\arabic{equation}}% Wrong! + \arabic{section}-\arabic{equation}% + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Data Commands}% +% +% There are some obvious style-dependent parameters and formatting +% instructions in this file. The object has been to keep the author +% commands (the user interface, if you will) society-, journal-, and +% style-independent, while the style-specific parameters and commands +% are kept below that level. +% +% \subsubsection{Article Attributes}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\@journalname} +% \begin{macro}{\cpr@holder} +% Set the journal name and copyright holder. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@journalname{The Astrophysical Journal}% +\def\cpr@holder{American Astronomical Society}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% Journal and article identification information is established by the +% editorial staff. The following macros are used by personnel at the +% editorial office to annotate/record slug-line data and should be +% included in the manuscript preamble, i.e., before the \LaTeX\ +% |\begin{document}|. +% All they do is globally define other \TeX\ control sequences that are +% used by other macros at a later time. +% \begin{verbatim} +% \received{<receipt date>} +% \revised{<revision date>} +% \accepted{<acceptance date>} +% \journalid{<vol>}{<journal date>} +% \articleid{<start page>}{<end page>} +% \paperid{<id>} +% \ccc{<code>} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \begin{macro}{\received} +% \begin{macro}{\accepted} +% \begin{macro}{\revised} +% \begin{macro}{\journalid} +% \begin{macro}{\articleid} +% \begin{macro}{\paperid} +% \begin{macro}{\ccc} +% For preprints and submitted manuscripts in draft/referee format, etc., +% the slug-line information is irrelevant and in those kinds of style, +% the data are never used. In my estimation, it is perfectly acceptable +% to have these commands in the file (for future use), so they are +% defined in the usual way. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\received[1]{\gdef\@recvdate{#1}}% +\newcommand\accepted[1]{\gdef\@accptdate{#1}}% +\newcommand\revised[1]{\gdef\@revisedate{#1}}% +\newcommand\journalid[2]{\gdef\@jourvol{#1}\gdef\@jourdate{#2}}% +\newcommand\articleid[2]{\gdef\@startpage{#1}\gdef\@finishpage{#2}}% +\newcommand\paperid[1]{\gdef\@paperid{#1}}% +\newcommand\ccc[1]{\gdef\CCC@code{#1}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% We provide initialization code. If +% at some future date someone manages to give these +% macros a value before the end of the class, +% |\providecommand| will nicely bow out. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndOfClass{% + \@provide\@recvdate{}% + \@provide\@accptdate{}% + \@provide\@revisedate{}% + \@provide\@jourvol{}% + \@provide\@jourdate{}% + \@provide\@startpage{}% + \@provide\@finishpage{}% + \@provide\@paperid{MS-0001-SAMP}% + \@provide\CCC@code{000-00\$75.95-CDB}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Copyright data}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\cpright} +% +% We permit the author/editor to supply a copyright ``type'' as well as +% the year. +% The formatting of the copyright notices is defined by |\@slug|. +% FIXME: |\@slug| is never used. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\cpright[2]{% + \global\expandafter\let\expandafter\cpr@type\csname cpr@#1\endcsname + \gdef\cpr@year{#2}% + \typeout{`#1' copyright \cpr@year.}% +}% +\def\cpr@AAS{Copyright \cpr@year\space by the \cpr@holder.}% +\def\cpr@PD{This article is in the public domain.}% +\def\cpr@Crown{Crown copyright \cpr@year\space by the \cpr@holder.}% +\def\cpr@none{No copyright is claimed for this article.}% +\def\cpr@ASP{Copyright \cpr@year\space by the ASP.}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Default copyright year and type: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\cpr@year{\number\year}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@slug} +% |\@slug| determines formatting of slugline information. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@slug{% + \par + \noindent\cpr@type\par + \noindent Manuscript number \@paperid.\par + \noindent\CCC@code\par +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% Here ends the code for the document class. +% Hereinafter appears code that is common to +% the document class and document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</class> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{Running heads}% +% +% The change in the user-level markup is incorporated into the V4.1 +% document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\lefthead} +% \begin{macro}{\righthead} +% +% The |\lefthead| and |\righthead| commands are now deprecated and will give +% a diagnostic message in the \TeX\ log (NB: without halting \TeX). +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\lefthead{\substitute@command\lefthead\shorttitle}% +\newcommand\righthead{\substitute@command\righthead\shortauthors}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\shorttitle} +% \begin{macro}{\shortauthors} +% Authors may be asked to supply running head information. We use the +% language of the publisher here to distinguish between two pieces of +% information: the left head frequently contains an author list (last +% names, possibly truncated as et al.), while the right head frequently +% contains an abbreviated form of the paper title. The |\shorttitle| and +% |\shortauthors| commands merely collect the information and buffer the +% text. +% \begin{verbatim} +% \shorttitle{<text>} +% \shortauthors{<text>} +% \end{verbatim} +% For the ApJ, right heads are the short titles, and the publisher +% prefers that the author specify a 44-character or less abbreviated +% title to use as the running head on right pages. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\shorttitle[1]{\gdef\@versohead{#1}}% +\newcommand\shortauthors[1]{\gdef\@rectohead{#1}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Default values: +% \begin{macrocode} +\shorttitle{\relax}% +\shortauthors{\relax}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% Here ends the portion of code for the document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Hereinafter appears code for the document class. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*class> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@runheads} +% The |\@runheads| procedure determines the formatting of running head +% information. +% It produces a set of running head lines, one for each page of the +% article. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@runheads{% + \@tempcnta\c@page + \@whilenum\@tempcnta>\z@\do{% + \vskip 3ex + \hbox\@to30pc{% + \small + \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\@versohead}: + \expandafter\uppercase\expandafter{\@rectohead}\hfil + }% + \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\slugcomment} +% The |\slugcomment| command is provided so authors or editors may +% include a remark about the manuscript that may be desired in print for +% some styles. +% For instance, authors like to include information about the +% journal and publication date of accepted papers ("To appear in AJ, +% November 1992"). +% \begin{verbatim} +% \slugcomment{<text>} +% \end{verbatim} +% The formatting of the |\slugcomment| information is controlled by the +% |\@makeslugcmmnt| command, and its placement on the page is dictated +% by the presence of |\@makeslugcmmnt| in |\sluginfo| (or whatever). +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\msid[1]{\gdef\ms@id{#1}}% mss ID +\def\ms@id{}% +\newcommand\slugcomment[1]{\gdef\slug@comment{#1}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Default value: +% \begin{macrocode} +\slugcomment{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@slugcmmntwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\@makeslugcmmnt} +% Low-level formatting procedure: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newdimen\@slugcmmntwidth +\long\def\@makeslugcmmnt@mss{% + \@ifx@empty\slug@comment{\relax}{% + \vskip 5ex + \sbox\@tempboxa{\slug@comment}% + \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\@slugcmmntwidth}{% + \hbox\@to\textwidth{% + \hss + \parbox\@slugcmmntwidth\slug@comment + }% + }{% + \hbox\@to\textwidth{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% + }% + }% +}% +\long\def\@makeslugcmmnt@ppt{% + \@ifx@empty\slug@comment{\relax}{% + \sbox\@tempboxa{\slug@comment}% + \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\@slugcmmntwidth}{% + \hbox\@to\textwidth{% + \hss + \parbox\@slugcmmntwidth\slug@comment + }% + }{% + \hbox\@to\textwidth{\hfil\box\@tempboxa}% + }% + \vskip 2ex + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \subsubsection{Receipt and Acceptance Dates}% +% Editorial offices like to have receipt and acceptance dates on the +% front page for tracking purposes. +% The current practice is to require the author +% to type Received \dots\ and Accepted \dots\ lines +% for the staff to type on. +% +% The |\@dates| command will typeset either rules +% or the dates specified in |\received| and/or |\accepted| commands. +% Note that authors should not include |\received| and |\accepted|. +% +% \begin{macro}{\@rcvaccrule} +% This is the rule following the date. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@rcvaccrule{\vrule\@width1.75in\@height0.5pt\@depth\z@}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@dates} +% |\@dates| determines formatting of manuscript date information. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@dates{\ifx\@title\@empty\else {Received}\space% + \ifx\@empty\@recvdate\@rcvaccrule\else\@recvdate\fi;% + \hspace{1.5em}{accepted}\space% + \ifx\@empty\@accptdate\@rcvaccrule\else\@accptdate\fi% +\fi}% % +\def\@dates@pptt{% + \@ifx@empty\@recvdate{}{% + \@ifx@empty\@accptdate{}{% + {\center + \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\small}{\normalsize}% + {\itshape Received}\space + \@recvdate + \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\\[.5ex]}{\hspace{1.5em}}% + {\itshape accepted}\space + \@accptdate + \endcenter + }% + }% + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Formatting the Slug Information}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\sluginfo} +% The |\sluginfo| command is executed automatically when a +% |\begin{abstract}| is +% encountered, so it is not necessary (or appropriate) for the author to +% include this line explicitly. The received/accepted business is a +% concern only for the editorial staff, hence we have arranged for the +% author not to have to fuss with it. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\sluginfo@mss{% + {% + \addpenalty{\@M}% + \addvspace{6\p@}% + \centering + \@dates + \@makeslugcmmnt + \par + \addvspace{6\p@}% + }% +}% +\newcommand\sluginfo{% + {% + \addpenalty{\@M}% + \addvspace{6\p@}% + \centering + \@dates + \par + \addvspace{6\p@}% + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% For backwards compatibility: +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\dates=\sluginfo +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \subsection{Front Matter}% +% +% \subsubsection{Abstract}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\abstract} +% The abstract environment simply formats the +% material into a certain box for later use. +% Note that the assignment of the measure +% (|\hsize|) is taken from the code +% for |\begin{document}|, +% as is the call to |\process@table|, which +% turns into a no-op after |\begin{document}|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewenvironment{abstract}{% + \iflong@abstract% Abstract in one-column mode + \onecolumn + \fi + \global\setbox\abstract@box\vtop\bgroup +% \let\@nodocument\@empty + \columnwidth\textwidth\hsize\columnwidth\linewidth\hsize +% \process@table + \normalsize + \color@begingroup + \@parboxrestore + \@setminipage + \quotation +}{% + \par + \endquotation + \removelastskip + \vskip-\prevdepth + \color@endgroup + \egroup +}% +\newbox\abstract@box +% \end{macrocode} +% Make adjustments to \LaTeX\ abstract style: optional upper case +% heading, retain current type size (should be |\normalsize|), +% ignore twocolumn option in the |manuscript| substyle, +% add |\sluginfo|, and start abstract on new page. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\abstractname{ABSTRACT}% +\def\@abstract@mss{% + \sluginfo + \clearpage + \@ifvoid\abstract@box{}{% + \begin{center}\bfseries\abstractname\end{center}% + \contribute@box\abstract@box + }% +}% +\def\contribute@box#1{% + \dimen@\ht#1% + \leavevmode\hbox{\vrule\@height\ht#1\@width\z@}\par + \nointerlineskip\nobreak\kern-\ht#1\unvbox#1\prevdepth\z@ +}% +\def\@abstract@ppt{% +%\sluginfo +%\clearpage + \@ifvoid\abstract@box{}{% + \begin{center}\bfseries\abstractname\end{center}% + \contribute@box\abstract@box + }% +}% +\def\@abstract@pptt{% + \@ifvoid\abstract@box{}{% + \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{% + \section*{Abstract}% + }{% + \vspace{3em}% + \begin{center}% + \large + \bfseries\abstractname\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{\z@}% + \end{center}% + }% + \contribute@box\abstract@box + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Title, Author, etc.}\label{sec-preamble}% +% Title and author identification is by way of standard \LaTeX\ commands +% |\title| and |\author|. +% The authors' principal affiliation is specified with a separate macro |\affil|. +% Each |\author| command should be followed by its own |\affil| (or address). +% +% Authors often have affiliations above and beyond their main employer, +% and these are specified with the |\altaffilmark| and |\altaffiltext| +% commands. +% These commands behave like the |\footnotemark| and |\footnotetext| +% commands +% of \LaTeX. +% |\altaffilmark| is appended to author's names in the |\author| lists, +% and generates the superscript identification numbers. +% The text for the individual alternate affiliations is generated by the +% |\altaffiltext| command. It is up to the author to make sure that the +% |\altaffilmark| numbers attached to authors' names correspond to the +% correct alternate affiliation. +% +% The following commands may appear in the title block, +% with the |\title| command appearing exactly once, and +% all others appearing as many times as needed: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \title{<lucid text>} +% \author{<name(s)>} +% \authoraddr{<author's postal address>}% Deprecated (V5.0) in favor of \affil +% \email{<author's e-mail address>} +% \affil{<affiliation>} +% \altaffilmark{<tag number(s)>} +% \altaffiltext{<numerical tag>}{<text>} +% \and +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \begin{macro}{\title} +% \begin{macro}{\author} +% \begin{macro}{\authoraddr} +% \begin{macro}{\email} +% \begin{macro}{\affil} +% \begin{macro}{\altaffilmark} +% \begin{macro}{\altaffiltext} +% \begin{macro}{\and} +% The title block commands simply queue up the +% given tokens into the appropriate control sequence. +% +% Implementation note: +% The |\email| command has one meaning until the titlepage +% is set, then acquires a different meaning, appropriate for text use. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\title#1{\appdef\@title{\make@title{#1}}}% +\def\author#1{\appdef\@author{\make@author{#1}}}% +%%% \def\authoraddr{\substitute@command\authoraddr\affil}% +\def\email#1{\appdef\@author{\make@authoremail{#1}}}% +\def\affil#1{\appdef\@author{\make@affil{#1}}}% +\def\altaffilmark#1{\appdef\@author{\make@altaffilmark{#1}}}% +\def\altaffiltext#1#2{\appdef\@author{\make@altaffiltext{#1}{#2}}}% +\def\and{\appdef\@author{\make@and}}% +\let\authoraddr\@gobble +\let\@title\@empty +\let\@author\@empty +\let\@date\@empty +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@maketitle} +% To format the title page, simply +% expand the tokens that were saved up. +% Remember that some users incorporate +% title block commands (notably |\altaffilmark|) +% into the argument of the |\author| command itself. +% Therefore, we might encounter +% certain of the above commands while formatting +% the title page itself. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@maketitle{% + \newpage + \begingroup + \let\footnote\thanks + \let\email\make@authoremail + \let\affil\make@affil + \let\altaffilmark\make@altaffilmark + \let\altaffiltext\make@altaffiltext + \let\and\make@and + \@title + \@author + \@date + \par + \@abstract + \@ifxundefined\keyword@list{}{% + \expandafter\@keywords + \expandafter{\keyword@list}% + }% + \endgroup +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% +% The typesetting performed by the titlepage commands is appropriate +% for the top of the first text page of the manuscript. +% They could as well be used on a title cover page, but vertical +% placement would have to be controlled by the author. +% This is not to be encouraged, since I want to discourage +% the introduction of any extra horizontal or vertical space. +% +% \begin{macro}{\make@title} +% \begin{macro}{\make@author} +% \begin{macro}{\make@authoraddr} +% \begin{macro}{\make@authoremail} +% \begin{macro}{\make@affil} +% \begin{macro}{\make@altaffilmark} +% \begin{macro}{\make@altaffiltext} +% \begin{macro}{\make@and} +% Here are the formatting procedures for the title page. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\make@title@mss#1{% + {% + \def\baselinestretch{\@tightleading}% + \center\large\bfseries{#1}\endcenter %% + }% + \thispagestyle{msstitle}% mss ID +}% +\def\make@title@ppt#1{% + \@makeslugcmmnt + {\center\large\bfseries{#1}\endcenter}% + \thispagestyle{empty}% +}% +\def\make@title@pptt#1{% + {% + \center + \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\large}{\Large}% + \bfseries + #1% + \endcenter + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Here are the formatting procedures for the author list. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\make@author#1{% + {\topsep\z@\center\normalsize#1\endcenter}% +}% +\def\make@author@pptt#1{% + {\topsep\z@ + \center + \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\normalsize}{\vspace{4ex}\large}% + #1% + \endcenter + }% +}% +% FIXME: produce text when in preprint substyle +\let\make@authoraddr=\@gobble +\def\make@authoremail#1{% + {\topsep\z@\center\normalsize\tt#1\endcenter}% +}% +\newcommand\make@affil[1]{% + \vspace*{-2.5ex}% +{\topsep\z@\center#1\endcenter}% +}% +\def\make@affil@ppt#1{% + \vspace*{-0.8ex}% + {% + \topsep\z@ + \center + \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\small}{\normalsize}% + \itshape + #1% + \endcenter + }% +}% +\def\make@affil@pptt#1{% + \vspace*{-0.8ex}% + {% + \topsep\z@ + \center + \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{\small}{\normalsize}% + \itshape + #1% + \endcenter + }% +}% +% +\def\thefootnote{\@arabic\c@footnote}% initial style +% +\newcommand\make@altaffilmark[1]{$^{#1}$}% +% +\newcommand\make@altaffiltext[2]{% +\iflong@abstract% + \footnotetext@ass[#1]{#2} +\else + \footnotetext@ass[#1]{\hsize\columnwidth #2} +\fi +%\stepcounter{footnote} +}% +%% +\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark + \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks + \iflong@abstract% + \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\hsize18pc #1} + \else + \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{#1} + \fi + }% +} +%% +\def\footnotetext@ass{% + \@ifnextchar [\@xfootnotenext@ass + {%\protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}% + \@footnotetext}} +\def\@xfootnotenext@ass[#1]{% + \begingroup + %\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname #1\relax + \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{#1}% + \endgroup + \@footnotetext} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Redefine the \LaTeX\ |\and| command for this style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\make@and{\vspace*{-0.5ex}{\topsep\z@\center and\endcenter}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Keywords}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\keywords} +% \begin{macro}{\keyword@list} +% \begin{macro}{\@keywords} +% \begin{macro}{\@keywords@pptt} +% \begin{macro}{\@keywordtext} +% \begin{macro}{\@keyworddelim} +% \begin{macro}{\subjectheadings} +% Keywords, subject headings, etc., are accommodated +% only as a piece of text; the |\keywords| command indents if necessary +% and supplies the proper lead-in text +% (``Keywords:'', ``Subject headings:'', etc.) +% but does not apply formatting to the user's keyword text. The author +% must supply the correct punctuation according to the journal style. +% +% Note that the editors of A\&A, ApJ, and MNRAS have discussed the issue +% of keywords, and there is disagreement about whether +% ``subject headings'' or +% ``keywords'' should appear after abstracts in astronomical papers. +% In any case, the user-level command is |\keywords|. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\keywords{\appdef\keyword@list}% +\let\keyword@list\undefined +\def\@keywords#1{% + \vspace*{-.7ex}% + \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{% + \noindent + {{\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space\@kwds{#1}}% + }{% + {% + \quote + {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space + \@kwds{#1}% + \endquote + }% + }% +}% +\def\@keywords@pptt#1{% + \vspace*{-.7ex}% + \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{% + \noindent + {% + \small + {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space + \@kwds{#1}% + }% + }{% + {% + \quote + \small + {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space + \@kwds{#1}% + \endquote + }% + }% +}% +% +\def\@keywords@mss#1{%%% + \vspace*{-.7ex}% + \@ifnum{\col@number=\tw@}{% + \noindent + {% + \small + {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space + \@kwds{#1}% + }% + }{% + {% + \quote + \small + {\itshape\@keywordtext:\/}\space + \@kwds{#1}% + \endquote% + \clearpage + }% + }% +}% +% +\let\subjectheadings=\keywords +\def\@keywordtext{Subject headings}% +\def\@keyworddelim{---}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@kwds} +% It might be possible to handle keywords and their punctuation more +% automatically at some stage, but at the moment using this looping +% construct is serious overkill. It also causes problems because the +% loop delimiter is a comma, and there are keywords that legitimately +% contain commas. It also seem ponderous to me for keywords in the +% |\keyword| list to be delimited by \verb+|+, so I make the author +% responsible for keyword list punctuation. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@kwds@jnl#1{% + \def\@kwddlm{}% + \@for\@kwd:=#1\do{% + \@kwddlm + \def\@kwddlm{\space\@keyworddelim\penalty\@m\space}% + {\@kwd}% + }% +}% +\def\@kwds#1{#1\relax}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Automatically Triggering the Title}% +% In order to accomodate the many different formatting options +% for the title page, it is best for the user to +% present the title block and then to +% invoke the |\maketitle| command explicitly. +% +% The custom in V4.0 documents has been to give +% the commands of the title block +% as if they formatted the given material immediately---which they did. +% But this defies the \LaTeX\ markup scheme in which those commands +% are expected to act like ``data'' commands: they are legal +% in the preamble (before |\begin{document}|). +% +% Coupled with the need to automatically switch between +% one- and two-column page grids, it would be best if the +% title block commands were to return to their nature +% as ``data'' commands. +% +% An \aastex\ document will therefore begin with its +% |\begin{document}| declaration and its title block +% (which could legally appear in the preamble), followed +% by an optional |\maketitle| command, succeeded by +% optional |\tableofcontents| and similar commands, +% succeeded by the body of the article, which +% may begin with a sectioning command like |\section|, +% or may even begin with paragraph text. +% +% In order to trigger at the start of paragraph text, we +% install a hook into |\everypar|. This may fail under some +% circumstances because of the violent way \LaTeX\ handles +% this token register. (We hope for the best.) +% +% Given that the abstract is formatted as part of the +% title page, it, too, must have the status of a +% data command. However, its syntax as a \LaTeX\ environment +% prevents a simple approach using |\appdef|. +% Instead, we temporarily endow the |abstract| +% environment with the ability to set type. +% +% The procedure |\everypar@hook| takes advantage +% of a trick for returning to vertical mode, effectively +% aborting the nascent paragraph. The only trace thereof +% in the vertical list being the |\parskip| glue. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \everypar{% + \everypar@hook + }% +}% +\def\everypar@hook{% + \setbox\z@\lastbox\par\removelastskip + \everypar{}% + \maketitle@trigger + \leavevmode +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We use |\@startsection@hook| in |\@startsection| (see above). +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@startsection@hook{\maketitle@trigger}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% We headpatch into the |listof|\dots\ procedures: +% \begin{macrocode} +\prepdef\tableofcontents{\listof@hook}% +\prepdef\listoffigures{\listof@hook}% +\prepdef\listoftables{\listof@hook}% +\def\listof@hook{\maketitle@trigger}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\maketitle@disarm{% + \global\let\maketitle@trigger\relax + \global\let\@startsection@hook\@empty + \global\let\listof@hook\@empty + \global\let\everypar@hook\@empty +}% +\def\maketitle@trigger{% + \maketitle +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \subsection{Document Body}% +% Herein are definitions of formatting procedures that occur in the body +% of the article. +% +% \subsubsection{Footnotes}% +% +% The following code redefines a few things so that spacing in footnotes +% is different than \LaTeX\ defaults. The adjustment to |\skip\footins| +% increases +% the amount of vertical space inserted before the |\footnoterule|. +% The commented out definitions of |\@makefntext| give proper +% indentation. +% \begin{macro}{\footins} +% \begin{macro}{\footnotesep} +% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext} +% +% Style Note: in the two-column preprint style, these values are +% different. +% \begin{macrocode} +\setlength{\skip\footins}{4ex\@plus1ex\@minus.5ex}% +\setlength\footnotesep{3ex}% +%\long\def\@makefntext#1{\noindent\hb@xt@\z@{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1} +%\long\def\@makefntext#1{\indent\hbox{$^{\@thefnmark}$}#1} +\long\def\@makefntext@pptt#1{% + \noindent + \hbox\@to\z@{\hss$^{\@thefnmark}$}% + #1% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% FIXME: doublecheck the |\xdef|. +% \begin{macro}{editornote} +% \begin{macro}{\theeditornote} +% \begin{macro}{\notetoeditor} +% The |\notetoeditor| command puts text into the footnote area that +% contains some +% special instruction to the editor. +% It places a superior ``En'' at the point in +% the text where the note appears, then makes a footnote labelled +% ``En NOTE TO EDITOR: <text>'' +% \begin{verbatim} +% \notetoeditor{<text>} +% \end{verbatim} +% FIXME: cf. definition of |\footnote|. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcounter{editornote}% +\def\theeditornote{{\rmfamily E}\arabic{editornote}}% +\newcommand\notetoeditor[1]{% + \stepcounter{editornote}% + \begingroup + \def\protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand}% + \xdef\@thefnmark{\theeditornote}% + \endgroup + \@footnotemark\@footnotetext{NOTE TO EDITOR: #1}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Sections}% +% +% Modify the indentation behavior so that {\em all} paragraphs, +% including those first after section heads, are indented. +% This is consonant with the styles of many journals, +% although it's non-standard typographic practice. +% +% Style Note: In the two-column preprint style, we +% add simple logic to engage |\twocolumn| when the first |\section| +% command is encountered if this has not been done already. +% +% \begin{macro}{\section} +% \begin{macro}{\thesection} +% Level-one head. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand\section{% + \@startsection{section}{1}% + {\z@}{5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}% +}% +\def\thesection{\@arabic{\c@section}}% +\def\clear@section@page{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\subsection} +% \begin{macro}{\thesubsection} +% Level-two head. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand\subsection{% + \@startsection{subsection}{2}% + {\z@}{5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}% +}% +\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\@arabic{\c@subsection}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsection} +% Level-three head. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand\subsubsection{% + \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}% + {\z@}{5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\itshape}% +}% +\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\@arabic{\c@subsubsection}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\subsubsubsection} +% \begin{macro}{\thesubsubsubsection} +% Define sectioning command below |\subsubsection| +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\subsubsubsection{% + \@startsection{subsubsection}{4}% + {\z@}{-15\p@\@plus-5\p@\@minus-2\p@}{5\p@}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}% +}% +\def\thesubsubsubsection{\thesubsubsection.\@arabic{\c@subsubsubsection}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\theparagraph} +% The run-in head. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\@arabic{\c@paragraph}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\acknowledgments} +% \begin{macro}{\acknowledgements} +% For ApJ, acknowledgments are set off from main body text simply by +% vertical space (no heading or type size change). I do the same for +% the AAS manuscript style. For use in producing more polished output +% for other journals, this macro might generate text saying +% ``Acknowledg[e]ments''. +% +% An alternative spelling of the command is provided. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\acknowledgments{\vskip 3ex\@plus.8ex\@minus.4ex}% +\let\acknowledgements=\acknowledgments +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \subsubsection{Equation Numbering}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\appendix} +% Redefine |\appendix| so that equation numbers are prepended with +% |\theappendix| number. Reset equation counter so that equation +% numbers in the appendix begin again with 1. +% The |\section| command is redefined by +% |\appendix| to clear the equation counter for each section, so +% that equation numbers will look like A1, A2,\dots, B1, B2, +% +% Note that the +% |\appendix| command is {\em not} a sectioning command; it is merely +% a delimiting markup between the main body of the paper and the +% appendix. Sections in the appendix are still started with +% |\section| commands. +% etc. +% +% If we are in two-column mode at this point, +% we switch back to one column and set a flag to remind us to +% return to two-column mode upon entering the bibliography. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand\appendix{% + \par + \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi + \setcounter{section}{\z@}% + \setcounter{subsection}{\z@}% + \setcounter{equation}{\z@}% +%\setcounter{figure}{\z@}% +%\setcounter{table}{\z@}% +%\def\fnum@figure{Figure \Alph{section}\thefigure:}% +%\def\fnum@table{Table \Alph{section}\thetable:}% + \def\thesection{\Alph{section}}% + \def\theequation{% + %\hbox{\normalsize\Alph{section}\arabic{equation}}% + \thesection\arabic{equation}% + }% + \@addtoreset{equation}{section}% + \appendix@figtab@defs + \def\section{% + \@startsection + {section}{1}{\z@}% + {5ex\@plus.5ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}% + }% +}% +\let\appendix@figtab@defs\@empty +\def\appendix@figtab@defs@pptt{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{mathletters} +% Define |mathletters| environment. This is a wrapper that goes +% \emph{around} (outside of) |equation| or |eqnarray| environments. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcounter{cureqno}% +\newenvironment{mathletters}{% + \refstepcounter{equation}% + \setcounter{cureqno}{\value{equation}}% + \let\@curtheeqn\theequation + \edef\@tempa{\theequation}% + \expandafter\def + \expandafter\theequation + \expandafter{\@tempa\alph{equation}}% + \setcounter{equation}{0}% +}{% + \let\theequation\@curtheeqn + \setcounter{equation}{\value{cureqno}}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\eqnum} +% The |\eqnum| command allows the author to override all automatic +% equation marking schemes. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\eqnum[1]{% + \def\theequation{#1}% + \let\@currentlabel\theequation + \addtocounter{equation}{\m@ne}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% Here ends the code for the document class. +% Hereinafter appears code that is common to +% the document class and document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</class> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{Bibliography}% +% For the time being, I don't think +% it would be a good idea to force an implementation based on BibTeX, +% although I'll prepare for that eventuality by using the constructs and +% general ideas of the \LaTeX\ |thebibliography| environment. +% Adjustments have been made so that the |\cite|--|\bibitem| mechanism +% can be used to cite references symbolically while maintaining proper +% citation syntax within the paper; the author must create the citation +% label for each reference in proper journal format in the |\bibitem| +% command. +% \begin{verbatim} +% \begin{thebibliography} +% \bibitem[label]{<texttag>} +% \reference <bibliographic data> +% \end{thebibliography} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% Observe that the bibliographic data supplied by the author must also +% conform to the standards of the journal. I have elected not to burden +% authors with tedious \LaTeX\ commands which would require many curly +% braces to delimit the bibliographic fields because many of the +% journals I have targeted in this project have agreed to reduce +% typographic overhead (bolding, italicizing, etc.) in reference lists. +% (See Abt's editorial in ApJ 357.) +% It is the responsibility of the author to get these fields in the +% proper order with the correct punctuation; the information will be +% typeset as is, i.e., in roman with no size or style changes. +% +% Macros are provided for many of the oft-referenced journals so that +% authors may use the \LaTeX\ names rather than having to look up a +% particular journal's +% specific abbreviation. In principle, all the journals should be using +% the same abbreviations, too, but I anticipate some changes in the +% specific abbreviations before a set is finally settled on. As long as +% these macros are kept up to date, authors need not be concerned about +% such editorial changes. +% +% Corresponding with the non-BibTeX references environment and +% |\reference| command for the reference list is the |\markcite| +% command. +% This can be used to identify in-text citations; in this case, the +% author provides the actual citation text as opposed to the symbolic +% tag. +% The use of this is encouraged, even for journals where no special +% formatting of citation call-outs is required; it is crucial for the +% future use of on-line browsers. +% +% Note: |\markcite| is deprecated (V5.0) and has been eliminated. +% +% The entire bibliography section of code is incorporated into the +% V4.1 document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{thebibliography} +% \begin{macro}{\clear@thebibliography@page} +% \begin{macro}{\thebib@list} +% \begin{macro}{\thebib@list@pptt} +% +% Note on |\clear@thebibliography@page|: this procedure is nil except in +% the manuscript substyle, where it does a |\clearpage|, and +% the two-column preprint substyle, where it returns to two column mode. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{% + \clear@thebibliography@page + \subsection*{REFERENCES}% + \thebib@list + \def\refpar{\relax}% + \def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}% + \sloppy + \clubpenalty4000 + \widowpenalty4000 + \sfcode`\.=1000\relax +}{% + \endlist + \revtex@pageid +}% +\def\clear@thebibliography@page{}% +\def\thebib@list{% + \list{\null}{% + \leftmargin 3em\labelwidth\z@\labelsep\z@\itemindent-\leftmargin + \usecounter{enumi}% + }% +}% +\def\thebib@list@pptt{% + \list{\null}{% + \leftmargin 1.2em\labelwidth\z@\labelsep\z@\itemindent-\leftmargin + \usecounter{enumi}% + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{references} +% It is not necessary to use the thebibliography environment. +% This style defines a |references| environment that simply sets off the +% list of references and adjusts spacing parameters. +% It is not possible to use |\bibitem|s within the |references| +% environment. +% (The |\reference| command cannot be shortened to |\ref|; +% |\ref| is used in standard \LaTeX\ for cross-referencing.) +% \begin{verbatim} +% \begin{references} +% \reference <bibliographic data> +% \end{references} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newenvironment{references}{% + \clear@thebibliography@page + \subsection*{REFERENCES}% + \bgroup + \setlength\parindent\z@ + \setlength\parskip\itemsep + \let\refpar\references@refpar +}{% + \refpar + \egroup + \revtex@pageid +}% +\def\references@refpar@mss{% + \par\setlength\hangindent{3em}\hangafter\@ne +}% +\def\references@refpar@pptt{% + \par\setlength\hangindent{1.2em}\hangafter\@ne +}% +\let\references@refpar\references@refpar@mss +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\reference} +% \begin{macro}{\@reference} +% List of references. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\reference{% + \@ifnextchar\bgroup{\@reference}{% + \@latexerr{Missing key on reference command}{% + Each reference command should have a key corresponding + to a \protect\markcite\space somewhere in the text + }% + }% +}% +\def\@reference#1{\relax\refpar}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\markcite} +% +% The |\markcite| command is now deprecated and will give +% a diagnostic message in the \TeX\ log (NB: without halting \TeX). +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\markcite[1]{\remove@command\markcite}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel} +% \begin{macro}{\@cite} +% Formatting choices for citations. +% +% FIXME: doublecheck compatibility with natbib +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\@biblabel#1{\relax}% +%\def\@cite#1#2{({#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi})}% + \def\@cite#1#2{#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% This completes the section of code incorporated into the +% V4.1 document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% Hereinafter appears code for the document class. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*class> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{Tables and Figures}% +% +% \begin{macro}{topnumber} +% Explicitly set the counter for the number of floats allowed at the +% top of the page +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\setcounter{topnumber}{7}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\tablenotemark} +% \begin{macro}{\tablenotetext} +% Footnotes for tables are to be identified with lower case alphabetics, +% rather than numeric. |\tablenotemark| and |\tablenotetext| commands +% are provided analogous to |\footnotemark| and |\footnotetext|, but +% with the identifier {\em required}, like |\altaffilmark| and +% |\altaffiltext|. +% The |\tablenotetext| must be specified before the |\end{table}|, +% since |\end{table}| displays it. +% +% \begin{verbatim} +% \tablenotemark{<tag letter(s)>} +% \tablenotetext{<alpha tag>}{<text>} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% Note that \m{tag letter} is identified with \m{alpha tag} +% for corresponding text. +% It is the +% responsibility of the author to get the correspondence correct. +% +% The table footnotes are coupled to the table in which they occur, +% rather than being associated with a particular page, and they are +% printed with the table (relatively close to the caption) instead of +% appearing at the extreme bottom of the page. +% This is done to ensure that the notes wind up on the same page as the +% table, since tables are floats and can migrate +% from one page to another. There is the additional benefit that the +% notes are unambiguously attached to the proper table, which is what is +% required in the event that the editorial requirement of one table only +% per page is ever changed to permit several tables per page. +% +% Footnotes are \emph{not} supported for figures. +% +% Here we give the formatting procedures for the mark, the note, and +% the sequence of notes as a whole. +% The code for plano tables provides alternative procedures, +% albeit a common queueing mechanism is used. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newskip\tnotemarkskip +\tnotemarkskip7pt +\newdimen\@abovenoteskip% +\newcommand\tablenotemark[1]{% +\rlap{$^{\mathrm #1}$}\hskip\tnotemarkskip\ignorespaces% Fixed: the space after notemark +}% +\def\@tablenotetext#1#2{% + \vspace{.5ex}% + {\noindent\llap{$^{#1}$}#2\par}% +}% +\def\@tablenotes#1{% + \par + \vspace{4.5ex}\footnoterule\vspace{.5ex}% + {\footnotesize#1}% +}% +\def\@tablenotes@pptt#1{% + \par + \vspace{3.2ex}\footnoterule\vspace{.4ex}% + {\footnotesize#1}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\tablenotetext} +% \begin{macro}{\spew@tblnotes} +% +% The command |\tablenotetext| enqueues the table note text. +% +% The tablenotes are +% dequeued onto the vertical list by |\spew@tblnotes|, which is +% executed at the end of table processing. +% Note that |\spew@tblnotes| also clears the |\tblnote@list|. +% +% Praise and honor are due to Kresten Krab Thorup (krab@iesd.auc.dk) for +% posting ftn.sty to the Usenet, from which I drew the technique. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \let\tblnote@list\@empty +}% +% +\newcommand\tablenotetext[2]{\ifdim\@abovenoteskip=0pt\global\@abovenoteskip=20pt\fi% + \appgdef\tblnote@list{\hsize\pt@width\leftskip\z@\rightskip\z@% + \@tablenotetext{#1}{\parfillskip\z@ plus1fil#2\endgraf}}% +}% +% +\def\spew@tblnotes{% + \@ifx@empty\tblnote@list{}{% + \@tablenotes{\tblnote@list}% + \global\let\tblnote@list\@empty + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{table} +% \begin{macro}{table*} +% Patch |\spew@tblnotes| into the end-processing for tables: +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\prepdef\endtable{\spew@tblnotes}% +\expandafter\prepdef\csname endtable*\endcsname{\spew@tblnotes}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\tableline} +% Add a |\tableline| command for use in tabular environments. This +% command produces the horizontal rule(s) between the column headings +% and the body of the table. +% Authors are discouraged from using any |\hlines| themselves, +% and are typically forbidden from using vertical rules by editors. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\tableline=\hline +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption} +% |\@makecaption| determines formatting for figure and table captions. +% For manuscripts, all captions should be set as flushleft paragraphs. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vskip 2ex\noindent#1\ #2\par}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\tablenum} +% \begin{macro}{\figurenum} +% The |\tablenum| and |\figurenum| commands allows the author to +% override all automatic table- and figure marking schemes. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\tablenum[1]{% + \def\thetable{#1}% + \let\@currentlabel\thetable + \addtocounter{table}{\m@ne}% +}% +\newcommand\figurenum[1]{% + \def\thefigure{#1}% + \let\@currentlabel\thefigure + \addtocounter{figure}{\m@ne}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\placetable} +% \begin{macro}{\placefigure} +% \begin{macro}{\placeplate} +% \begin{macro}{\@place@float} +% Usually, a float (table, figure, or plate) is placed in an article at +% or near the location that it is first mentioned. +% However, there are times when an author wishes to refer to a float +% {\em before} it is placed, for instance in an introduction. +% The editors and typesetters however, may +% have trouble deciding just where the float should be placed. The +% following commands allow the author to tell the editor and publisher +% exactly where they want to put the item. +% It requires that a |\label{|\m{key}|}| command be +% used in the markup for the float +% (note that |\label{}| should appear {\em after} any |\caption| +% command, so that the numbering will be correct). +% +% \begin{verbatim} +% \placetable{<key>} +% \placefigure{<key>} +% \placeplate{<key>} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% Style Note: In the preprint style, the command emits no text; +% in the manuscript style, it places a note to the editors in the body +% of the text. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\placetable{\@place@float{TABLE}}% +\newcommand\placefigure{\@place@float{FIGURE}}% +\newcommand\placeplate{\@place@float{PLATE}}% +\def\@place@float#1#2{% + \vspace{0.5ex}% + \begin{center}EDITOR: PLACE #1 \ref{#2} HERE.\end{center}% + \vspace{0.5ex}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\figcaption} +% \begin{macro}{\@figcaption} +% \begin{macro}{\@xfigcaption} +% Sometimes the figures are not included in the text, only the figure +% captions. To facilitate this, a |\figcaption| command is +% provided, which formats the figure captions as needed, and +% increments the figure counter automatically. +% The optional argument allows the markup to include, e.g. the filename +% of the external figure. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\figcaption{\@testopt{\@xfigcaption}{}}% +\def\@xfigcaption[#1]#2{{\def\@captype{figure}\caption{#2}}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\dummytable} +% Similarly, we sometimes want to put a placeholder in a document +% corresponding to a plano table (published elsewhere) so that cross +% references, etc. work properly with autoincremented counters. +% Thus, for example, one can do: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \dummytable +% \label{mytable} +% \end{verbatim} +% in the document, and refer to this table by number. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\dummytable{\refstepcounter{table}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% Here ends the code for the document class. +% Hereinafter appears code that is common to +% the document class and document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</class> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{Plano Tables}% +% +% Plano tables are camera-ready pages that are included in a typeset +% article the same way as line drawings, graphs, and other camera-ready +% art, i.e., as ``planographic'' figures. There are desirable +% properties for a formatter to have that are somewhat above and beyond +% \LaTeX\'s |tabular| environment that would facilitate the creation of +% such tables. +% Among these are breaking long tables across pages, using footnotes +% in a table, specifying comments and references for tables, etc. +% +% Note for V5.0: +% Plano tables are no longer supported, but the capabilities of +% the |deluxetable| are still part of \aastex. +% What this means for the user is that all tables should be coded +% in \LaTeX, whether using the standard \LaTeX\ mechanisms or +% using the enhancements of |deluxetable|, however, the +% appearance of the table in the printed journal will be under the control +% of the publisher and not the author. +% +% Style Note: +% ApJ ``standard'' widths for tables are 21 and 42 picas, which are the +% widths of single and double columns in the journal. For wide tables, +% any width less than 42 is acceptable, although using widths of 30pc +% and up will result in better appearance when centering. Landscape +% orientation is acceptable, and I have provided the pseudo-option +% |\ptlandscape| that resets the page dimensions; the author is still +% responsible for running the local DVI translator with the proper +% parameters so that landscape pages emerge from the laser printer. +% +% Style Note: +% AJ has no ``standard'' widths for camera-ready tables, +% they simply need to be narrower than the page. +% Landscape orientation is acceptable, +% and I have provided the pseudo-option |\ptlandscape| that resets the +% page dimensions; the author is still responsible for running the +% local DVI translator with the proper parameters so that landscape +% pages actually emerge from the laser printer. +% +% What follows was inspired by supertab.sty by Theo Jurriens, 1988. +% +% We define descriptive markup for table elements. +% Observe that the formatting is embedded in the macro definitions +% so that the author doesn't need to be concerned about stylistic +% nuances. +% +% \begin{verbatim} +% \tablecaption{<text>} +% \tablehead{<text>} +% \colhead{<heading>} +% \tabletail{<text>} +% \tablewidth{<dimen>} +% \tablecolumns{<num>} +% \tableheadfrac{<num>} +% \rotate +% \end{verbatim} +% +% The entire deluxetable section of code is incorporated into the +% V4.1 document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pt@box} +% \begin{macro}{\pt@width} +% \begin{macro}{\pt@column} +% \begin{macro}{\pt@nlines} +% \begin{macro}{\pt@ncol} +% \begin{macro}{\pt@page} +% Allocate registers for use in |deluxetable| (plano) tables. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newbox\pt@box +\newdimen\pt@width +\newcount\pt@line +\newcount\pt@column +\newcount\pt@nlines +\newcount\pt@ncol +\newcount\pt@page +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\colhead} +% \begin{macro}{\tablecolumns} +% \begin{macro}{\tablecaption} +% \begin{macro}{\tablehead} +% \begin{macro}{\tabletail} +% \begin{macro}{\tablewidth} +% \begin{macro}{\tableheadfrac} +% See |deluxetable| environment definition for |\pt@addcol|. +% The definition was moved so that |\tablecolumns| only affects the current +% table +% +% FIXME: document syntax of |\tablehead{\colhead{<text>}}| +% and alternative of using |\tablecolumns|. +% Latter was added to assist Evan's translator, therefore is +% highly recommended. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\colhead[1]{\multicolumn{1}{c}{#1}\pt@addcol}% +% +\gdef\pt@footnotesize{\string\footnotesize} +\gdef\pt@scriptsize{\string\scriptsize} +\newcommand\tabletypesize[1]{\def\pt@typesize{#1}\gdef\@typesize{\string#1} + \ifx\@typesize\pt@footnotesize + \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize} + \else + \ifx\@typesize\pt@scriptsize + \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize} + \else + \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize}% + \fi +\fi +}% Access to different type sizes in deluxetable +\def\pt@typesize{}% +% +\newcommand\tablecolumns[1]{% + \pt@column=#1\relax% + \pt@ncol=#1\relax% + \global\let\pt@addcol\@empty% +}% +% +\newcommand\tablecaption[1]{\gdef\pt@caption{\tnotemarkskip8pt#1}}%Fixed: space after mark +\newcommand\tablehead[1]{% + \gdef\pt@head{% + \hline\hline + \relax\\[-1.7ex]% + #1\hskip\tabcolsep + \\[.7ex]% + \hline + \relax\\[-1.5ex]% + }% +}% +\def\tablehead@aj#1{% + \gdef\pt@head{% + #1\hskip\tabcolsep + \\[.7ex]% + \hline + \relax\\[-1.5ex]% + }% +}% +\newif\if@pt@rot +\newcommand\rotate{\@pt@rottrue}% +\newcommand\tabletail[1]{\gdef\pt@tail{#1}}% +\newcommand\tablewidth[1]{\pt@width=#1\relax}% +\newcommand\tableheadfrac[1]{\gdef\pt@headfrac{#1}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Initialization: +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \let\pt@caption\@empty% + \let\pt@head\@empty% + \let\pt@tail\@empty% + \pt@width\textwidth% + %\def\pt@headfrac{.1}% + \def\pt@headfrac{\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize}% initialize typesize to consider +}% % while calculating rows +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pt@calcnlines} +% Calculate the number of tabular rows that will fit in the body of the +% table. The height of the table body and the number of lines are +% calculated thus: +% \makeatletter +% \begin{eqnarray} +% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar bodyheight}}& +% {}={}& +% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar textheight}} +% \times (1 - \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar pt@headfrac}})\nonumber\\ +% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar pt@nlines}}& +% {}={}& +% \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar bodyheight}} +% / (\mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar arraystretch}} +% \times \mbox{\texttt{\@backslashchar baselineskip}})\nonumber +% \end{eqnarray} +% \makeatother +% +% The row height can be seen to be valid algebraically if one examines +% the definitions for |\strutbox|, |\@setstrut|, and |\@array|. +% I could eliminate +% this calculation, as well as its attendant parameters, if it were +% possible to determine the accumulated height of the |\halign| box as +% \TeX\ goes along. +% +% Art says: of course this is not possible in \LaTeX\ +% without supplementing it with a specialized output routine. +% \begin{macrocode} +% +\newdimen\tabbaseskip% +% +\def\pt@calcnlines{% + \begingroup% + \if@pt@rot\textheight\textwidth\fi% rotate tables + \pt@typesize% Type sizes in deluxetable + \@tempdima\pt@headfrac\textheight + \@tempdimb\textheight\advance\@tempdimb by -\@tempdima + \@tempdima\arraystretch\baselineskip + \global\tabbaseskip\baselineskip + \divide\@tempdimb by\@tempdima + \global\pt@nlines\@tempdimb + \endgroup +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pt@tabacol} +% Set |\@acol| +% to |\pt@tabacol|, which is called when building the preamble for the +% |\halign| (assuming the first column format specification is |l|, +% which it should be for ApJ tables) so that |\tabskip| within the table +% is set to |\fill|. +% +% Doing so permits us to toggle between natural and fixed-width +% tables without requiring the user to change markup. Note that by +% forcing |\tabskip| always to be |\fill|, I pretty well nullify any +% |@{\hspace}| commands the user puts in the template, but this +% environment is for people who don't want to think about that sort of +% stuff anyway. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pt@tabacol{% + \edef\@preamble{\@preamble\hskip\tabcolsep\tabskip\fill}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pt@tmpcapwidth} +% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano} +% +% Permit different identifying strings, one for the first page of the +% table and one for continuation pages. \LaTeX's |\fnum@table| is set +% to one or the other automatically in the environment. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newdimen\pt@tmpcapwidth +\long\def\@makecaption@plano#1#2{% + \@ifdim{\pt@width>\z@}{% + \pt@tmpcapwidth\pt@width + }{% + \pt@tmpcapwidth\hsize + }% +%\center + \parbox{\pt@tmpcapwidth}{% + \@make@caption@text{#1}{#2}% + }% + \endcenter +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptable} +% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont} +% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text} +% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont} +% +% The default formatting procedures for +% plano table captions. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\fnum@ptable{Table \thetable}% +\def\fnum@ptablecont{Table \thetable---{\rmfamily Continued}}% +\long\def\@make@caption@text#1#2{% + \center\rmfamily#1.\quad#2\endcenter +}% +\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont#1#2{% + \center\rmfamily#1\endcenter + \vskip 2.5ex +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont@pptt} +% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text@pptt} +% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt} +% Formatting procedures for +% plano table captions in the +% preprint style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\fnum@ptablecont@pptt{Table \thetable---{\itshape Continued}}% +\long\def\@make@caption@text@pptt#1#2{% + \center\sc#1\\[.5ex]#2\endcenter +}% +\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt#1#2{% + \center\sc#1\endcenter + \vskip 1.5ex +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptable@apj} +% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont@apj} +% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text@apj} +% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont@apj} +% Formatting procedures for +% plano table captions in the +% ApJ style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\fnum@ptable@apj{TABLE \thetable}% +\def\fnum@ptablecont@apj{TABLE \thetable---{\itshape Continued}}% +\long\def\@make@caption@text@apj#1#2{% + \center\Large\sc#1\\[.5ex]#2\endcenter +}% +\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont@apj#1#2{% + \center\Large\sc#1\endcenter + \vskip 1.5ex +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptable@aj} +% \begin{macro}{\fnum@ptablecont@aj} +% \begin{macro}{\@make@caption@text@aj} +% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption@plano@cont@aj} +% Formatting procedures for +% plano table captions in the +% AJ style. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\fnum@ptable@aj{Table \thetable.}% +\def\fnum@ptablecont@aj{Table \thetable.\space{\rmfamily (continued)}}% +\long\def\@make@caption@text@aj#1#2{% + \center\large{\sc#1}\space#2\endcenter +}% +\long\def\@makecaption@plano@cont@aj#1#2{% + \center\large{\sc#1}\endcenter + \vskip 1.5ex +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{deluxetable} +% \begin{macro}{planotable} +% \begin{macro}{\startdata} +% \begin{macro}{\enddata} +% +% Implementation Note: +% It is desirable for the last portion of +% a multi-page table to be |\topinsert|ed, rather than |\midinsert|ed. +% At the moment, this doesn't happen. It's not straightforward to +% make that preference known at the {\em end} of table processing. +% +% Note the context switch that provides for alternative formatting for +% table notes in plano tables. +% +% In the start processing of |deluxetable|, the first order +% of business is to put away the argument, which is +% just like the argument of \LaTeX's |tabular|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newbox\spew@tblnotesbox% +\newbox\restof@tblnotesbox% +\global\newdimen\noteheight% +\global\newdimen\pt@tabnoteminht% +\global\pt@tabnoteminht=0pt% +\newenvironment{deluxetable}[1]{% +% Fixed: table immediately after the title + \maketitle + \def\pt@format{\string#1}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Next come the custom modifications to |tabular|'s behavior, +% the row terminator that allows pagebreaks and +% the alignment preamble parser that always sets +% |\tabskip| to |\hfill|. +% Note: |\nl| and |\nextline| are now deprecated. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\@acol\pt@tabacol% + \let\@tabularcr\@ptabularcr% +% \end{macrocode} +% Now come the context switches that control how +% table notes are formatted. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\@tablenotetext\@ptablenotetext% + \let\@tablenotes\@ptablenotes% +% \end{macrocode} +% The remainder of the start processing simply initializes +% counters that are used in |deluxetable| processing. +% \begin{macrocode} + \global\pt@ncol\z@% + \global\pt@column\z@% + \global\pt@page\@ne% + \gdef\pt@addcol{\global\advance\pt@ncol\@ne}% + \if@pt@rot\leavevmode\fi% +}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% End processing for |deluxetable| entails +% formatting the table notes, outputting the diagnostic +% message for the last table page and wrapping up the float. +% +% Finding the available space for tablenotes below the table body +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\@typesize\pt@footnotesize%%% considering the table typesize in calculation + \global\pt@tabnoteminht=\pt@notemin@footnote\baselineskip + \else + \ifx\@typesize\pt@scriptsize + \global\pt@tabnoteminht=\pt@notemin@script\baselineskip + \else + \global\pt@tabnoteminht=\pt@notemin@normal\baselineskip + \fi + \fi + \global\advance\pt@tabnoteminht-\@abovenoteskip + \global\@abovenoteskip=0pt + \setbox\spew@tblnotesbox\vbox{\spew@tblnotes}% + %% + %% Finding the available space for tablenotes in current page + \if@pt@rot\global\noteheight\textwidth\else\global\noteheight\textheight\fi% + \global\advance\noteheight-\ht\captionbox% + \global\advance\noteheight-\pt@line\tabbaseskip + \if@twocolumn %% tables in preprint2 style + \ifx\@typesize\pt@scriptsize + \global\advance\noteheight-6\baselineskip% + \else + \global\advance\noteheight-3\baselineskip% + \fi + \else + \global\advance\noteheight-2\baselineskip% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +%% +%% Print the maximum lines of notes below table within current page +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifdim\noteheight<\pt@tabnoteminht% if not possible to keep the minimum two lines + \global\noteheight=0pt% % the whole notes move to next page. + \global\setbox\restof@tblnotesbox\vbox{\unvbox\spew@tblnotesbox}% + \else + %% + %% if possible two lines, check the length of notes + \ifdim\ht\spew@tblnotesbox>\noteheight% + % Print maximum notes in available space and store the remaining part + \hbox\@to\hsize{\hfil\vsplit\spew@tblnotesbox to \noteheight\hfil}% + \global\setbox\restof@tblnotesbox\vbox{\unvbox\spew@tblnotesbox}% + \else% + % Print the whole notes in current page. + \vbox{\hbox\@to\hsize{\hfil\box\spew@tblnotesbox\hfil}}% + \fi + \fi + \typeout@deluxetable% + \endcenter% + \end@plano@float% +% \end{macrocode} +%% +%% Print the remaining tablenotes into new page(s). +% \begin{macrocode} +%% print each page until the remaining box empty. + \loop\ifvoid\restof@tblnotesbox\else% + \clearpage + %% + %% check whether the remaining box is a full/partial page + \ifdim\ht\restof@tblnotesbox<\if@pt@rot\hsize\else\vsize\fi% + \vbox to \textheight{\if@pt@rot\vfill\fi\hbox to \textwidth{\if@pt@rot\else\hfil\fi + \if@pt@rot\rotatebox{90}{\box\restof@tblnotesbox} + \else{\box\restof@tblnotesbox}\fi\hfil}\vfill}% + \else% + \vbox to \textheight{\vfill\hbox to \textwidth{\hfil% + \if@pt@rot\rotatebox{90}{\vsplit\restof@tblnotesbox to \textwidth} + \else{\vsplit\restof@tblnotesbox to \textheight}\fi\hfil}\vfill}% + \fi% + \clearpage + \repeat% + \addtocounter{table}{\m@ne}% + \tabletypesize{\normalsize}% +}% +\let@environment{planotable}{deluxetable}% +% +\def\@plano@float{% Invoked by \startdata + \begingroup% + \if@pt@rot\columnwidth\textheight\fi% Deluxetable table \rotate + \@plano@float@{table}% +}% +\def\end@plano@float{% S/B invoked by \enddata; instead by \enddeluxetable + \end@plano@float@\endgroup}% +\def\@plano@float@{\@float}% Extra layer of abstraction for float processing +\def\end@plano@float@{% +\end@float}% +\newdimen\firsttabskip +\firsttabskip-\hsize +\appdef\@endfloatbox{% +\if@pt@rot +\global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{\hskip\firsttabskip\global\firsttabskip\z@% +\rotatebox{90}{\box\@currbox}}\else\global\firsttabskip\z@\fi% +% Fix the roate table on first page +}% +% +\def\typeout@deluxetable@mss{% + \typeout{% + Table \thetable\space has been set to width \the\pt@width + }% +}% +\def\typeout@deluxetable@ppt{% + \typeout{% + Page \the\pt@page \space of table \thetable\space has been set to + width \the\pt@width\space with \the\pt@nlines\space lines per page + }% +}% +% FIXME: default setting in case of unknown substyle +\let\typeout@deluxetable\typeout@deluxetable@mss +\newcommand\startdata{% + \pt@calcnlines + \@ifdim{\pt@width>\z@}{% + \def\@halignto{\@to\pt@width}% + }{% + \def\@halignto{}% + }% + \let\fnum@table=\fnum@ptable + \let\@makecaption\@makecaption@plano + \global\pt@line\z@ + \start@pt@tabular + \after@startdata +}% +% +\global\newbox\captionbox +\def\start@pt@tabular{\par% + \@plano@float + \center + \expandafter\caption\expandafter{\pt@caption}% + \global\setbox\captionbox\vbox{\expandafter\caption\expandafter{\pt@caption}} + \pt@typesize% Type sizes in deluxetable + \expandafter\@tabular\expandafter{\pt@format}% +}% +% +\def\set@pt@box#1{\setbox\pt@box}% +\def\after@startdata{\pt@head}% +\def\after@startdata@aj{\hline\hline\relax\\[-1.7ex]\pt@head}% +\def\enddata{% + \crcr + \noalign{\vskip .7ex}% + \before@enddata% + \endtabular% + \setbox\pt@box\lastbox% + \pt@width\wd\pt@box + \hbox \@to \hsize{\hfil\box\pt@box\hfil}% + \ignorespaces}% +\def\before@enddata{\hline}% +\def\before@enddata@aj{\hline\hline}% +\def\nl{\substitute@command\nl\\}% +\def\nextline{\substitute@command\nextline\\}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ptabularcr} +% \begin{macro}{\@argptabularcr} +% A different row terminator is needed so that the line counter +% can be checked prior to adding the line to the alignment box. +% This command is syntactically equivalent to |\\|. +% +% User Note: This code is syntactically the same as the \LaTeX\ +% code for |\@tabularcr|, however the latter semantically ignores +% its *-form. +% In the case of |\@ptabularcr|, the * suppresses the possibility +% of a page break. +% +% Implementation Note: This code, like |\@tabularcr| relies on the +% idiom |{\ifnum0=`}\fi|, an obscure construction that is explained +% by the \TeX book on pages 240 and 385--386. +% The need for this construct is the case where a |\\| is immediately +% followed by a |&| or a |\cr|. The construct |\ifnum0=`{\fi}| undoes +% the effect of the first. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@ptabularcr{% + {\ifnum0=`}\fi% A klootch just in case the next token is & or \cr + \@ifstar{% + \@testopt{\@argptabularcr\@empty}\z@skip% + }{% + \@testopt{\@argptabularcr\ptable@@split}\z@skip% + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Recalculating the lines per page if any optional spacing between rows +% \begin{macrocode} +\newdimen\pt@reduceline +\newdimen\extra@vspace +\extra@vspace\z@ +\def\@xargptarraycr#1{\@tempdima #1% + \global\advance\extra@vspace\@tempdima% % adding the optional spaces + \advance\@tempdima\dp \@arstrutbox% + \vrule \@height\z@ \@depth\@tempdima \@width\z@% + \global\pt@reduceline\arraystretch\tabbaseskip% total lines to be reduced + \@whilenum\pt@reduceline<\extra@vspace% % reducing the excess lines% + \do{% + \global\advance\extra@vspace-\pt@reduceline% + \global\advance\pt@line1 + }% +\cr}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@argptabularcr#1[#2]{% + \ifnum0=`{\fi}% To undo the effect of the klootch. + \@ifdim{#2>\z@}{% + \unskip\@xargptarraycr{#2}% + }{% + \@yargarraycr{#2}% + }\ptable@split#1% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ptable@split} +% \begin{macro}{\ptable@@split} +% \begin{macro}{\before@suspendpt} +% \begin{macro}{\before@resumept} +% \begin{macro}{\before@suspendpt@aj} +% \begin{macro}{\before@resumept@aj} +% \begin{macro}{\typeout@pt@nl@ppt} +% \begin{macro}{\typeout@pt@nl@mss} +% \begin{macro}{\typeout@pt@nl@aj} +% The decision to break the table is made by |\ptable@split|, +% which does its calculations inside a |\noalign|, +% a trick I got from William Baxter. +% Note that if the *-form of the |\\| was used, +% the token thrown by |\aftergroup| is simply |\@empty|, +% regardless of what the line count is; +% this is how we prevent a pagebreak at this line. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ptable@split#1{% + \noalign{% + \global\advance\pt@line\@ne% + \@ifnum{\pt@line<\pt@nlines}{}{% + \aftergroup#1% + }% + }% +}% +\def\ptable@@split{% + \before@suspendpt% + \endtabular% + \setbox\pt@box\lastbox% + \pt@width\wd\pt@box\box\pt@box% + \typeout@pt@nl% + \global\advance\pt@page\@ne% + \endcenter% + \end@plano@float% + \clearpage + \global\extra@vspace\z@ + \addtocounter{table}{-2}% + \let\fnum@table=\fnum@ptablecont% + \let\@makecaption\@makecaption@plano@cont% + \global\pt@ncol=\pt@column% Either 0 or value of \tablecolumns + \global\pt@line\z@% + \start@pt@tabular% + \before@resumept% + \pt@head% +}% +\def\before@suspendpt{}% +\def\before@resumept{}% +\def\before@suspendpt@aj{\@tabularcr\noalign{\vskip .7ex}\hline}% +\def\before@resumept@aj{\hline\relax\@tabularcr[-1.7ex]}% +\def\typeout@pt@nl@ppt{% + \typeout{% + Page \the\pt@page\space of table \thetable\space has been set to + width \the\pt@width + }% +}% +\def\typeout@pt@nl@mss{% + \typeout{% + Page \the\pt@page\space of table \thetable\space has been set to + width \the\pt@width\space with \the\pt@nlines\space lines per page + }% +}% +\def\typeout@pt@nl@aj{% + \typeout{% + Table \thetable\space has been set to + width \the\pt@width\space with \the\pt@nlines\space lines per page + }% +}% +\let\typeout@pt@nl\typeout@pt@nl@mss +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\tablevspace} +% \begin{macro}{\tablebreak} +% Author markup commands for planotable environment line breaks. +% +% In version 4.0, it was necessary to use |\nl| or |\nextline| instead +% of |\\| and to employ an alternative mechanism for introducing extra +% vertical space: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \nl == \nextline Used in place of LaTeX's \\ +% \tablevspace{<dimen>} +% \tablebreak +% \end{verbatim} +% +% In this version of \aastex\, the user can simply employ \LaTeX's |\\| +% as per usual. +% The user can supply an optional argument to govern the vertical +% spacing as usual, and the *-form prevents a pagebreak. +% +% Consequently, |\nl|, |\nextline|, and |\tablevspace| are now deprecated. +% +% Note that there is a significant problem with the |\tablevspace| command that +% recommends against its use: +% if the table splits at that point, the extra vertical space +% will fall at the top of the next page's table. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\tablevspace[1]{\substitute@command\tablevspace\\[#1]}% +% \end{macrocode} +% In order to force a |deluxetable| to split (over pages), the user +% gives the |\tablebreak| command. +% +% Art says: As a means of controlling page breaks, +% I prefer to see the user employ the *-form of the +% row terminator |\\| to prevent the indicated line +% from splitting from the next line. +% Besides, there is a drawback in using |\tablebreak|, namely +% that it is syntactically different from |\\|, and +% unlike any extant \LaTeX\ capability. +% The ``\LaTeX\ way'' of forcing a page break would be +% to use the |\pagebreak| or |\newpage| commands. +% So I deprecate |\tablebreak|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\tablebreak{\cr\ptable@@split}%\\{\cr\ptable@@split}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\cutinhead} +% \begin{macro}{\cutinhead@ppt} +% \begin{macro}{\sidehead} +% We have some specialty heads that are sometimes wanted in tables. +% Art says: Why do these use |\@ptabularcr|? +% \begin{verbatim} +% \cutinhead{<text>} +% \sidehead{<text>} +% \end{verbatim} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\cutinhead[1]{% + \noalign{\vskip 1.5ex}% + \hline + \@ptabularcr + \noalign{\vskip -4ex}% + \multicolumn{\pt@ncol}{c}{#1}% + \@ptabularcr + \noalign{\vskip .8ex}% + \hline + \@ptabularcr + \noalign{\vskip -2ex}% +}% +\def\cutinhead@ppt#1{% + \noalign{\vskip 1.5ex}% + \hline + \@ptabularcr + \noalign{\vskip -2ex}% Style Note: in apj, it is -1.5ex + \multicolumn{\pt@ncol}{c}{#1}% + \@ptabularcr + \noalign{\vskip .8ex}% + \hline + \@ptabularcr + \noalign{\vskip -2ex}% +}% +\newcommand\sidehead[1]{% + \noalign{\vskip 1.5ex}% + \multicolumn{\pt@ncol}{@{\hskip\z@}l}{#1}% + \@ptabularcr + \noalign{\vskip .5ex}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ptablenotetext} +% \begin{macro}{\@ptablenotes} +% +% Here we provide for the alternative formatting procedures for +% table notes in plano tables. +% Note that the |\tablenotemark| does not change. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@ptablenotetext#1#2{% + \vspace{0ex}% Style Note: in ppt, it is gone + {%\parbox{\pt@width}% + {\hskip1em$^{\mathrm#1}$#2}\par}% +}% +\def\@ptablenotes#1{% + \par + \vspace{2ex}% + {\setlength\parskip{1.5ex}#1}% +}% +\def\@ptablenotes@apj#1{% + \par + \vspace{2ex}% + {#1}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\tablerefs} +% \begin{macro}{\@tableref} +% \begin{macro}{\tablecomments} +% \begin{macro}{\@tablecom} +% Special kinds of table footnotes. Sometimes authors tabulate things +% which have corresponding references, and it may be desirable to +% associate these references with the table rather than +% (or in addition to) the formal reference list. +% Occasionally, authors wish to append a short +% paragraph of explanatory notes that pertain to the entire table, but +% which are different than the caption. +% \begin{verbatim} +% \tablerefs{<reference list>} +% \tablecomments{<text>} +% \end{verbatim} +% +% In implementation, we enqueue and dequeue using the same +% mechanism as the table notes. +% \begin{macrocode} +% +\newcommand\tablerefs[1]{\ifdim\@abovenoteskip=0pt\global\@abovenoteskip=10pt\fi +\appgdef\tblnote@list{\hsize\pt@width\leftskip\z@\rightskip\z@% +\@tableref{\parfillskip\z@ plus1fil#1\endgraf}}}% +\def\@tableref#1{% + \par + \vspace*{3ex}% + {%\parbox{\pt@width} %%%% + {\hskip1em\rmfamily References. --- #1}\par}% +}% +\newcommand\tablecomments[1]{\ifdim\@abovenoteskip=0pt\global\@abovenoteskip=10pt\fi +\appgdef\tblnote@list{\hsize\pt@width\leftskip\z@\rightskip\z@% +\@tablecom{\parfillskip\z@ plus1fil#1\endgraf}}}% +\def\@tablecom#1{% + \par + \vspace*{3ex}% + {%\parbox{\pt@width} %%% +{\hskip1em\rmfamily Note. --- #1}\par}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@tableref@pptt} +% \begin{macro}{\@tablecom@pptt} +% Table references and comments in the two-column preprint style: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@tableref@pptt#1{% + \par + \vspace*{3ex}% + {%\parbox{\pt@width} %%% + {\hskip1em{\sc References.---}#1}\par}% +}% +\def\@tablecom@pptt#1{% + \vspace*{3ex}{% + %\parbox{\pt@width} %%% + {\hskip1em{\sc Note.---}#1}\par}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% Here ends the section of code incorporated into the +% V4.1 document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Hereinafter appears code for the document class. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*class> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{Float Parameters}% +% +% \begin{macro}{plate} +% Create a new type of float for ``plates''. +% Note that the |\ftype@plate| must be a power of 2, +% and that plates are put into the LOF (via |\ext@plate|). +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcounter{plate}% +\def\ftype@plate{4}% +\def\ext@plate{lof}% +\newenvironment{plate}{\@float{plate}}{\end@float}% +\newenvironment{plate*}{\@dblfloat{plate}}{\end@dblfloat}% +\let\platewidth=\tablewidth +\newcommand\platenum[1]{% + \def\theplate{#1}% + \let\@currentlabel\theplate + \addtocounter{plate}{\m@ne}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\thefigure} +% \begin{macro}{\thetable} +% \begin{macro}{\theplate} +% Float numbering is arabic. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}% +\def\thetable{\@arabic\c@table}% +\def\theplate{\@arabic\c@plate}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\fnum@figure} +% \begin{macro}{\fnum@table} +% \begin{macro}{\fnum@plate} +% +% Formatting of the float number: +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\fnum@figure{{\rmfamily Fig.\space\thefigure.---}}% +\def\fnum@table{{\rmfamily Table \thetable:}}% +\def\fnum@plate{{\bfseries Plate \theplate.}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\fps@figure} +% \begin{macro}{\fps@table} +% \begin{macro}{\fps@plate} +% +% Float positions: +% \begin{macrocode} +% +\def\fps@figure{bp}% +\def\fps@table{bp}% +\def\fps@plate{bp}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \subsubsection{EPS Inclusions}% +% FIXME: requires package epsf.sty +% +% FIXME: prefer |\includegraphics| +% +% FIXME: implement autoscaling in |\plotone| and |\plottwo|. +% +% \begin{macro}{\eps@scaling} +% \begin{macro}{\epsscale} +% \begin{macro}{\plotone} +% \begin{macro}{\plottwo} +% \begin{macro}{\plotfiddle} +% Support EPS inclusion with the native \LaTeX\ |\includegraphics| +% command. +% A large number of DVI translators are supported by this mechanism, +% although certain other features of \aastex, notably turnpage tables, +% are supported only by PostScript output devices. +% \begin{verbatim} +% \plotone{<epsfile>} +% \plottwo{<epsfile>}{<epsfile>} +% \plotfiddle{<epsfile>}{<vsize>}{<rot>}{<hsf>} +% {<vsf>}{<htrans>}{<vtrans>} +% <epsfile> name of EPS file +% \end{verbatim} +% |\plotone| inserts the plot in a space that is |\columnwidth| wide; +% |\plottwo| inserts two plots side by side on the same line. +% +% The |\plotfiddle| command now +% uses only its first six arguments; +% only |voffset| is ignored. +% The parameters |hsf| and |vsf| serves as a scale factor for both +% horizontal and vertical. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%\epsfverbosetrue +\def\eps@scaling{1.0}% +\newcommand\epsscale[1]{\gdef\eps@scaling{#1}}% +% 28 Oct 2003 SZ +% added typeout commands to \plotone, \plottwo, \plotfiddle +% this was a change made to the .cls for WPR +% that was not picked up in the .dtx +\newcommand\plotone[1]{% + \typeout{Plotone included the file #1} + \centering + \leavevmode + \includegraphics[width={\eps@scaling\columnwidth}]{#1}% +}% +\newcommand\plottwo[2]{{% + \typeout{Plottwo included the files #1 #2} + \centering + \leavevmode + \columnwidth=.45\columnwidth + \includegraphics[width={\eps@scaling\columnwidth}]{#1}% + \hfil + \includegraphics[width={\eps@scaling\columnwidth}]{#2}% +}}% +% +\def\plotfiddle#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{{ +\typeout{Plotfiddle included the file #1} +\centering\leavevmode%% Re-implement from v4.0 +\vbox to #2{\rule{0pt}{#2}} +\hspace*{#6pt}\includegraphics[width=#4pt, height=#5pt, angle=#3, origin=c]{#1}}% +} +% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \subsubsection{Abbreviations for Journals}% +% +% The object here is to provide authors +% with convenient shorthands for the most ``popular'' (often-cited) +% journals; the author can use these markup tags without being concerned +% about the exact form of the journal abbreviation, or its formatting. +% It is up to the keeper of the macros to make sure the macros expand +% to the proper text. If macro package writers agree to all use the +% same TeX command name, authors only have to remember one thing, and +% the style file will take care of editorial preferences. This also +% applies when a single journal decides to revamp its abbreviating +% scheme, as happened with the ApJ (Abt 1991). +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\jnl@style=\rmfamily +\def\ref@jnl#1{{\jnl@style#1}}% +\newcommand\aj{\ref@jnl{AJ}}% + % Astronomical Journal +\newcommand\actaa{\ref@jnl{Acta Astron.}}% + % Acta Astronomica +\newcommand\araa{\ref@jnl{ARA\&A}}% + % Annual Review of Astron and Astrophys +\newcommand\apj{\ref@jnl{ApJ}}% + % Astrophysical Journal +\newcommand\apjl{\ref@jnl{ApJ}}% + % Astrophysical Journal, Letters +\newcommand\apjs{\ref@jnl{ApJS}}% + % Astrophysical Journal, Supplement +\newcommand\ao{\ref@jnl{Appl.~Opt.}}% + % Applied Optics +\newcommand\apss{\ref@jnl{Ap\&SS}}% + % Astrophysics and Space Science +\newcommand\aap{\ref@jnl{A\&A}}% + % Astronomy and Astrophysics +\newcommand\aapr{\ref@jnl{A\&A~Rev.}}% + % Astronomy and Astrophysics Reviews +\newcommand\aaps{\ref@jnl{A\&AS}}% + % Astronomy and Astrophysics, Supplement +\newcommand\azh{\ref@jnl{AZh}}% + % Astronomicheskii Zhurnal +\newcommand\baas{\ref@jnl{BAAS}}% + % Bulletin of the AAS +\newcommand\caa{\ref@jnl{Chinese Astron. Astrophys.}}% + % Chinese Astronomy and Astrophysics +\newcommand\cjaa{\ref@jnl{Chinese J. Astron. Astrophys.}}% + % Chinese Journal of Astronomy and Astrophysics +\newcommand\icarus{\ref@jnl{Icarus}}% + % Icarus +\newcommand\jcap{\ref@jnl{J. Cosmology Astropart. Phys.}}% + % Journal of Cosmology and Astroparticle Physics +\newcommand\jrasc{\ref@jnl{JRASC}}% + % Journal of the RAS of Canada +\newcommand\memras{\ref@jnl{MmRAS}}% + % Memoirs of the RAS +\newcommand\mnras{\ref@jnl{MNRAS}}% + % Monthly Notices of the RAS +\newcommand\na{\ref@jnl{New A}}% + % New Astronomy +\newcommand\nar{\ref@jnl{New A Rev.}}% + % New Astronomy Review +\newcommand\pra{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~A}}% + % Physical Review A: General Physics +\newcommand\prb{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~B}}% + % Physical Review B: Solid State +\newcommand\prc{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~C}}% + % Physical Review C +\newcommand\prd{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~D}}% + % Physical Review D +\newcommand\pre{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~E}}% + % Physical Review E +\newcommand\prl{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rev.~Lett.}}% + % Physical Review Letters +\newcommand\pasa{\ref@jnl{PASA}}% + % Publications of the Astron. Soc. of Australia +\newcommand\pasp{\ref@jnl{PASP}}% + % Publications of the ASP +\newcommand\pasj{\ref@jnl{PASJ}}% + % Publications of the ASJ +\newcommand\qjras{\ref@jnl{QJRAS}}% + % Quarterly Journal of the RAS +\newcommand\rmxaa{\ref@jnl{Rev. Mexicana Astron. Astrofis.}}% + % Revista Mexicana de Astronomia y Astrofisica +\newcommand\skytel{\ref@jnl{S\&T}}% + % Sky and Telescope +\newcommand\solphys{\ref@jnl{Sol.~Phys.}}% + % Solar Physics +\newcommand\sovast{\ref@jnl{Soviet~Ast.}}% + % Soviet Astronomy +\newcommand\ssr{\ref@jnl{Space~Sci.~Rev.}}% + % Space Science Reviews +\newcommand\zap{\ref@jnl{ZAp}}% + % Zeitschrift fuer Astrophysik +\newcommand\nat{\ref@jnl{Nature}}% + % Nature +\newcommand\iaucirc{\ref@jnl{IAU~Circ.}}% + % IAU Cirulars +\newcommand\aplett{\ref@jnl{Astrophys.~Lett.}}% + % Astrophysics Letters and Communications +\newcommand\apspr{\ref@jnl{Astrophys.~Space~Phys.~Res.}}% + % Astrophysics Space Physics Research +\newcommand\bain{\ref@jnl{Bull.~Astron.~Inst.~Netherlands}}% + % Bulletin Astronomical Institute of the Netherlands +\newcommand\fcp{\ref@jnl{Fund.~Cosmic~Phys.}}% + % Fundamental Cosmic Physics +\newcommand\gca{\ref@jnl{Geochim.~Cosmochim.~Acta}}% + % Geochimica Cosmochimica Acta +\newcommand\grl{\ref@jnl{Geophys.~Res.~Lett.}}% + % Geophysics Research Letters +\newcommand\jcp{\ref@jnl{J.~Chem.~Phys.}}% + % Journal of Chemical Physics +\newcommand\jgr{\ref@jnl{J.~Geophys.~Res.}}% + % Journal of Geophysical Research +\newcommand\jqsrt{\ref@jnl{J.~Quant.~Spec.~Radiat.~Transf.}}% + % Journal of Quantitiative Spectroscopy and Radiative Trasfer +\newcommand\memsai{\ref@jnl{Mem.~Soc.~Astron.~Italiana}}% + % Mem. Societa Astronomica Italiana +\newcommand\nphysa{\ref@jnl{Nucl.~Phys.~A}}% + % Nuclear Physics A +\newcommand\physrep{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Rep.}}% + % Physics Reports +\newcommand\physscr{\ref@jnl{Phys.~Scr}}% + % Physica Scripta +\newcommand\planss{\ref@jnl{Planet.~Space~Sci.}}% + % Planetary Space Science +\newcommand\procspie{\ref@jnl{Proc.~SPIE}}% + % Proceedings of the SPIE +\let\astap=\aap +\let\apjlett=\apjl +\let\apjsupp=\apjs +\let\applopt=\ao +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% Here ends the code for the document class. +% Hereinafter appears code that is common to +% the document class and document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</class> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{Text Entities}% +% +% The entire text entities section of code is incorporated into the +% V4.1 document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Handy little things---that everybody works out for themselves anyway! +% Many of these come from Springer's A\&A package, and some were +% contributed by Francois Schweizer at DTM. +% You can go berserk making these up, +% especially when you start getting into the composite ones. We have +% tried to select a tractable number that were useful, and somewhat +% difficult to get right because fussy kerning or some such is required. +% Most can be used in or out of math mode with impunity; |\alt| and +% |\agt| are relations and can only be used in math mode. +% +% The first group consists of +% various kinds of phantoms used for aligning columns in tables; +% |\phn| is a phantom numeral, +% |\phd| a phantom decimal, +% |\phs| a phantom minus sign, and +% |\phm| is a generic phantom. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\phn{\phantom{0}}% +\newcommand\phd{\phantom{.}}% +\newcommand\phs{\phantom{$-$}}% +\newcommand\phm[1]{\phantom{#1}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Wait! These two macros are defined in \file{amssymb.sty}! +% \begin{macrocode} +%\newcommand\lesssim{% +% \mathrel{\mbox{\rlap{\mbox{\lower4pt\hbox{$\sim$}}}\mbox{$<$}}}% +%}% +%\newcommand\gtrsim{% +% \mathrel{\mbox{\rlap{\mbox{\lower4pt\hbox{$\sim$}}}\mbox{$>$}}}% +%}% +% +\let\la=\lesssim % For Springer A&A compliance... +\let\ga=\gtrsim +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Various and sundry shorthand for text entities: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\sq{\mbox{\rlap{$\sqcap$}$\sqcup$}}% +\newcommand\arcdeg{\mbox{$^\circ$}}% +\newcommand\arcmin{\mbox{$^\prime$}}% +\newcommand\arcsec{\mbox{$^{\prime\prime}$}}% +\newcommand\fd{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm d}$}}% +\newcommand\fh{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm h}$}}% +\newcommand\fm{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm m}$}}% +\newcommand\fs{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\mathrm s}$}}% +\newcommand\fdg{\mbox{$.\!\!^\circ$}}% +\newcommand\farcm@mss{\mbox{$.\mkern-4mu^\prime$}}% +\let\farcm\farcm@mss +\newcommand\farcs@mss{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\prime\prime}$}}% +\let\farcs\farcs@mss +\newcommand\fp{\mbox{$.\!\!^{\scriptscriptstyle\mathrm p}$}}% +\newcommand\micron{\mbox{$\mu$m}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Alternative definitions for ApJ +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\farcm@apj{% + \mbox{.\kern -0.7ex\raisebox{.9ex}{\scriptsize$\prime$}}% +}% +\def\farcs@apj{% + \mbox{% + \kern 0.13ex.% + \kern -0.95ex\raisebox{.9ex}{\scriptsize$\prime\prime$}% + \kern -0.1ex% + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\case} +% Permit author to typeset ``case'' fractions. This is sometimes +% wanted in displayed equations, during which \LaTeX\ will set fractions +% specified as |\frac{x}{y}| as ``built-up'' fractions (numerator and +% denominator at body text size). +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\case[2]{\mbox{$\frac{#1}{#2}$}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\slantfrac} +% \begin{macro}{\onehalf} +% \begin{macro}{\onethird} +% \begin{macro}{\twothirds} +% \begin{macro}{\onequarter} +% \begin{macro}{\threequarters} +% \begin{macro}{\ubvr} +% \begin{macro}{\ub} +% \begin{macro}{\bv} +% \begin{macro}{\vr} +% \begin{macro}{\ur} +% Permit author to typeset ``text fractions''---the |\slantfrac| +% command should be used in text mode, \emph{not} in math mode. +% Note that this is different from a ``shilling'' fraction, which the +% author can produce without any special formatting markup. +% Define markup shorthands for several common fractions using |\slantfrac|. +% +% The |\slantfrac| command is reimplemented in this version of \aastex--- +% it used to produce a ``special fraction'', now a case fraction. +% The old definition appears below for reference. +% +% I do not understand the |\ubvr| commands. +% \begin{macrocode} +%\newcommand\slantfrac[2]{\mbox{$\,^#1\!/_#2$}}% +\newcommand\slantfrac{\case}% +\newcommand\onehalf{\slantfrac{1}{2}}% +\newcommand\onethird{\slantfrac{1}{3}}% +\newcommand\twothirds{\slantfrac{2}{3}}% +\newcommand\onequarter{\slantfrac{1}{4}}% +\newcommand\threequarters{\slantfrac{3}{4}}% +% +\newcommand\ubvr{\mbox{$U\!BV\!R$}}%% UBVR system +\newcommand\ub{\mbox{$U\!-\!B$}}% % U-B +\newcommand\bv{\mbox{$B\!-\!V$}}% % B-V +\newcommand\vr{\mbox{$V\!-\!R$}}% % V-R +\newcommand\ur{\mbox{$U\!-\!R$}}% % U-R +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ion} +% Notation for atomic species (ionization levels). The ionization state +% is specified as the second argument, and should be given as a numeral. +% The macro has to expand the numeric state into the proper notation for +% the publication (roman, numeric, plus signs, etc.) +% \begin{verbatim} +% \ion{<element>}{<ionization state>} +% \end{verbatim} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\ion[2]{#1$\;${\small\rmfamily\@Roman{#2}}\relax}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\nodata} +% Centered ellipsis for use in tables (for unknown values). |\nodata| +% is generalized markup for this notion: format of null-valued entries +% in tables is style-specific. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +%\newcommand\cellipsis{\hfill$\cdots$\hfill}% +%\newcommand\nodata{\multicolumn{1}{c}{$\cdots$}}% +\newcommand\nodata{ ~$\cdots$~ }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\diameter} +% The |\diameter| command produces a circle with a slash through it; +% added for compatibility with A\&A and MNRAS packages. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\diameter{\ooalign{\hfil/\hfil\crcr\mathhexbox20D}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\degr} +% The |\degr| command is a synonym for |\arcdeg|; +% added for compatibility with A\&A and MNRAS packages. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\degr{\arcdeg}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\Sun}% +% \begin{macro}{\Sol}% +% \begin{macro}{\sun}% +% \begin{macro}{\Mercury}% +% \begin{macro}{\Venus}% +% \begin{macro}{\Earth}% +% \begin{macro}{\Mars}% +% \begin{macro}{\Jupiter}% +% \begin{macro}{\Saturn}% +% \begin{macro}{\Uranus}% +% \begin{macro}{\Neptune}% +% \begin{macro}{\Pluto}% +% \begin{macro}{\Moon}% +% \begin{macro}{\ascnode}% +% \begin{macro}{\descnode}% +% Names for the planets and ascending node and descending node. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\Sun{\sun}% Sun symbol, "S" +\newcommand\Sol{\sun}% +\newcommand\sun{\odot}% +\newcommand\Mercury{\astro{\char1}}% Mercury symbol, "1" +\newcommand\Venus{\astro{\char2}}% Venus symbol, "2" +\newcommand\Earth{\earth}% Earth symbol, "3" +\newcommand\Terra{\earth}% +\newcommand\earth{\oplus}% +\newcommand\Mars{\astro{\char4}}% Mars symbol, "4" +\newcommand\Jupiter{\astro{\char5}}% Jupiter symbol, "5" +\newcommand\Saturn{\astro{\char6}}% Saturn symbol, "6" +\newcommand\Uranus{\astro{\char7}}% Uranus symbol, "7" +\newcommand\Neptune{\astro{\char8}}% Neptune symbol, "8" +\newcommand\Pluto{\astro{\char9}}% Pluo symbol, "9" +\newcommand\Moon{\astro{\char10}}% Moon symbol, "M" +\newcommand\Luna{\Moon}% +%\def\ascnode{\astro{N}}% ascending node (dragon's head), (only in cmastro) +%\def\descnode{\astro{D}}% descending node (dragon's tail), (only in cmastro) +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\Aries}% +% \begin{macro}{\VEq}% +% \begin{macro}{\Taurus}% +% \begin{macro}{\Gemini}% +% \begin{macro}{\Cancer}% +% \begin{macro}{\Leo}% +% \begin{macro}{\Virgo}% +% \begin{macro}{\Libra}% +% \begin{macro}{\AEq}% +% \begin{macro}{\Scorpius}% +% \begin{macro}{\Sagittarius}% +% \begin{macro}{\Capricornus}% +% \begin{macro}{\Aquarius}% +% \begin{macro}{\Pisces}% +% Zodiacal symbols, and autumnal and vernal equinox. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\Aries{\astro{\char11}}% +\newcommand\VEq{\Aries}% vernal equinox (Aries) +\newcommand\Taurus{\astro{\char12}}% +\newcommand\Gemini{\astro{\char13}}% +\newcommand\Cancer{\astro{\char14}}% +\newcommand\Leo{\astro{\char15}}% +\newcommand\Virgo{\astro{\char16}}% +\newcommand\Libra{\astro{\char17}}% +\newcommand\AEq{\Libra}% autumnal equinox (Libra) +\newcommand\Scorpius{\astro{\char18}}% +\newcommand\Sagittarius{\astro{\char19}}% +\newcommand\Capricornus{\astro{\char20}}% +\newcommand\Aquarius{\astro{\char21}}% +\newcommand\Pisces{\astro{\char22}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\astro} +% Font for astronomical symbols. +% If the document lacks a |astro| class option, then the +% |\astro@font| font switch gives a warning message suggesting how to correct things. +% +% The font is loaded at a size commensurate with that of basal text. +% We may need to fine-tune things by scaling the value; the |astro| font's metrics +% are, weirdly, about one quarter the em square. +% +% FIXME: scale the astro font? +% +% FIXME: provide a better default. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\load@astro{% + \dimen@=1\aas@ptsize\p@ + \font\astro@font=Astrosym at\dimen@ +}% +\def\astro#1{\leavevmode\hbox{\astro@font#1}}% +\def\astro@font{% + \ClassWarning{aastex}{% + Please use class option `astro', since you are using the astro font.% + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\sbond} +% \begin{macro}{\dbond} +% \begin{macro}{\tbond} +% Chemical bonds in text +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\sbond{\chem@bnd{\@sbnd}}% +\newcommand\dbond{\chem@bnd{\@dbnd}}% +\newcommand\tbond{\chem@bnd{\@tbnd}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\chem@bnd} +% \begin{macro}{\@sbnd} +% \begin{macro}{\@dbnd} +% \begin{macro}{\@tbnd} +% Low-level macros for chemical bonds in text +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\chem@bnd#1{% + {% + \kern.1em\relax + \setbox\z@\hbox{M}% + \dimen@ii.8em\relax + \p@=.1em\relax + \dimen@.5\ht\z@\dimen@i-\dimen@ + \advance\dimen@1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i-1.0\p@ + #1% + \kern.1em\relax + }% + }% +% +\def\@sbnd{% + \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@ + \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak + }% +% +\def\@dbnd{% + \advance\dimen@-0.5\p@\advance\dimen@i0.5\p@ + \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak + \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@ + \hskip-\dimen@ii + \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak + }% +% +\def\@tbnd{% + \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak + \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@ + \hskip-\dimen@ii + \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak + \advance\dimen@-1.5\p@\advance\dimen@i1.5\p@ + \hskip-\dimen@ii + \vrule\@height\dimen@\@depth\dimen@i\@width\dimen@ii\nobreak + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\LaTeX} +% This is a generalization of the definition of |\LaTeX| that comes in +% \LaTeX. +% The change here ensures that \LaTeX\ will be typeset in the current +% style, rather than always in roman. +% Note that the appearance of the \LaTeX\ logo will not necessarily +% coincide with that promulgated by Team \LaTeX\ in the Companions, +% but I claim that, in the absence of a standard set by Lamport himself, +% we need have no concerns about being taken to task by the purity police. +% +% Implementation note: we use herein the |\count@| scratch register. +% if |\everymath| begins using that register, this macro is hosed. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand\LaTeX{% + \leavevmode + L% + \raise.42ex\hbox{% + \count@=\the\fam + $\fam\count@\scriptstyle\kern-.3em A$% + }% + \kern-.15em\TeX +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\anchor} +% Syntax: |\anchor|\arg{href}\arg{text}. +% +% A general-purpose hypertext link tag, using the parlance of +% the HTML element |<<A>>| (anchor). +% |<href>| is a \emph{full} URI, including the |scheme:| designator +% and may be active in some sort of hyperref-savvy system; +% for now it has no semantic. +% The |<text>| argument is the copy to set in the document, +% much like the content of the HTML |<<A>>| element. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\anchor[2]{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\url} +% Syntax: |\url|\oarg{href}\arg{text}. +% +% We provide |\url| with the |<href>| as an optional argument, +% to support the degenerate case where an author wishes to express a URL in the text. +% In that case, |<href>|\({}={}\)|<text>|. +% If the author supplies both arguments, this command looks like an alias for |\anchor|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\url{\@dblarg\@url}% +\def\@url[#1]{\anchor{#1}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\email} +% Syntax: |\email|\arg{address}. +% +% Identify email addresses anywhere in text (not just in the author group). +% +% This markup will also permit production software at the Press +% to make |mailto:| links, etc., in online products. +% |<address>| should \emph{not} contain the |mailto:| scheme designator. +% +% In general text, |\email{foo@bar}| produces |\textt{mailto:foo@bar}|. +% The |\email| command is also used in the author lists; +% |\authoremail| is deprecated. +% +% FIXME: what happens if there is no title page? +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@text@email#1{#1}% +\def\authoremail{\substitute@command\authoremail\email}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\objectname} +% Syntax: |\objectname|\oarg{catalog ID}\arg{text}. +% +% Celestial objects can and should be identified by the author to facilitate +% post-processing of articles by the astronomical catalog databases. +% At the moment, this is done by eye, although when articles contain these +% marks, the Press could pass along a list of `objects in article' +% to database personnel. Obviously, more sophisticated technical solutions +% are possible. +% +% In the future, software could construct queries to those databases in the +% online editions, hence it may be useful for the author to supply a catalog identifier. +% We may choose to suppress the |<catalog ID>| argument in the +% documentation in the near term, since we don't have an architecture +% and a nomenclature for linking to them at this point. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\objectname{\@testopt\@objectname{[}} +\def\@objectname[#1]#2{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} +% macro for object +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\object{\@testopt\@object{[}}% +\def\@object[#1]#2{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} +%% macro for facility +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\facility{\@testopt\@facility{[}}% +\def\@facility[#1]#2{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} +%% macro for supportfrom +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\supportfrom{\@testopt\@supportfrom{[}}% +\def\@supportfrom[#1]#2{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} +%% macro for dataset +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\dataset{\@testopt\@dataset{[}}% +\def\@dataset[#1]#2{#2}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% Here ends the section of code incorporated into the +% V4.1 document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% Hereinafter appears code for the document class. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*class> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{Debugging}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\sizrpt} +% Reveal the em-width and ex-height of the current font: +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\sizrpt{% + (\fontname\the\font): em=\the\fontdimen6\font, ex=\the\fontdimen5\font + \typeout{% + (\fontname\the\font): em=\the\fontdimen6\font, ex=\the\fontdimen5\font + }% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Substyles for Manuscript and Preprint}% +% +% This portion defines the class options that account for +% the differences between the various types of document formats +% (substyles) covered by this class. +% +% \subsubsection{Preprint class option}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\aas@preprint} +% The user should invoke the |preprint| document class option +% if wishing the document formatted in preprint format. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\aas@preprint{% + \def\revtex@genre{preprint}% + \let\ptlandscape\@empty + \setlength\@slugcmmntwidth{.67\textwidth}% + \let\@makeslugcmmnt\@makeslugcmmnt@ppt + \let\@abstract\@abstract@ppt + \let\make@title\make@title@ppt + \let\make@affil\make@affil@ppt + \let\notetoeditor\@gobble + \let\clear@section@page\@empty + \let\placetable\@gobble + \let\placefigure\@gobble + \let\placeplate\@gobble + \let\typeout@deluxetable\typeout@deluxetable@ppt + \let\typeout@pt@nl\typeout@pt@nl@mss + \ps@plaintop + \let\references@refpar\references@refpar@mss + \let\cutinhead\cutinhead@ppt + \def\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize{.1} + \def\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize{.12} + \def\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize{.15} + \def\pt@notemin@normal{4.5} + \def\pt@notemin@footnote{4.5} + \def\pt@notemin@script{5} +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Two-column preprint class option}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\aas@preprint2} +% The user should invoke the |preprint2| document class option +% if wishing the document formatted in two-column preprint format. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\@namedef{aas@preprint2}{% + \aas@preprint + \def\revtex@genre{2-column preprint}% + \ps@plain + \@twocolumntrue + \@rightskip=\z@\@plus4em + \rightskip\@rightskip + \opt@just + \just@just % -SZ restored preprint2 to full justification + \setlength\parindent{1.2em}% + \setlength\parskip{0.5ex}% + \setlength\columnsep{0.5in}% + \setlength\hoffset{-0.2in}% + \tolerance=600 + \setlength\emergencystretch{6\p@}% + \def\baselinestretch{1.0}% + \def\@tightleading{1.0}% + \let\singlespace\@empty + \let\doublespace\@empty + \let\@dates\@dates@pptt + \let\@abstract\@abstract@pptt + \let\make@title\make@title@pptt + \let\make@author\make@author@pptt + \let\make@affil\make@affil@pptt + \let\@keywords\@keywords@pptt + \setlength{\skip\footins}{3ex\@plus1ex\@minus.5ex}% + \setlength\footnotesep{2ex}% + \let\@makefntext\@makefntext@pptt + \let\section\section@pptt + \let\subsection\subsection@pptt + \let\subsubsection\subsubsection@pptt + \let\section@centering\@empty + \let\appendix@figtab@defs\appendix@figtab@defs@pptt + \def\clear@thebibliography@page{% + \if@restonecol\if@twocolumn\else\twocolumn\fi\fi + }% + \let\references@refpar\references@refpar@pptt + \let\thebib@list\thebib@list@pptt + \let\@tablenotes\@tablenotes@pptt + \let\fnum@ptablecont\fnum@ptablecont@pptt + \let\@make@caption@text\@make@caption@text@pptt + \let\@makecaption@plano@cont\@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt + \let\cutinhead\cutinhead@ppt + \def\@plano@float@{\@dblfloat}% Extra layer of abstraction for float processing + \def\end@plano@float@{\end@dblfloat}% + %\let\@tableref\@tableref@pptt + \let\@tablecom\@tablecom@pptt + \def\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize{.12} + \def\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize{.15} + \def\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize{.18} + \def\pt@notemin@normal{5} + \def\pt@notemin@footnote{5} + \def\pt@notemin@script{5} +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\section@pptt} +% \begin{macro}{\subsection@pptt} +% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection@pptt} +% Level one-, two-, and three heads for two-column preprint substyle. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\section@pptt{% + \@startsection{section}{1}% + {\z@}{2.3ex\@plus1ex\@minus.2ex}% + {1.5ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}% +}% +\def\subsection@pptt{% + \@startsection{subsection}{2}% + {\z@}{2ex\@plus1ex\@minus.2ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\bfseries}% +}% +\def\subsubsection@pptt{% + \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}% + {\z@}{2ex\@plus1ex\@minus.2ex}{1ex\@plus.2ex}{\normalsize\itshape}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Manuscript class option}% +% +% \begin{macro}{\aas@manuscript} +% The user should invoke the |manuscript| document class option +% if wishing the document formatted in manuscript format. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\aas@manuscript{% + \def\revtex@genre{manuscript}% + \let\ptlandscape\@empty + \def\baselinestretch{\@doubleleading}% + \let\footnote@size\@empty + \def\tighten{\def\baselinestretch{\@doubleleading}}% + \def\singlespace{}% + \def\doublespace{}% + \opt@tighten + \setlength\@slugcmmntwidth{\textwidth}% + \let\@makeslugcmmnt\@makeslugcmmnt@mss +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Page layout dimensions: +% \begin{macrocode} + \@rightskip=\z@\@plus4em + \rightskip\@rightskip + \opt@just +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Other switches: +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\sluginfo\sluginfo@mss + \let\@abstract\@abstract@mss + \let\@keywords\@keywords@mss % pagebreak after keywords + \let\make@title\make@title@mss + \def\clear@section@page{\clearpage}% + \def\clear@thebibliography@page{\clearpage}% + \let\typeout@deluxetable\typeout@deluxetable@mss + \let\typeout@pt@nl\typeout@pt@nl@mss + \ps@plaintop + \let\references@refpar\references@refpar@mss + \def\pt@headfrac@ass@normalsize{.08} + \def\pt@headfrac@ass@footnotesize{.1} + \def\pt@headfrac@ass@scriptsize{.12} + \def\pt@notemin@normal{3} + \def\pt@notemin@footnote{3} + \def\pt@notemin@script{4} +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% Here ends the code for the document class. +% Hereinafter appears code that is common to +% the document class and document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</class> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{For Editorial Use Only}% +% The following commands permit administrative details or production +% instructions to be passed through to production software at the publisher. +% These commands are not to be used by the author. +% +% The entire editorial entities section of code is incorporated into the +% V4.1 document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\journal} +% \begin{macro}{\volume} +% \begin{macro}{\issue} +% |\journal|\arg{identifier}, |\volume|\arg{text}, |\issue|\arg{text}: +% The identification token for the target journal, and the volume +% and issue numbers, are specified in these commands. +% In the \LaTeX\ style, they produce no output; they are simply a |\@gobble|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\journal{\@gobble}% +\def\volume{\@gobble}% +\def\issue{\@gobble}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\SGMLbi} +% \begin{macro}{\SGMLbsc} +% \begin{macro}{\SGMLclc} +% |\SGMLbi|\arg{text}, |\SGMLbsc|\arg{text}, |\SGMLclc|\arg{text}: +% These commands mark text that should be in bold italic, bold script (calligraphic), +% or \emph{always} in mixed case. The first two occur principally in math mode, +% and they permit editors and keyboardists a more direct approach for specifying +% these changes. The latter item is used around text, notably chemical symbols, +% that must remain in mixed case, even when presented in an all-caps environment. +% In the \LaTeX\ style, these commands just pass the \arg{text} through. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SGMLbi#1{#1}% +\def\SGMLbsc#1{#1}% +\def\SGMLclc#1{#1}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\SGMLentity} +% |\SGMLentity|\arg{text}: +% This command permits editors and keyboardists to introduce special symbols +% with their SGML entity names. \arg{text} does \emph{not} contain the leading +% ampersand (|&|) or the trailing semicolon (|;|). +% In the \LaTeX\ style, this command should add the ampersand and the +% semicolon to \arg{text}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SGMLentity#1{\}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\SGML} +% |\SGML|\arg{text}: +% This command permits SGML instructions and markup to passed through the +% translation process. +% In the \LaTeX\ style, it produces no output; it is simply a |\@gobble|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\SGML{\@gobble}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% +% \begin{macro}{\@makecol} +%% Modify the |\@makecol| macro for one-column abstract. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\if@printfoot% +\global\@printfoottrue% +\global\newbox\my@footins +\gdef \@makecol@pptt {% + \ifvoid\footins + \setbox\@outputbox \box\@cclv + \else + \if@printfoot + \else + \global\setbox\my@footins\vbox{\box\footins} + %\global\advance\c@colht by -\ht\my@footins + \fi + \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{% + \global\setbox\footins\vbox{\unvbox\my@footins\unvbox\footins} + \boxmaxdepth \@maxdepth + \unvbox\@cclv + \if@printfoot + \vskip\skip\footins + \color@begingroup + \normalcolor + \footnoterule + \unvbox \footins + \color@endgroup + \else + \global\@printfoottrue + \fi + }% + \fi + \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}% + \global \let \@midlist \@empty + \@combinefloats + \ifvbox\@kludgeins + \@makespecialcolbox + \else + \setbox\@outputbox \vbox to \@colht{% + \@texttop + \dimen@ \dp\@outputbox + \unvbox \@outputbox + \ifbotragg% + \vskip -\dimen@ + \@textbottom + \fi + }% + \fi + \global \maxdepth \@maxdepth +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%% +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \begin{macro}{\strip} +%% macro to switch from one-column long abstract to two-column normal text +% \begin{macrocode} +\iflong@abstract +\newtoks\juo@sar \juo@sar={} +\def\@ca#1#2#3#4{} +\@ifundefined{stripsep}{\newskip\stripsep\stripsep 15pt}{} +\newskip\m@addvipersep +\m@addvipersep\z@ +\newskip\c@addvipersep +\c@addvipersep\z@ +\newdimen\ht@strip +\newdimen\right@cor +\newdimen\cor@height \cor@height=0pt +\newdimen\juo@pr +\newdimen\juo@ht +\newbox\@viper +\newcount\juo@sk +\newdimen\c@colht +\newbox\my@outputbox +%% macro for adding strip +\def\add@strip#1#2#3#4{\begingroup% + \xdef\ex@{\global\noexpand\juo@sar{\the\juo@sar\noexpand\@ca{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}\ex@% +\endgroup} +%% macro for remove strip +\def\remove@strip#1{\ifx#1\@empty\global\juo@sk=0\else + \global\advance\juo@sk by-1\expandafter\next@item\the #1\@@#1\fi} +\def\next@item \@ca#1#2#3#4#5\@@#6{\global #6={#5}\global\juo@pr=#1\global\juo@ht=#2% +\global\cor@height=#3\global\m@addvipersep=#4} +%% macro for strip command +\def\strip{\@ifnextchar[{\@strip}{\@strip[0pt/0pt]}} +\def\@strip[#1/#2]{\global\@tempdima=#1\global\@tempdimb=#2% + \global \setbox\@viper\vbox\bgroup% + \hsize\textwidth + \@parboxrestore + \col@number \@ne + \vrule height\topskip width\z@ depth\z@} +\def\endstrip{% + \egroup + \if@firstcolumn + \ifdim\pagetotal>\z@ + \global\ht@strip\pagegoal + \global\advance\ht@strip by-\pagetotal + \global\advance\ht@strip by-\stripsep + \global\advance\ht@strip by-\ht\@viper + \global\advance\ht@strip by-\stripsep + \global\juo@ht=\ht\@viper + \else + \global\ht@strip\z@ + \fi + \ifdim\ht@strip>\z@ + \add@strip{\the\pagetotal}{\the\juo@ht}{\the\@tempdima}{\the\@tempdimb}% + \global\advance\juo@sk by1 + \fi + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\@outputdblcol} +% Modification in |\@outputdblcol| command for long abstract +% \begin{macrocode} +\newif\ifbotragg\botraggfalse +\def\@outputdblcol@pptt{% +\if@firstcolumn + \global\@firstcolumnfalse + \global\setbox\@leftcolumn\box\@outputbox + \global\c@colht\@colht\global\c@addvipersep\z@ + \ifnum\juo@sk>0 + \remove@strip\juo@sar + \global\@colht\the\juo@pr + \global\@printfootfalse + \ifdim\right@cor>\z@ + \global\advance\@colht by\right@cor + \fi + \global\advance\@colht by\cor@height + \global\cor@height=0pt + \fi +\else + \ifdim\c@colht>\@colht% + \@tempdima\@colht% + \ifdim\@colht>\z@%% + \ifvoid\footins% + \else% + \vskip-\skip\footins% + \fi% + \splittopskip0pt% + \setbox\my@outputbox\vbox{% + \vspace*{\@colht}%% + \global\botraggfalse% + \vskip.7\baselineskip% + \vsplit\@outputbox to \baselineskip% + \unvbox\@outputbox}% + \unvbox\my@outputbox% + \ifvoid\my@outputbox% + \global\botraggtrue + \fi% + \global \@printfoottrue + \global\c@addvipersep\m@addvipersep% + \else% + \fi% + \ifnum\juo@sk>0% + \else% + \global\@colht\c@colht% + \fi% + \else% + \global \@firstcolumntrue% + \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox to \ht\@leftcolumn{\unvbox\@outputbox}% + \setbox\@outputbox \vbox{\hb@xt@\textwidth {% + \hb@xt@\columnwidth {\box\@leftcolumn \hss}% + \hfil + \vrule \@width\columnseprule + \hfil + \hb@xt@\columnwidth{\box\@outputbox \hss}}% + \vss}% + \@combinedblfloats + \@outputpage + \begingroup + \@dblfloatplacement + \@startdblcolumn + \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi + {\@outputpage\@startdblcolumn}% + \endgroup + \global\juo@sk=0\global\juo@sar={}% + \global\cor@height\z@\global\c@addvipersep\z@ + \fi +\fi +} +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% Here ends the code for both document class and document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</class|style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% \section{Tail of Document Style Module}% +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% This is not good: we now define a command for the +% document style that is defined elsewhere for the class. +% FIXME: only one definition of |\email| +% \begin{macrocode} +%%\def\email#1{\appdef\@author{\make@authoremail{#1}}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Here is another klootch: +% we have to provide a meaning to |\footnote@size|; +% the following code duplicates code in the class file. +% FIXME: only one code for |\footnote@size|! +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \ifx\footnote@size\undefined + \let\footnote@size\footnotesize + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Finally, execute the commands queued by |\AtEndOfClass|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@styleh@@k +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Here ends the document style. +% \begin{macrocode} +%</style> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \section{Programming Conventions}% +% In writing the above code, I cleave to certain conventions, noted +% here. +% My goal in explaining them is to encourage others maintaining this +% body of code to consider following them as well. +% The benefits are twofold: +% Some of the coding conventions aim to avoid programming pitfalls; +% following them reduces maintenance costs. +% Others make the code easier to read; following these eases the +% process of understanding how the code works. +% +% And, for my part, I prefer to read code of this type. +% +% \subsection{Whitespace Conventions}% +% Exactly where code lines break and indent, and where additional +% whitespace is inserted is explained here. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% Each new macro definition or register assignment begins a new line. +% Therefore, |\def|, |\newcommand|, and their ilk will start in column +% 1. +% \item +% Code is indented one space for each level of nesting within braces +% |{}|. +% \item +% Likewise, if possible, for |\if...| and matching |\fi|. +% \item +% However, the closing brace or |\fi| is outdented by one so that it +% falls +% at the same level of indentation as its matching brace or |\if|, +% and it appears alone on its line. +% \item +% Use of the |tab| character is deprecated +% (tabs are not standardized across all applications and operating +% systems). +% \item +% Lines of code are limited to 72 characters. +% I follow this convention mostly to ease the transmission of files +% via email (a deprecated practice) and to accomodate people with +% small monitors. +% But |ltxdoc| output looks better with the shorter lines, too. +% \item +% Extraneous whitespace is avoided by using the comment character |%|. +% In most cases, if falling at the end of a line of code, +% a brace will be immediately followed by a comment character, +% as will the macro parameter |#1| and any one-letter control sequence, +% like |\\|. +% \end{itemize} +% These conventions taken together are illustrated by the following: +% \begin{verbatim} +%\def\prepdef#1#2{% +% \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}% +% \toks@ii{#2}% +% \edef#1{\the\toks@ii\the\toks@}% +%}% +% \end{verbatim} +% In the above, the definition of |\prepdef| would not fit on a single +% line, +% and required breaking. The first and last lines have matching braces, +% and are a the same level of indentation, with the last line containing +% a single brace. +% +% Each of the three intervening lines has balanced braces and is +% indented by one space. Each line that would otherwise end in a single +% brace character is terminated by a comment character. +% +% Some coders rely on the fact that a space character seen by \TeX's +% scanner while in vertical mode is a no-op. +% Be that as it may, I eliminate them unless actually intentional. +% +% \subsection{Conventions For Procedures}% +% Here are some of my preferences when writing procedures: +% \begin{itemize} +% +% \item +% I dislike defining a macro within another macro, especially when the +% pattern part is non-nil. +% You know, you are not saving much space in |mem| when you do this, +% right? +% You do save space in the hash table and the string pool, though. +% On the other hand, we are not dealing with small \TeX\ engines +% anymore; Team \LaTeX\ has made sure of this. +% +% \item +% If two or more macros have very similar replacement parts, consider +% layering. +% +% \item +% Macros may perform parsing, may maintain tokens or registers, or may +% set type (produce marks). I try to avoid combining the three functions +% in a single macro. +% +% \item +% When a procedure both does assignments and sets type, I try to have a +% clean separations between the two activities. Try to avoid: +% \begin{verbatim} +% \vskip10pt +% \parindent=0pt +% \leavevmode +% \end{verbatim} +% +% \item +% The Boolean calculus (cf. |\@ifx|) +% is very useful and produces code that executes nicely. +% Using it also helps avoid your having to debug problems where +% |\if...| and |\fi| are not properly balanced +% (a nightmare in case you didn't already experience it). +% +% \end{itemize} +% +% \subsection{Conventions For \LaTeX}% +% Team \LaTeX\ make certain recommendations in \file{clsguide.tex}. +% Ones that I particularly pay attention to are: +% \begin{itemize} +% +% \item +% For the sake of ``color safety'', +% use |\sbox| rather than |\setbox|, |\mbox| rather than |\hbox|, and +% |\parbox| or |minipage| rather than |\vbox|. +% +% \item +% Use |\newcommand| and |\newenvironment| to declare user-level commands +% and environments. Avoid the idiom |\def\foo|, |\def\endfoo| to define +% an environment. +% Ideally, all user-level markup could be extracted from the +% document class by grepping on |\newcommand| and |\newenvironment|. +% +% \item +% Prefer to use |\setlength| to assign registers. +% +% \end{itemize} +% I cannot help but notice that much of the code of \LaTeX\ itself fails +% to comply with many of the coding recommendations of Team \LaTeX. +% +% +% \section{Yet to do}% +% The following work is considered for the release of the \aastex\ 5.0 +% package: +% \begin{description} +% +% \item[dot accents] +% Augment |\dot| and |\ddot| with |\dddot| and |\ddddot|. +% +% \item[Posters] +% Andrea wants to do posters. Ref best practices list. Sample document? +% +% \item[BibTeX] +% Support for BibTeX-generated bibliographies. +% Not a problem if using |thebibliography| and |\bibitem|. +% Hoguvain and Berend have written a \file{astrobib.bst}. +% +% \item[Landscape tables] +% Automatically rotate landscape tables if supported by output device. +% User may specify \cmd\rotate in the preamble of |deluxetable|. +% Works for any DVI translator targetting a PostScript printer. +% +% This command will be used in the pseudopreamble of deluxetable to create +% a turnpage (broadside) table in the midst of an upright (portrait) article. +% Implementation will be dependent on authors having a PostScript print engine. +% +% The |\rotate| command is implemented syntactically, but not semantically. +% +% \item[Two-column preprint formatting] +% Automatically put text in 2-col, appendices in 1-col, references in +% 2-col, obviating the user's need to insert markup. Done. +% +% If using native \LaTeX, all float types are supported, columns are not +% balanced, and the page ends. +% +% If using |multicol|, only full-page floats are supported, columns +% balance, and pages do not break. +% +% \item[Table autoplacement] +% Possibly support automatically placing tables as follows: +% less than 20pc width---single column, +% up to 44pc width---full width, +% over 44pc width---landscape. +% +% \item[tighten] +% Class option |tighten| and commands |\doublespace|, |\singlespace| are noops in +% |manuscript| substyle. In others, what should be done? +% +% \item[documentstyle] +% What should happen to a compatibility mode document? +% Wouldn't we have to support the exact same document style options? +% +% \item[substyle names] +% Should we keep the old names or use the new ones? +% +% \item[FIXME] +% Resolve all the remaining notes. +% +% \item[Line lengths] +% Source lines should be no loonger than 72 characters. Done. +% But re-check. +% +% \item[Testing] +% In particular, the |\@ptabularcr| code is new, +% but I have done some testing. +% +% \item[Distribution] +% Why not make this class a supported \LaTeX\ oackage? +% It would go in: |CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/supported|. +% +% \item[Macro names verbatim] +% Use |\cmd{\foo}| when the control sequence name +% appears in a moving argument. +% Use |\cs{foo}| when the name involves non-alpha characters. +% +% \item[Changes from 4.0] +% It would be good to have a section in the users guide +% called ``Changes from 4.0''. +% Summarizing +% the new markup commands, +% the removed markup commands, +% any alteration in formatting, +% etc. +% +% \item[Deprecated features list] +% To add to user documentation. +% +% \item[ltxdoc stuff] +% |\begin{environment}|, |\generate| +% +% \item[Best practices list] +% To add to user documentation. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item How to code celestial coordinates. +% \item How to specify object names (+,-). +% \item How to include figures. +% \item How to rotate tables. +% \item |\ge|, |\le| exist---use them! +% \item Don't include gigantic macro lists---please include only the ones you actually use. +% \item |\newcommand| is recommended; please avoid |\def|. +% \item Ionization potentials? +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item +% Natbib commands in user guide. +% +% \end{description} +% +% \section{Recently Done}% +% +% \begin{description} +% +% \item +% We have to say proactively that plano tables aren't accepted anymore, +% and not just remove those words from the AASTeX user guide. +% That's why the |apjpt| and |aj_pt| substyles are removed from v4.1. +% Done 9113. +% +% \item +% \cmd\SGMLcite. (CB): Deprecated in favor of <TT>\cite*. Unimplemented. +% \item +% \cmd\slantfrac reimplemented with \cmd\case. Done 9113. +% +% \item[Deprecate commands] +% Deprecate |\nl|, |\nextline|, |\tablevspace|, and |\tablebreak|. Done 9113. +% +% \item[URL commands] +% Functionality covered by |hyperref| package. +% Syntax: |\anchor|\arg{HREF}\arg{text}. +% Syntax: |\url|\oarg{URL-specification}\arg{text}. +% Syntax: |\email|\arg{address}. +% Ref: \file{url.sty} in |/contrib/other/misc|. \file{hyperref.sty} in |/contrib/supported/hyperref|. +% Done 9113. +% +% \item[Celestial objects] +% Syntax: |\objectname|\oarg{catalogID}\arg{text}. Done 9113. +% +% \item[\texttt{slantfrac}] +% \texttt{slantfrac} to be deprecated. |\onehalf| and friends to be +% implemented with |\frac|. Done 9113. +% +% \item[Extensions to \texttt{cite}] +% Support multiple citations in natural language. Ref email from Anton. Done with |natbib|. +% +% \item[\texttt{natbib}] +% I incorporated |natbib| into \aastex\ as a vehicle for the expanded +% citation functionality. |natbib| seems the right choice because +% it is a part of |latex/contrib/supported|, is well thought out and implemented +% and because it provided more than enough functionality, albeit +% via different syntax. +% +% \item[\texttt{amsmath}] +% The |amsmath| package is the successor to the \LaTeX2.09 |amssymb| package. +% I have incorporated it into \aastex\ (that is, it is automatically loaded), +% making it a constant part of \aastex\ rather than an option. +% +% The |amsmath| package is a part of |latex/packages/|, so it is an +% ``annointed'' package---much more blessed than even the +% |latex/contrib/supported| stuff. I have no hesitation about +% mandating its use. +% +% \item[Unknown Symbols] +% The following control sequence names cause \LaTeX\ to complain: +% |\lhd|, |\rhd|, |\unlhd|, |\unrhd|, |\sqsubset|, |\sqsupset|, +% |\Join|, |\leadsto|, |\Box|, |\Diamond|, |\mho|. +% The message seen is: +% \begin{verbatim} +% ! LaTeX Error: Command \lhd not provided in base LaTeX2e. +% \end{verbatim} +% This problem is now fixed (9113). +% +% \item[UCPress administrative markup] +% Syntax: \cmd\journal\arg{ID}, \cmd\SGML\arg{text}, \cmd\SGMLentity\arg{text}. +% No production. Not documented in user guide. Done 9113. +% +% \item[Evan's Markup] +% Done 9113. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \cmd\journal\arg{ApJ}, +% \cmd\articleID\arg{number}, +% \cmd\volno\arg{number}\arg{issue}. +% \item +% \cmd\journalID\arg{number} +% \item +% \cmd\url\oarg[URL]\arg{text or URL} +% \item +% \cmd\corpauth\arg{name} appears in arg of |\author|. +% \item +% \cmd\SGML\arg{text} +% \item +% \cmd\clc\arg{text} goes to \cmd\SGMLclc\arg{text} +% \item +% \cmd\SGMLentity\arg{text} +% \item +% \cmd\SGMLbi\arg{text} +% \item +% \cmd\SGMLbsc\arg{text} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[Email] +% Syntax: \cmd\email\arg{address}. +% +% \item[\cs{objectname}] +% \cmd\objectname\oarg{catalog id}\arg{text} +% +% \item[Evan's Points] +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \cmd\shorttitle\arg{text} and \cmd\shortauthors\arg{text} +% instead of |\lefthead| and |\righthead|. Done. +% \item +% \cmd\anchor is \cmd\url +% \item +% No plates anymore. +% \item +% Turnpage figures are a requirement. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \end{description} +% +% \section{User Documentation and Sample Documents}% +% User documentation for \aastex\ is the file \file{aasguide.tex}, +% generated by the {\sc docstrip} module following this section. +% +% Note: +% This file requires the \file{aastex.cls} document class itself, +% thereby lengthening the bootstrap process. +% The requirement enters in the section documenting +% the text entities defined by the class (see key |spec.symbols|). +% +% Sample files for this distribution of \aastex\ include +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% |sample.tex| is an \aastex\ tutorial paper with a fairly complete +% set of markup. +% \item +% \item +% |table.tex| is a sample \aastex\ table with complex column headings. +% \end{itemize}% +% +% Since the user documentation and sample files are not heavily commented, +% there is little utility in displaying them in the programmer documentation, +% therefore, I bring the class doc to an end here. +% +% \Finale +% %Here ends the programmer's documentation. +% \endinput +% +% User documentation module +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*guide> +\documentclass[preprint2]{aastex}% +\makeindex +% +\hyphenation{com-pu-scripts} +\newcommand\aastex{AAS\TeX}% +\newcommand\aastexhome{http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/AAS/AASTeX}% +% +\makeatletter +\renewenvironment{theindex} + {\if@twocolumn + \@restonecolfalse + \else + \@restonecoltrue + \fi + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35\p@ + \twocolumn[\section{\indexname}]% +% \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% +% {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem} + {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi} +\makeatother +% +\makeatletter % This code stolen from ltxguide.cls: +% Some hacks with verbatim... NB: this would be better done with the +% verbatim package, but this document has to run on any LaTeX +% installation. + +\let\o@verbatim\verbatim +\def\verbatim{% + \ifhmode\unskip\par\fi +% \nopagebreak % Overridden by list penalty + \ifx\@currsize\normalsize + \small + \fi + \o@verbatim +} + +% Here we extend the font-setting command to include making <> active +% (ie adjusting the input encoding). +\renewcommand \verbatim@font {% + \normalfont \ttfamily + \catcode`\<=\active + \catcode`\>=\active +} + +% Make |...| a synonym for \verb|...|. +\RequirePackage{shortvrb} +\MakeShortVerb{\|} + + +% Make active <...> produce italics surrounded by angle brackets +% (used in verbatim and \verb). +% << produces a less-than, and >> produces a greater-than. + +\begingroup + \catcode`\<=\active + \catcode`\>=\active + \gdef<{\@ifnextchar<\@lt\@meta} + \gdef>{\@ifnextchar>\@gt\@gtr@err} + \gdef\@meta#1>{\m{#1}} + \gdef\@lt<{\char`\<} + \gdef\@gt>{\char`\>} +\endgroup +\def\@gtr@err{% + \ClassError{ltxguide}{% + Isolated \protect>% + }{% + In this document class, \protect<...\protect> + is used to indicate a parameter.\MessageBreak + I've just found a \protect> on its own. + Perhaps you meant to type \protect>\protect>? + }% +} +\def\verbatim@nolig@list{\do\`\do\,\do\'\do\-} + +% Various forms of argument: + +\newcommand{\m}[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it #1\/$\rangle$}} +\renewcommand{\arg}[1]{{\tt\string{}\m{#1}{\tt\string}}} +\newcommand{\oarg}[1]{{\tt[%] +}\m{#1}{\tt%[ +]}} +\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}} +\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax} +\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} +\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% + + % end of code stolen from ltxguide.cls. Thanks, Alan. + + % code stolen from doc.dtx: +\def\GetFileInfo#1{% + \def\filename{#1}% + \def\@tempb##1 ##2 ##3\relax##4\relax{% + \def\filedate{##1}% + \def\fileversion{##2}% + \def\fileinfo{##3}}% + \edef\@tempa{\csname ver@#1\endcsname}% + \expandafter\@tempb\@tempa\relax? ? \relax\relax} + + % end of code stolen from doc.dtx. Thanks FMi. +\makeatother +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Title block of user guide. +% \begin{macrocode} +\title{% + The \aastex\ \LaTeXe\ Macros\\for Manuscript Preparation +}% + +%\author{Chris Biemesderfer} +%\affil{Seagoat Consulting} + +%\author{Revised by Jeannette Barnes, May 1995} +%\affil{American Astronomical Society} +%\affil{NOAO, P.O. Box 26732, Tucson, AZ 85726} + +%\author{Revised for \fileversion\ by Arthur Ogawa, \filedate} +%\affil{\TeX\ Consultants} +%\email{ogawa@teleport.com} + +\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.tex}% + +%\date{\filedate, \fileversion} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle +\tableofcontents +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Introduction +% \begin{macrocode} +\section{Introduction} + +The American Astronomical Society (AAS) has developed a markup package to assist authors in preparing manuscripts intended for submission to AAS-affiliated journals, as well as to other journals that will accept \aastex\ manuscripts. + +The most important aspect of the \aastex\ +package is that it defines the set of commands, or markup, +that can be used to identify the structural elements of papers. +When articles are marked up using this set of standard commands, +they may then be submitted electronically to the editorial +offices and fed into the electronic production of the journals. + +This guide contains basic instructions for creating +manuscripts using the \aastex\ markup package. +Authors are expected to be familiar with the editorial +requirements of the journals so that they can make +appropriate submissions; they should also have a basic +knowledge of \LaTeX---for instance, knowing +how to set up equations using \LaTeX\ commands. +A number of useful publications about \LaTeX\ (and \TeX) are listed in +the reference section of this guide. + +{\em Authors who wish to submit papers electronically to the ApJ, AJ, or PASP are strongly encouraged use the \aastex\ markup package as described in this guide.} + +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Package context +% \begin{macrocode} + +\section{\aastex\ Article Markup} + +This section describes the commands in the \aastex\ +package that an author might enter in a manuscript that is being +prepared for electronic submission to one of the journals. +The commands will be described in roughly the same order as they +would appear in a manuscript. +The reader will also find it helpful to examine the +sample files that are distributed with the package and to consult the +information available on the AASTeX Web site located at \aastexhome. +Authors are also reminded to review the instructions to authors and electronic +submissions guidelines for the specific journals to which they submit +their papers. + +\subsection{Preamble}\label{sec-preamble} + +In \LaTeX\ manuscripts, the preamble is that portion of the file before +the \verb"\begin{document}" command. + +\subsubsection{Getting Started} + +The first piece of markup in the manuscript declares the +overall style of the document. Any commands that appear before this +markup will be ignored. +\begin{quote}\index{documentclass@\verb`\documentclass`} +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass{aastex} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +This specifies the document class as \texttt{aastex} with the +default style (|manuscript|). +The paper copy produced by this style file will be double spaced. +Any tables included in the main body of the manuscript will also be +double spaced. + +Other substyles are available. They are discussed in \S~\ref{styles}. + +\subsubsection{Defining New Commands} + +\aastex\ allows authors to define their own commands with +\LaTeX's \verb"\newcommand". +(Authors should not use the plain \TeX\ \verb"\def" command in +AAS journal submissions.) +Authors' \verb"\newcommand" definitions must be placed in the +document preamble. + +In general, author-defined commands that are +abbreviations or shorthands, for instance, +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand{\lte}{local thermodynamic + equilibrium} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +, are acceptable and can be easily handled +by journal offices and publishers during data conversion. +However, abbreviations that attempt to define new symbols by using +\LaTeX\ commands for repositioning text tend to +cause problems in the publication process and should be avoided. + +In particular, author-defined commands that use any of the commands +listed below are apt to cause problems during data conversion. +\begin{quote} +\verb"\hskip", \verb"\vskip", +\verb"\raise", \verb"\raisebox", +\verb"\lower", \verb"\rlap", +\verb"\kern", \verb"\lineskip", +\verb"\char", \verb"\mathchar", +\verb"\mathcode", \verb"\buildref", +\verb"\mathrel", \verb"\baselineskip" +\end{quote} +Consequently, authors are strongly discouraged from +using them. + +Extra symbols are defined for \aastex, +some specifically for an astronomical context, others more +broadly used in math and physics. +In particular, the AMS has additional symbol fonts that are +available in a standard \LaTeX\ package (\verb"amssymb"). +All of these symbols are depicted in the additional symbosl tables +supplied with the package and on the \aastex\ Web site. + +Before defining a new symbol command, +authors are advised to consult these tables to see whether the +symbol they need already exists. If it does, they should use the +corresponding markup command. +Authors should \emph{not} redefine existing command names. +When one of these commands is encountered in an electronic +manuscript submitted to a journal, an author's redefinition will +be ignored and the originally-defined command used. + +\subsubsection{Editorial Information} + +A number of markup commands are available for +editorial office use in recording the publication history +for each manuscript. +These commands should be used by +the editorial and production offices only. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\received{<receipt date>} +\revised{<revision date>} +\accepted{<acceptance date>} + +\ccc{<code>} +\cpright{<type>}{<year>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} + +Copyright information should be specified with the commands \verb"\cpright"\ +and \verb"\ccc". The type of copyright and the corresponding year +are given in \verb"\cpright". Valid copyright types are as follows. +\begin{quote} +\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{1.8in}} +\tt AAS & Copyright has been assigned to the AAS\\ +\tt ASP & Copyright has been assigned to the ASP\\ +\tt PD & The article is in the public domain\\ +\tt none & No copyright is claimed for the article +\end{tabular} +\end{quote} +The copyright type is case sensitive, so the type string must be +entered exactly as given above. + +The Copyright Clearing Center code may be given in the \verb"\ccc"\ +command. The code is taken as regular text, so any special characters, +notably ``\$,'' must be escaped as appropriate. + +\subsubsection{Short Comment on Title Page} + +Authors who wish to include a short remark on the title page, +such as the name and date of the journal to which an article +has been submitted, may do so with the following command. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\slugcomment{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +In the +\texttt{manuscript} style, +these comments appear on the title page after the title and authors; +in the +\texttt{preprint} style, +they are placed at the upper right corner +of the title page. + +\subsubsection{Running Heads}\label{shorthead} + +Authors are invited to supply running head information using the +following commands. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\shorttitle{<text>} +\shortauthors{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +Two different kinds of data are generally supplied in running heads. +The left head contains an author list, (last +names, possibly truncated as ``et al.''), while the right head +is an abbreviated form of the paper title. This running head +information will not appear on the \LaTeX-printed page but will be +passed through to copy editing staff +for inclusion in the published version. + +Editors and publishers impose varying requirements +on the brevity of these data. A good rule of thumb is to limit the list +of authors to three or else use ``et al.,'' and to limit the +short form of the title to 40--45 characters. +The editors may choose to modify the author-supplied +running heads. + +\subsection{Starting the Main Body} + +The preamble is a control section. +None of the markup that appears in the preamble +actually typesets anything. The author must include a +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{document} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +command to identify the beginning of the main, typeset +portion of the manuscript. + +\subsection{Title and Author Information} + +Authors should use the +\verb"\title"\ + and \verb"\author"\ commands to specify title +and author information and the \verb"\affil" command +to indicate the author's primary affiliation. +Each \verb"\author"\ + command +should be followed by a corresponding \verb"\affil"\ +and optional \verb"\email"\ command. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\title{<text>} +\author{<name(s)>} +\affil{<affiliation>} +\affil{<address>} +\email{<e-mail address>} +\and +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} + Line breaks may be inserted in the title +with the \verb"\\" command. (Long titles will +be broken automatically, so the \verb"\\" markup is not required.) +If the title is explicitly broken over several lines, the +preferred style for titles in AAS and ASP journals is the so-called +``inverted pyramid'' style. In this style, the longest line +is the first (or top) line, and each succeeding line is shorter. +The text of the title should be entered in mixed case; +it will be printed in upper case or mixed case according to +the style of the publication. +Footnotes are permissible in titles. Be careful to ensure that +alternate affiliations (see below) are properly numbered if a +footnote to the title is specified. + +Authors' names should be entered in mixed case. +Names that appear together in the author list for authors who +have the same primary affiliation should be specified in a single +\verb"\author"\ command. +Each author group should be followed by +an \verb"\affil"\ command giving the principle +affiliation of those authors. Physical and postal address information +for the specified institution may be included with \verb"\affil". +The address can be broken over several lines using the +\verb"\\" command to indicate +the line breaks. +Usually, however, postal information will fit on one line. +When there is more than one \verb"\author"\ command, the final +one should be preceded by the \verb"\and"\ command. + +Authors often have affiliations in addition to their principle employer. +These alternate affiliations may be specified with the \verb"\altaffilmark"\ + and \verb"\altaffiltext"\ + commands. +These behave like the \verb"\footnotemark"\ +and |\footnotetext| commands of \LaTeX\ except that they do not take +optional arguments. \verb"\altaffilmark"\ + is appended to authors' names in the \verb"\author"\ + list and generates superscript identification numbers. +The text for the individual alternate affiliations is generated by the +\verb"\altaffiltext"\ + command. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\altaffilmark{<key number(s)>} +\altaffiltext{<numerical key>}{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +It is up to the author to make sure that + each \m{key number} in his or her \verb"\altaffilmark"\ + matches the \m{numerical key} for +the corresponding \verb"\altaffiltext". + +When there is a lengthy author list, all author names may be +specified in a single \verb"\author"\ + command with affiliations +specified using the \verb"\altaffilmark"\ me\-chan\-ism. +In these cases, no \verb"\affil"\ + commands are used, and in print, the +affiliations would all be listed in a footnote block at the bottom +of the title page. + + +\subsection{Abstract} + +A paper's abstract should be marked with the +\texttt{abstract} environment. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{abstract} +<abstract text> +\end{abstract} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} + +If an author is using the \texttt{preprint2} style, and the abstract is too long to fit on the title page, the \texttt{longabstract} option may be used in the \texttt{documentclass} to break the abstract to a new page. + +\noindent +%\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[preprint2,longabstract]{aastex} +\end{verbatim} +%\end{quote} + +\noindent Note that authors should use the \texttt{longabstract} option only in \texttt{preprint2} mode and only when the abstract is too long to fit on the title page. + +\subsection{Keywords} + +Keywords, or subject headings, are accommodated +as a single piece of text. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\keywords{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +If authors supply keywords, they must be delimited by whatever +punctuation is required by the journal. +They should be specified in alphabetical order. +The \verb"\keywords"\ + command will print the proper leading text---``Keywords:,'' ``Subject headings:,'' etc.---according to journal style. + +\subsection{Comments to Editors} + +Authors may make notes or comments to the copy editor with the +\verb`\notetoeditor` command. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\notetoeditor{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +This command behaves like a +footnote. Output to the printed page is produced only in the +\texttt{manuscript} style. + +\subsection{Sections} + +\aastex\ supports four levels of section headings. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\section{<heading>} +\subsection{<heading>} +\subsubsection{<heading>} +\paragraph{<heading>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +Section headings should be given in upper case or mixed case, depending +on the style of the journal. +Note that these commands delimit sections by marking the +\emph{beginning} of each section; +there are no separate commands to mark the ends. + +\subsection{Figure and Table Placement} \label{place} + +When preparing a manuscript for submission to an AAS journal, figures and tables do not generally need to be ``placed'' in the text of the +document where an author would like them to appear but +rather may simply follow the main body of the text. +However, authors may indicate to the editors the preferred placement of +these items by use of the \verb"\place*" commands. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\placetable{<key>} +\placefigure{<key>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The \verb"\place*{"\m{key}\verb"}" commands are similar to the +\verb"\ref" + command in La\TeX\ +and require corresponding \verb"\label"\ + commands to link them to the +proper elements. + +When used in the +\texttt{manuscript} style, the \verb"\place*"\ commands will print a short +message to the editor about figure or table placement. +In the other styles, nothing is printed. + +\subsection{Acknowledgments} + +\aastex\ supports an +\verb"\acknowledgments"% +\index{acknowledgments@\verb`\acknowledgments`} section. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\acknowledgments + <acknowledgments text> +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +In the \aastex\ styles, acknowledgments are set off from the +conclusion of the body with vertical space. Note the acknowledgments +command takes no arguments. + +\subsection{Facilities} + +To help organizations obtain information on the effectiveness of their +telescopes, the AAS has created a group of keywords for telescope +facilities. Using a common set of keywords will make searches for +this information significantly easier and more accurate. +In addition, the use of facility +keywords will be useful for linking papers that utilize the +same telescopes together within the framework of the Virtual Observatory. +A facilities keyword list is available through a +link at the AASTeX Web page, \aastexhome. + +The facilities list should appear after the +acknowledgments section. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +Facilities: \facility{<facility ID>}, + \facility{<facility ID>}, + \facility{<facility ID>}, ... +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +As part of the {\it facility ID} argument, +the author may also include +the name of the instrument in parentheses, e.g. +|\facility{HST(WFPC2)}| or |\facility{MMT(Blue channel spectrograph)}|. +There is no limit to the number of facility keywords +that may be included in a paper. + +\subsection{Appendices} + +When one or more appendices are needed in a paper, the point where the +main body text ends and the appendix begins should be marked +with the \verb"\appendix"\ + command. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\section{<body section>} +\appendix +\section{<appendix section>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The \verb"\appendix"\ + command takes care of a number of internal +housekeeping concerns, such as identifying sections with letters +instead of numerals, and resetting the equation counter. +Note that the \verb"\appendix"\ + command takes no arguments. +Sections in the appendix should be headed with \verb"\section"\ + commands. + +\subsection{Equations} + +Display equations can be typeset in \LaTeX\ in a number of ways. +The following three are probably of greatest use in AASTeX. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{displaymath} +\end{displaymath} + +\begin{equation} +\end{equation} + +\begin{eqnarray} +\end{eqnarray} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The +\texttt{displaymath} environment +will break out a single, +unnumbered formula. The \texttt{equation} environment does the same +thing except that the equation is +autonumbered by \LaTeX. +To set several formul\ae\ in which vertical alignment +is required, or to display a long equation across multiple lines, use the +\texttt{eqnarray} environment. Each line of the \texttt{eqnarray} +will be numbered +unless a \verb"\nonumber"\ + command is inserted +before the equation line delimiter +(\verb"\\"). +\LaTeX's equation counter is \emph{not} incremented when +\verb"\nonumber"\ + is used. + +Authors may occasionally wish to group related equations together and +identify them with letters appended to the equation number. +When this is desired, such related equations should still be set +in \texttt{equation} or \texttt{eqnarray} environments, whichever is +appropriate, and then grouped within +the \texttt{mathletters} environment. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{mathletters} +<equation> or <eqnarray> +\end{mathletters} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} + +It is possible to override \LaTeX's automatic numbering within the +\texttt{equation} or \texttt{eqnarray} environments using +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\eqnum{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +When \verb"\eqnum"\ + is specified inside an \texttt{equation} environment +or on a particular equation within an \texttt{eqnarray}, the text +supplied as an argument to \verb"\eqnum"\ + is used as the equation +identifier. +\LaTeX's equation counter is \emph{not} incremented when \verb"\eqnum"\ + is used. +\verb"\eqnum"\ + must be used \emph{inside} the math environment. + +If, as a consequence of the use of \verb"\eqnum"\ + or \verb"\nonumber", +\LaTeX's equation counter gets out of synch with the author's +intended sequence, +the counter may be reset to a particular value. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\setcounter{equation}{<number>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The equation counter should be set to the number corresponding to the +last equation that was formatted; therefore, it is most appropriate for this +command to appear immediately after an \texttt{equation} or +\texttt{eqnarray} environment. +The command must be used +\emph{outside} the math environments. + +The \texttt{eqsecnum} style file can also be used to modify the way equations +are numbered. See \S~\ref{styles} for details. + +\subsection{Citations and Bibliography} \label{bibliography} + +Two options are available for marking citations +and formatting reference lists: the standard \LaTeX\ \verb"thebibliography"\ +environment, and the \aastex\ \verb"references"\ environment. +Authors are strongly encouraged to use \verb"thebibliography"\ +in their electronic submissions. + +Please note that the bibliographic data supplied by the author in +the reference list must conform to the standards of the journal. +Many of the journals that +accept \aastex\ agreed to reduce typographic overhead, bold, italic, etc., +in reference lists \citep{Abt90}, and the AAS +has elected not to burden authors with tedious markup commands +to delimit the bibliographic fields. Instead, citations will be +typeset in roman with no size or style changes. +It is the responsibility of the author to +arrange the required bibliographic fields in the +proper order with the correct punctuation, according to journal +style. + +\subsubsection{The {\tt thebibliography} Environment} \label{bib} + +The preferred method for reference management is to use \LaTeX's +\texttt{thebibliography} environment, marking citations in the body +of the paper with +\verb"\citep"\ or \verb"\citet"\ +and associating references with them using \verb"\bibitem". +The \verb"\cite"-\verb"\bibitem"\ +mechanism associates citations and references symbolically +while maintaining proper citation syntax within the paper. +In the \verb"\bibitem"\ +command, the author should specify citation data inside +square brackets and a citation key in curly braces +for each reference. (The |\bibitem| command is described +in detail in the next section.) + +\noindent +%\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} + \begin{thebibliography}{<dummy>} + \bibitem[<cite data>]{<key>} <bibliographic data> + . + . + \end{thebibliography} +\end{verbatim} +%\end{quote} + +\noindent Note that the argument \m{dummy} to the start command of the +environment is not +used in the \aastex\ package, but it is included to be consistent with the +syntax of standard \LaTeX. It is acceptable to simply insert an +empty pair of curly braces at the end of the \verb"\begin{thebibliography}"\ +command. + +\subsubsection{Specifying Bibliographic and Citation Information}\label{spec-bib-data} + +\aastex\ uses the |natbib| package \citep{Daly98} for +citation management. +The |natbib| package re-implements \LaTeX's |\cite| command, +offering greater flexibility for managing citations in the +author-year form. + +When using |natbib|, bibliographic data are defined +in |\bibitem| commands. + +\noindent +%\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} + \bibitem[<author>(<year>)]{<key>} + <bibliographic data> +\end{verbatim} +%\end{quote} + +\noindent +The square-bracketed argument of the |\bibitem| +contains the \m{author} portion of the citation +followed by the \m{year} set off in parentheses. +The parentheses are important---|natbib| uses them to +determine the year portion of the citation---so be sure to +include them. +The argument \m{key} in curly braces is the code name +by which the citation is referenced in the text. + +When placing citations in the text, the author should use +either a |\citep| or a |\citet| command. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\citep{<key(s)>} +\citet{<key(s)>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The |\citep| command produces a citation that is entirely +set off by parentheses, e.g.\ ``(Cox 1995),'' while |\citet| permits +the author's name to form part of the text, e.g.\ ``Cox (1995).'' +The plain \LaTeX\ |\cite| command behaves like |\citet|. + +The citation \m{key} must correspond to the \m{key} in a |\bibitem| command. +During processing, information from the square-bracketed argument of the +key's |\bibitem| is inserted in +the text at the location of the \verb"\cite"\ command. +Multiple citation keys are separated by commas, e.g., +|\citep|\allowbreak +|{knuth84,|\allowbreak +|cox95,|\allowbreak +|lamport94}|. + +|\citep| and |\citet| each take optional arguments that specify +extra text to be appended to the citation label. Text in the first +set of square brackets will appear before the cite while +text in the second set will appear after it. +For instance, |\citep[chap. 2]{jon90}| +would produce the citation ``(Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2),'' +|\citep[see][]{jon90}| would produce ``(see Jones et al, 1990),'' and +|\citep[see][chap. 2]|\allowbreak|{jon90}| would print +``(see Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2).'' +In addition, the * form of the +cite commands will print the full author list instead of the +abbreviated form. + +The syntax discussed above should be sufficient for the +vast majority of cases; however, \aastex\ +does use the full |natbib| implementation, so many more +syntax options are available. For details on +the full range of |natbib| citation options, see the section +on using |natbib| on the \aastex\ Web +site and the |natbib| package documentation. + +It is not possible to use \verb"\bibitem" +within \aastex's \texttt{references} environment +(\S~\ref{refenv}), +nor will \verb"\cite"\ commands work properly in the main body +if \verb"\bibitem" commands are absent. + +\subsubsection{The {\tt references} Environment}\label{refenv} + +Some authors might prefer to enter citations directly +into the body of an article. If so, the |references| environment may be +used to format the reference list. The +\texttt{references} environment +simply sets off +the list of references and adjusts spacing parameters. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{references} +\reference{<key>} <bibliographic data> + . + . +\end{references} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} + +While the +\texttt{references} environment +remains supported in \aastex, +we anticipate that authors will prefer the stronger capabilities of +the standard \LaTeX\ |thebibliography| commands as extended by |natbib|. + +\subsubsection{Abbreviations for Journal Names} + +\aastex\ commands are available for many of the most--frequently-referenced +journals so that authors may use the markup rather than having +to look up a particular journal's abbreviation. +In principle, all the journals should be using the +same abbreviations, but it is fair to anticipate some changes in +the specific abbreviations before a system is finally settled on. +If authors use the journal macros, they need not worry about +changes to journal style governing abbreviations in citations. +A listing of the current abbreviation macros appears +in Table~\ref{journame}. +\begin{table} +\footnotesize +\begin{center} +\caption{Abbreviations for Journal Names}\label{journame} +\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{2.5in}} +\verb"\araa" & Annual Review of Astronomy and Astrophysics\\ +\verb"\actaa" & Acta Astronomica\\ +\verb"\ao" & Applied Optics\\ +\verb"\aj" & Astronomical Journal\\ +\verb"\azh" & Astronomicheskii Zhurnal\\ +\verb"\aap" & Astronomy and Astrophysics\\ +\verb"\aapr" & Astronomy and Astrophysics Reviews\\ +\verb"\apj" & Astrophysical Journal\\ +\verb"\apjl" & \rule[.5ex]{2em}{.4pt}, Letters to the Editor\\ +\verb"\apjs" & \rule[.5ex]{2em}{.4pt}, Supplement Series\\ +\verb"\aplett" & Astrophysics Letters and Communications\\ +\verb"\apspr" & Astrophysics Space Physics Research\\ +\verb"\apss" & Astrophysics and Space Science\\ +\verb"\aaps" & \rule[.5ex]{2em}{.4pt}, Supplement Series\\ +\verb"\baas" & Bulletin of the AAS\\ +\verb"\bain" & Bulletin Astronomical Inst. Netherlands\\ +\verb"\caa" & Chinese Astronomy and Astrophysics\\ +\verb"\cjaa" & Chinese Journal of Astronomy and Astrophysics\\ +\verb"\fcp" & Fundamental Cosmic Physics\\ +\verb"\gca" & Geochimica Cosmochimica Acta\\ +\verb"\grl" & Geophysics Research Letters\\ +\verb"\iaucirc" & IAU Circular\\ +\verb"\icarus" & Icarus\\ +\verb"\jcp" & Journal of Chemical Physics\\ +\verb"\jgr" & Journal of Geophysical Research\\ +\verb"\jcap" & Journal of Cosmology and Astroparticle Physics\\ +\verb"\jqsrt" & Journal of Quantitative Specstroscopy and Radiative Transfer\\ +\verb"\jrasc" & Journal of the RAS of Canada\\ +\verb"\memras" & Memoirs of the RAS\\ +\verb"\memsai" & Mem. Societa Astronomica Italiana\\ +\verb"\mnras" & Monthly Notices of the RAS\\ +\verb"\na" & New Astronomy\\ +\verb"\nar" & New Astronomy Review\\ +\verb"\nat" & Nature\\ +\verb"\nphysa" & Nuclear Physics A\\ +\verb"\physscr" & Physica Scripta\\ +\verb"\pra" & Physical Review A\\ +\verb"\prb" & Physical Review B\\ +\verb"\prc" & Physical Review C\\ +\verb"\prd" & Physical Review D\\ +\verb"\pre" & Physical Review E\\ +\verb"\prl" & Physical Review Letters\\ +\verb"\physrep" & Physics Reports\\ +\verb"\planss" & Planetary Space Science\\ +\verb"\procspie" & Proceedings of the SPIE\\ +\verb"\pasa" & Publications of the ASA\\ +\verb"\pasj" & Publications of the ASJ\\ +\verb"\pasp" & Publications of the ASP\\ +\verb"\qjras" & Quarterly Journal of the RAS\\ +\verb"\rmxaa" & Revista Mexicana de Astronomia y Astrofisica \\ +\verb"\skytel" & Sky and Telescope\\ +\verb"\solphys" & Solar Physics\\ +\verb"\ssr" & Space Science Reviews\\ +\verb"\sovast" & Soviet Astronomy\\ +\verb"\zap" & Zeitschrift fuer Astrophysik\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\subsection{Figures} + +\subsubsection{Electronic Art} + +If an author wishes +to embed graphics in a manuscript, it is necessary that +the graphics files conform +to the Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) standard \citep{PLRM}. The +author must also have an appropriate DVI translator, +one that targets PostScript output devices. (Detailed information +on preparing and submitting electronic art is +available in the submissions instructions for the journals.) + +Several commands are available for including EPS files +in \aastex\ manuscripts. They should be placed within the + \texttt{figure} environment. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{figure} +\figurenum{<text>} +\epsscale{<num>} +\plotone{<epsfile>} +\plottwo{<epsfile>}{<epsfile>} +\caption{<text>} +\end{figure} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +When \verb"\figurenum" is specified inside the {\tt figure} environment, +the text supplied as an argument to \verb"\figurenum" will be used as the +figure identifier. +\LaTeX's figure counter is \emph{not} incremented when \verb"\figurenum" +is used. +\verb"\figurenum" must be used \emph{inside} the {\tt figure} environment. + +\verb"\plotone" inserts the graphic in the named EPS file, +scaled so that the horizontal +dimension fits the width of the body text; +the vertical dimension is scaled to maintain the aspect ratio. +\verb"\plottwo" inserts two plots next to each other. +Scale factors are determined automatically from information in the +EPS file. + +The automatic scaling may be overridden with the command +\verb"\epsscale{<num>}", where \m{num} is a scaling factor + in decimal units, e.g., 0.80. + +The |\plotone| and |\plottwo| +macros are invocations of the |graphicx| +|\includegraphics| command. In most instances, using +|\plotone| or |\plottwo| should work for placing +figures in \aastex\ documents. However, if more +flexibility is needed, the |\includegraphics| command +may be invoked directly. For instance, to rotate +an image by 90 degrees, use +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\includegraphics[angle=90]{<epsfile>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +See the |graphicx| package documentation or the \aastex\ Web site for a +complete list of the available arguments to |\includegraphics|. + +Authors are strongly encouraged to use |\plotone|, |\plottwo|, or |\includegraphics| to place their EPS figures. However, as of the current release, the old |\plotfiddle| macro from v4.0 has been reintroduced and may be used if the desired figure placement cannot be achieved with one of the methods above. The syntax of the command is +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\plotfiddle{<epsfile>}{<vsize>}{<rot>}{<hsf>} + {<vsf>}{<htrans>}{<vtrans>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +where the arguments are +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{2in}} +\tt epsfile & name of the EPS file \\ +\tt vsize & vertical white space to allow for plot (\LaTeX\ dimension)\\ +\tt rot & rotation angle (degrees)\\ +\tt hsf & horizontal width of scaled figure (PS points)\\ +\tt vsf & vertical height of scaled figure (PS points)\\ +\tt htrans & horizontal translation (PS points)\\ +\tt vtrans & vertical translation (PS points)\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +PostScript points are 1/72 inches, so an \m{htrans} of 72 moves +the graphic 1 inch to the right. Note that the \m{vtrans} argument is +discarded in the reimplented macro and is included only for +backward compatibility with \aastex\ v4.0. + +\subsubsection{Figure Captions} \label{legends} + +Regardless of whether an author includes electronic art in a manuscript, figure captions, or legends, should be provided. If art is included in the document, use the \verb"\caption"\ command within the \texttt{figure} environment. If electronic art is not included, figure captions may be grouped together at the end of the document using \verb"\figcaption". +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\figcaption[<filename>]{<text>\label{<key>}} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The optional argument, \m{filename}, can be used to iden\-ti\-fy +the file for the corresponding figure; +\m{text} refers to the caption for that figure. The author +may provide a \verb"\label"\ with a unique \m{key} for cross-referencing +purposes. + +When the \verb"\figcaption"\ command is used, the figure +identification label, +e.g., ``Figure 1,'' is generated automatically by the command itself, so +there is no need to key this information. + There is an upper limit of seven figure captions per page. +Footnotes are \emph{not} supported for figures. + +\subsection{Tables} \label{tables} + +There is support in the \aastex\ package for tables via two mechanisms: +\LaTeX's standard \texttt{table} environment, +and the +\texttt{deluxetable} environment, which allows for the formatting +of lengthy tabular material. Tables may be +marked up using either mechanism, although use of +\texttt{deluxetable} is preferred. +Authors should \emph{not} use the \LaTeX\ +\texttt{tabbing} environment when preparing electronic +submissions. + +\subsubsection{The \texttt{deluxetable} Environment} \label{dte} + +Authors are encouraged to use the +\texttt{deluxetable} environment to format their tables since it automatically +handles many formatting tasks, including table numbering and insertion +of horizontal rules. It also provides mechanisms for breaking tables and +controlling width and vertical spacing that are unavailable in the \LaTeX\ +\texttt{tabular} environment. + +The \texttt{deluxetable} environment +is delimited by \LaTeX's familiar +\verb"\begin"\ and \verb"\end"\ constructs. +The content consists of preamble commands and table data, +the latter delimited by \verb"\startdata"\ + and \verb"\enddata". +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{deluxetable}{<cols>} +<preamble commands> +\startdata +<table data> +\enddata +\end{deluxetable} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The argument \m{cols} specifies the justification for each col\-umn. +An alignment token, ``l,'' ``c,'' or ``r,'' is given for each column, +indicating flush left, centered, or flush right. + +\subsubsection{Preamble to the \texttt{deluxetable}}% + +There are several commands in the +\texttt{deluxetable} environment +that +must be given in the preamble. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\tabletypesize{<font size command>} +\rotate +\tablewidth{<dimen>} +\tablenum{<text>} +\tablecolumns{<num>} +\tablecaption{<text>\label{<key>}} +\tablehead{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} + +If a table is too wide for the printed page, the font size of the table +can be cahnged with the \verb"\tabletypesize" command, which takes as +an argument one of the the font size change commands: +\verb"\small"\ + (11pt), \verb"\footnotesize"\ + (10pt), or +\verb"\scriptsize"\ + (8pt). + +To force a table to be set in landscape orientation, +use the \verb"\rotate"\ \label{cmd-rotate} command. Note that +most DVI previewers will not properly render rotated |deluxetable| +output, so in order to see what the table looks like, +it must be output to PostScript and viewed there. + +The width of a deluxetable is defined by \verb"\tablewidth". +If this command is omitted, the default width is the width of the page. +The table can be set to its natural width by specifying +a dimension of \verb"0pt". +Long tables may have a natural width that is +different for each page. The natural width for each page will be +printed to the log file during processing. +Authors may then use this log information to +define a fixed table width in order to give the +table a more uniform appearance across pages. + +It is possible to override \LaTeX's automatic numbering within the +\texttt{deluxetable} environment. +When \verb"\tablenum"\ + is specified inside a \texttt{deluxetable} +preamble, +the text supplied as an argument to \verb"\tablenum"\ + will be used as the +table identifier. +\LaTeX's equation counter is \emph{not} incremented when +\verb"\tablenum"\ + is used. + +The caption (actually, the title) of the table is specified +in \verb"\tablecaption". +The text of \verb"\tablecaption"\ + should be brief; +explanatory notes should be specified in the end notes to the table +(see \S \ref{tabendnotes} + below). If the caption +does not appear +centered above the table after processing, then specify the width of +the table explicitly with the \verb"\tablewidth"\ + command and rerun +\LaTeX\ on the file. If an author supplies a \verb"\label"\ for cross-referencing purposes, this, too, should be included in the \verb"\tablecaption". + +Column headings are specified with \verb"\tablehead". +Within the \verb"\tablehead", each column heading should be given +in a \verb"\colhead", which will ensure that the heading +is centered +on the natural width of the column. +There should be a heading for each column so that there are as +many \verb"\colhead"\ + commands in the \verb"\tablehead"\ + as there +are data columns. + +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\tablehead{ +\colhead{<heading>} & \colhead{<heading>}} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} + +If more complicated column headings are required, +any valid \texttt{tabular} command that constitutes a proper +head line in a \LaTeX\ table may be used. For example, the +|\multicolumn| command below would create a table head with +text centered over five columns. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\multicolumn{5}{c}{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +Consult \citet{Lamport} or \citet{Kopka99} for further details +on the available table commands. + +The \verb"\tablecolumns{"\m{num}\verb"}" command +is necessary if an author has +multi-line column headings produced by \verb"\tablehead"\ + or other \LaTeX\ +commands and is using either the \verb"\cutinhead"\ + or \verb"\sidehead"\ +markup (see below). The \m{num} argument should be +set to the true number of columns in the +table. The command must come before the \verb"\startdata"\ + command. + +%It is possible that a complicated table heading will overflow +%the vertical space allotted for the table heading. +%The fraction of the page allocated +%for the table heading may be changed with \verb"\tableheadfrac". +%The \m{num} argument to \verb"\tableheadfrac"\ +% should be the +%decimal fraction of the page used for heading information. +%The default value is 0.1, meaning that 10\% of the page height +%is reserved for the table heading. It should rarely be necessary +%to change this value. + +\subsubsection{Content of the \texttt{deluxetable}}% + +After the table title and column headings have been specified, +data rows can be entered. +Data rows are delimited with the \verb"\startdata"\ + and \verb"\enddata"\ commands. +The end of each row is indicated with the standard \LaTeX\ \verb"\\" command. +Data cells within a row are separated with \& (ampersand) characters. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\startdata +<data line>\\ +<cell>&<cell>&<cell>\\ +<more data lines>\\ +\enddata +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} + +Column alignment within the data columns can be adjusted with the \TeX\ +\verb"\phantom{"\m{string}\verb"}" command, +where \m{string} can be any character, e.g., \verb"\phantom{$\arcmin$}". +A blank character of width \m{string} is then inserted in the table. +Four commands have been predefined for this purpose. +\begin{quote} +\begin{tabular}{l@{\quad}p{2in}} +{\verb"\phn"% +} & {phantom numeral 0-9}\\ +{\verb"\phd"% +} & {phantom decimal point}\\ +{\verb"\phs"% +} & {phantom $\pm$ sign}\\ +{\verb"\phm{"\m{string}\verb"}"} & {generic phantom}\\ +\end{tabular} +\end{quote} + +Extra vertical space can be inserted between rows with an optional argument to the +\verb"\\" command. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\\[<dimen>] +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The argument is a dimension +and may be specified in any units that are legitimate in \LaTeX. + +In a table, it may happen that several rows of data are +associated with a single object or item. +Such logical groupings should not be broken across pages. +In these cases, the |\tablebreak| command may be used to force +a page break at the desired point. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +<table row>\\ +\tablebreak +<next table row>\\ +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +This command can be used any time that the default |deluxetable| page +breaks need to be overridden. + +Journals often require that table cells that contain no data +be explicitly marked. This is to differentiate such cells from +blank cells, which are frequently interpreted as implicitly +repeating the entry in the corresponding cell in the row preceding. +Table cells for which there are no data should contain +a \verb"\nodata"\ + command. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\nodata +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} + +Within the |deluxetable| body, two kinds of special heads are +allowed, |\cutinhead| and |\sidehead|. +A cut-in head is a piece of text centered across the width +of the table. It is spaced above and below +from the data rows that precede and +follow it and will appear set off by rules in the \LaTeX\ output. +Similarly, the command for a side head produces a row spanning +the width of the table but with the text left justified. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\cutinhead{<text>} +\sidehead{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} + +Table footnotes (more properly, table \emph{end notes}) +may also be used in the \texttt{deluxetable} environment. +Their use is described in detail in \S \ref{tabendnotes}. + +\subsubsection{The \texttt{table} Environment} + +Authors may also compose tables using the \texttt{table} environment. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{table} +\end{table} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The \texttt{table}\ environment +encloses not only the tabular +material but also any title or footnote information +associated with the table. + +Titles, or captions, for tables are indicated with a |\caption| +command +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\caption{<text>\label{<key>}} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +A table label, e.g. ``Table 2,'' is generated automatically +by \verb"\caption". + The author +may provide a \verb"\label"\ in the caption with a unique \m{key} +for cross-referencing +purposes. + +The table body should appear within the \texttt{tabular} environment. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{tabular}{<cols>} +\end{tabular} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The alignment tokens in \m{cols} specify the justification for each column. The letters ``l,'' ``c,'' or ``r'' is given for each column, +indicating left, center, or right justification. +Consult \citet{Lamport} for details about using +the +\texttt{tabular} environment +to prepare tables. + +Each \texttt{tabular} table must appear within a \texttt{table} +environment. There should be only one \texttt{tabular} table per +\texttt{table} +environment. +If the journal requests manuscripts with only one table per page, +the author may need to insert a \verb"\clearpage"\ + command after especially short tables. + +Use the |\tableline| command to insert horizontal rules in the +|tabular| environment. +\begin{quote} +\verb"\tableline" + \end{quote} +The use of vertical rules should be avoided. + +As with the \texttt{deluxetable} environment, it + is possible to override \LaTeX's automatic numbering within the +\texttt{table} environment using \verb"\tablenum". +\verb"\tablenum"\ + must be used \emph{inside} the \texttt{table} +environment. + +\subsubsection{Table End Notes} \label{tabendnotes} + +\aastex\ supports footnotes and end notes within tables; +this support applies to both the +\texttt{deluxetable} environment +and the standard \LaTeX\ \texttt{table} environment. + +Footnotes for tables are usually identified by lowercase letters +rather than numbers. Use the |\tablenotemark| and |\tablenotetext| +commands to supply table footnotes. +As with \verb"\altaffilmark" and \verb"\altaffiltext", a note label, +usually a letter, is required. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\tablenotemark{<key letter(s)>} +\tablenotetext{<alpha key>}{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The \m{key letter} of the |\tablenotemark| should be the same as the +\m{alpha key} for the corresponding \m{text}. +It is the responsibility of the author to make the correspondence +correct. + +Sometimes authors tabulate materials that have corresponding +references and may want to associate these references with the table. +Authors may also wish to append a short paragraph of explanatory +notes that pertain to the entire table. These elements should be +specified with the commands below. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\tablerefs{<reference list>} +\tablecomments{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The \verb"\tablenotetext", \verb"\tablecomments", and +\verb"\tablerefs" commands \emph{must} + be specified after the +\verb"\end{tabular}" or \verb"\enddata" and before +the closing \verb"\end{table}" or \verb"\end{deluxetable}". + +\subsection{Supplemental Materials} + +For many years now, authors have been taking advantage of the AAS journals' +ability to post supplemental materials with their papers in the electronic +editions. Even though each paper must stand on its own +scientifically without the supplements, these materials are reviewed in the +peer review process and should be included in initial manuscript +submissions. As with regular figures and tables, papers with online only +data must reference each electronic object in the main text +and include an explanation of what the reader will +find in the electronic edition. + +The four most popular types of supplemental materials are +machine-readable tables, online color figures, online-only figures, and +animations. Please see each journal's Web site for details on +what types of supplemental materials are acceptable, how to +submit these materials, author tools for preparing them, +and their associated costs. + +\subsubsection{Machine-readable Tables} + +Online-only tables submitted to AAS journals are converted +to a machine-readable +format for presentation in the electronic edition. +Machine-readable tables have two +parts: the formatted ASCII data and a metadata header that provides +format, units, and short explanations of each column of data. This +structure is designed to provide maximum flexibility and ease of use +for readers who wish to further manipulate the data with their own +computer programs or with software like Excel. + +For each machine-readable table, the author should include a short sample +version of the table in his or her \LaTeX\ submission. This sample version +will appear in the print edition as well as +in HTML in the electronic edition. The sample table should be +5 to 15 lines long. It should include a table note at the end + with text indicating that a machine-readable +version will be available in the electronic edition. For instance, +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\tablecomments{Table 1 is +published in its entirety in +the electronic edition of +the Astrophysical Journal. +A portion is shown here +for guidance regarding its +form and content.} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +Each example table must +be cited and numbered as if it were a fully printed table. + +\subsubsection{Online Color Figures} + +For some journals, authors may submit figures +that will appear in black and white in the +print edition of a journal but in color in the electronic edition. +In these cases, authors must submit separate black and white and RGB color +versions of each figure labelled according to the +file-naming conventions required for the publication. +For the benefit of print journal readers, figure captions should be written +with the color information placed inside parentheses, +for instance, ``The dotted +line (colored blue in electronic edition) +is the H$_o$ = 75 km s-1 Mpc-1 model,'' and should +include a note directing the reader to +``See the electronic edition of the Journal +for a color version of this figure.'' + +\subsubsection{Online-only Figures} + +This feature is mainly useful for articles that contain large compendia +of identification charts and other supplemental graphic material that need not +be printed in full in the paper journal. Online-only figures are intended to +provide supplemental information that is not critical to the scientific +content of the article but that might nonetheless be of interest to the reader. + +Online-only figures must be mentioned explicitly by number and appear +in correct numerical order in the body of the text. At least one figure +in a series must be displayed as an example figure for the print edition. +The caption should carry a message indicating that +more figures are available in the electronic edition---for instance, +``Plots for all sources are available in the electronic edition of the journal.'' +Enough information must be included in the figure caption for readers of the +print edition to determine what is contained in the online-only figures. + +\subsubsection{Animations} + +Currently, only animations in the MPEG format are accepted by the AAS journals. +Authors must supply a still frame from the animation in EPS format marked +up like a regular figure that will serve as an example for the reader. +They should include text in the caption for the +still frame indicating that an animation is +available electronically. For instance, +``This figure is also available as an mpeg +animation in the electronic edition of the {\it Astrophysical Journal}.'' +As with online-only figures, authors must include enough information in the +figure caption for readers of the print edition to determine what the +animation illustrates. + +\subsection{Miscellaneous} + +\subsubsection{Celestial Objects and Data Sets} + +Authors who wish to have the most important objects in their paper +linked to a data center in the electronic edition may do so using the +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\objectname[<catalog ID>]{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +macro, or its alias |\object|. +The text contained in the required argument +will be printed in the paper and will serve as a link anchor +in the electronic edition. The catalog ID +given as an optional argument will be carried through as the identification +key in the link to a data center. Note that links will only +be activated if the name provided in the argument is recognized by a +participating data center. It is the author's responsibility to use the +correct identifier. + +Similar markup is available for linking to data sets hosted +at participating data centers. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\dataset[<catalog ID>]{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +In the paper, the text in the required argument will be +printed while the the catalog ID value will be passed through to form +links to data centers. + +When an article contains |\object| or |\dataset| commands, the +publisher will be able to use the markup to +pass along a list of objects and data sets used in the +paper to database personnel. Software can then be used to construct links to +those databases. +Please check with each journal's Web site for instructions on how to +determine the object and data set identifiers, the location of +verifications tools, and information on where in the paper these +macros can best be used. + +\subsubsection{Ionic Species and Chemical Bonds} + +When discussing atomic species, ionization levels can be indicated +with the following command. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\ion{<element>}{<level>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The ionization state is specified as the second argument +and should be given as a numeral. +For example, ``\ion{Ca}{3}'' would be marked up as \verb"\ion{Ca}{3}". + +For single, double, and triple chemical bonds, use the following macros. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\sbond +\dbond +\tbond +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} + +\subsubsection{Fractions} + +\aastex\ contains commands that permit authors to specify alternate +forms for fractions. +\LaTeX\ will set fractions in displayed math as built-up fractions; +however, it is sometimes desirable to use case fractions in +displayed equations. +In such instances, one should use \verb"\case"\ +rather than \verb"\frac". Note, however, that authors submitting +manuscripts electronically to AAS journals +should generally find it unnecessary to use any markup other than the +standard \LaTeX\ \verb"\frac". + +\begin{center} +\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.4} +\begin{tabular}{@{}llc@{}} +Built-up & \verb"\frac{1}{2}" & $\displaystyle\frac{1}{2}$ \\ +Case & \verb"\case{1}{2}" & $\case{1}{2}$ \\ +Shilled & \verb"1/2" & $1/2$ \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} + +\subsubsection{Astronomical Symbols} + +As mentioned earlier, the \aastex\ package +contains a collection of assorted macros +for symbols and abbreviations specific to an astronomical context. +These are commonly useful and also somewhat difficult for authors +to produce themselves because fussy kerning is required. +See the symbols pages provided with the package distribution. +Most of these commands can be used in both running text and math. However, +\verb"\lesssim"\ and \verb"\gtrsim"\ can only be used in math mode. + +\subsubsection{Hypertext Constructs} + +The \verb"\anchor"\ \label{cmd-anchor} command is a general-purpose +hypertext link tag, associating \verb"<text>" in the manuscript with +the specified resource (\verb"<href>"). +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\anchor{<href>}{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +\verb"<href>"\ should be specified as a \emph{full} URI, including the +\verb"scheme:"\ designator (|http:|, |ftp:|, etc.). + +The \verb"\url" command supports the special case where an author +wishes to express a URL in the text. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\url{<text>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} + +The \verb"\email"\ command is used to identify e-mail addresses +anywhere in the manuscript. +The text of the argument is the e-mail address. +Please do \emph{not} prepend the \verb|mailto:| part. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\email{<address>} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +This command should be used to indicate authors' e-mail addresses +in author lists at the beginning of manuscripts. + +\subsection{Concluding the File} + +The last command in the electronic manuscript file should be the +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\end{document} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +command, which must appear after all the material in the paper. +This command directs the formatter to finish processing the manuscript. + +\section{Style Options} \label{styles} + +\subsection{Manuscript Style} + +The default style option is the |manuscript| style. This style will +produce double-spaced pages printed in a single column at the width +of the page. + +\subsection{Preprints} + +Two preprint styles are available. +The \texttt{preprint} style is similar to the |manuscript| style, +but it is single-spaced and fully justified. +The \texttt{preprint2} style produces a two-column preprint. + +\subsubsection{Single-column Preprint} + +A single-column preprint format may be specified with the +\texttt{preprint} style option. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[preprint]{aastex} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +The size of the typeface used is under author control by way of +\LaTeX's \m{nn}\texttt{pt} class options +(where \m{nn} is 10, 11, or 12). +Use of 10 point type is not recommended with the +\texttt{preprint} style. + +\subsubsection{Two-column Preprint} + +The +\texttt{preprint2} style +has the principle function of providing two-column formatting. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[preprint2]{aastex} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +It is important to remember +that text lines are considerably shorter when two columns are typeset +side by side on a page. Long equations, wide tables and figures, and +the like, may not typeset in this format without some adjustments. +The expenditure of great effort to adapt copy and markup for +two-column pages is counterproductive. +Remember that the main +goal of this package is to produce draft-, or referee-, format pages. +It is the responsibility of the editors and publishers to +produce publication-format papers for the journals. + +The \texttt{preprint2} style +sets the article's front matter---the title, author, abstract, +and keyword material---on a separate page at full text width. +The body of the article is set in a two-column page grid, +the appendices in a one-column page grid, +and the bibliography in a two-column page grid. +(This manual was prepared using the \texttt{preprint2} style.) + +The author may supply \LaTeX's \verb"\twocolumn"\ or |\onecolumn| +commands whenever desired. +Be aware, however, that using explicit column-switching commands can +cause formatting problems. + + + +\subsection{The {\tt eqsecnum} Style} + +The \texttt{eqsecnum} style file can be used to modify the way equations +are numbered. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[eqsecnum]{aastex} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +Normally, equations are numbered sequentially through the +entire paper, starting over at ``(A1)'' if there is an appendix. +If \texttt{eqsecnum} appears in the \texttt{documentclass} command, +equation num\-bers will be sequential through each section and will be +formatted ``({\it sec-eqn}),'' where ``{\it sec}'' is the current section number and +``{\it eqn}'' is the number of the equation within that section. + +\subsection{The {\tt flushrt} Style } + +A \verb"flushrt"\ style option is available for authors that prefer to +have their margins left and right justified. +\begin{quote} +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[eqsecnum,flushrt]{aastex} +\end{verbatim} +\end{quote} +Note the \texttt{preprint} and \texttt{preprint2} styles +are already flush right by default. + + +\section{Additional Documentation} \label{docs} + +The preceding explanation of the markup commands in the +\aastex\ package has merit for defining syntax, but many +authors will prefer to examine the sample papers that are +included with the style files. +The files of interest are described below. + +A comprehensive example employing nearly all of the capabilities +of the package (in terms of markup as well as formatting) +is in \verb"sample.tex". +This file is annotated with comments that describe +the purpose of most of the markup. +\verb"sample.tex"\ includes three tables: two marked up using the +\texttt{deluxetable} environment +and another table using the \LaTeX\ \texttt{table} +environment. + +In \verb"table.tex", a complex but short example of the +\texttt{deluxetable} environment +demonstrates some of the techniques +that can be used to generate complex column headings and to align +variable-width columns. +Here the \LaTeX\ \verb"\multicolumn" command is used to span a heading +over several columns. When \verb"\multicolumn" is used along with the +\verb"\cutinhead" command, the \verb"\tablecolumns" command must be used to specify +the number of columns in the table---otherwise the \verb"\cutinhead" command +will not work properly. +This table also makes use of the \verb"\phn" command to better align some of the +columns. + +This user guide (\verb"aasguide.tex") +is also marked up with the \aastex\ package, +although it is not exemplary as a scientific paper. + +Many of the markup commands described in the preceding +sections are standard \LaTeX\ commands. The reader who is +unfamiliar with their syntax is referred to the \LaTeX\ +references works cited in the bibliography, in particular +\citet{Kopka99} and \citet{Lamport}. + +Authors who wish to know the ins and outs of \TeX\ itself +should read the \emph{\TeX book} \citep{Knuth}. +This resource contains a good deal of information about +typography in general. Many details of mathematical typography are +discussed in \emph{Mathematics into Type} by \citet{Swanson}. + +\section{Acknowledgments} + +\aastex\ was designed and written by Chris Biemesderfer in 1988. +Substantial revisions were made by Lee Brotzman and Pierre +Landau when the package was updated to v4.0. +\aastex\ was rewritten as a \LaTeXe\ class by Arthur Ogawa +for the v5.0 release. It was updated to v5.2 by +SR Nova Private Ltd. +The documentation has benefited from revisions by +Jeannette Barnes, Sara Zimmerman, and Greg Schwartz. + +\begin{thebibliography}{} + +\bibitem[Abt(1990)]{Abt90} + Abt, H. 1990, \apj, 357, 1 (editorial) + +\bibitem[Adobe(1999)]{PLRM} + Adobe Systems, Inc. 1999, + \anchor{http://www.adobe.com/prodindex/postscript/} + {PostScript Language Reference Manual} (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley) + +\bibitem[Daly(1998)]{Daly98} + Daly, P. 1998, \emph{Natural Sciences Citations and References} + (\texttt{natbib} package documentation) + +\bibitem[Goossens, Mittelbach, and Samarin(1994)]{Goossens94} + Goossens, M., Mittelbach, F., and Samarin, A. 1994, + \emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion} (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley) + +\bibitem[Hahn(1993)]{Hahn93} + Hahn, J. 1993, \emph{\LaTeX\ for Everyone} + (Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall) + +\bibitem[Knuth(1984)]{Knuth} + Knuth, D. 1984, \emph{The \TeX book} (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley). + \newblock Revised to cover \TeX3, 1991. + +\bibitem[Kopka and Daly(1999)]{Kopka99} + Kopka, H. and Daly, P. 1999, \emph{A Guide to \LaTeX}, + 3rd edition, (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley) + +\bibitem[Lamport(1994)]{Lamport} + Lamport, L. 1994, \emph{\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System\/}, + 2nd edition, (Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley) + +\bibitem[Swanson(1979)]{Swanson} + Swanson, E. 1979, \emph{Mathematics into Type} + (Providence, RI: American Mathematical Society) + +\end{thebibliography} +\end{document} +% +%</guide> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Symbols module +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*symbols> +\documentclass[preprint2]{aastex} + +\newcommand\aastex{AAS\TeX}% + +\pagestyle{myheadings} +\markright{\aastex, AMS math, and \LaTeX\ symbols}% + +\begin{document} + +\begin{table} +\caption{Additional \aastex\ symbols} +\begin{center} +\tabcolsep5pt +\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{\hspace*{1em}}ll@{}} +$\lesssim$ & \verb"\lesssim", \verb"\la" & +$\gtrsim$ & \verb"\gtrsim", \verb"\ga" \\ +\micron & \verb"\micron" & +\sbond & \verb"\sbond" \\ +\dbond & \verb"\dbond" & +\tbond & \verb"\tbond" \\ +$\sun$ & \verb"\sun" & +$\earth$ & \verb"\earth" \\ +\diameter & \verb"\diameter" & +\\ +\arcdeg & \verb"\arcdeg", \verb"\degr" & +\sq & \verb"\sq" \\ +\arcmin & \verb"\arcmin" & +\arcsec & \verb"\arcsec" \\ +\fd & \verb"\fd" & +\fh & \verb"\fh" \\ +\fm & \verb"\fm" & +\fs & \verb"\fs" \\ +\fdg & \verb"\fdg" & +\farcm & \verb"\farcm" \\ +\farcs & \verb"\farcs" & +\fp & \verb"\fp" \\ +\onehalf & \verb"\onehalf" & +\ubvr & \verb"\ubvr" \\ +\onethird & \verb"\onethird" & +\ub & \verb"\ub" \\ +\twothirds & \verb"\twothirds" & +\bv & \verb"\bv" \\ +\onequarter & \verb"\onequarter" & +\vr & \verb"\vr" \\ +\threequarters & \verb"\threequarters" & +\ur & \verb"\ur" \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption{Text-mode accents} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{*{2}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}}ll} +\`{o} & \verb"\`{o}" & \={o} & \verb"\={o}" & \t{oo} & \verb"\t{oo}" \\ +\'{o} & \verb"\'{o}" & \.{o} & \verb"\.{o}" & \c{o} & \verb"\c{o}" \\ +\^{o} & \verb"\^{o}" & \u{o} & \verb"\u{o}" & \d{o} & \verb"\d{o}" \\ +\"{o} & \verb#\"{o}# & \v{o} & \verb"\v{o}" & \b{o} & \verb"\b{o}" \\ +\~{o} & \verb"\~{o}" & \H{o} & \verb"\H{o}" & & \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption{National symbols} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{*{2}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}}ll} +\oe & \verb"\oe" & \aa & \verb"\aa" & \l & \verb"\l" \\ +\OE & \verb"\OE" & \AA & \verb"\AA" & \L & \verb"\L" \\ +\ae & \verb"\ae" & \o & \verb"\o" & \ss & \verb"\ss" \\ +\AE & \verb"\AE" & \O & \verb"\O" & & \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption{Math-mode accents} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}ll} +$\hat{a}$ & \verb"\hat{a}" & $\dot{a}$ & \verb"\dot{a}" \\ +$\check{a}$ & \verb"\check{a}" & $\ddot{a}$ & \verb"\ddot{a}" \\ +$\tilde{a}$ & \verb"\tilde{a}" & $\breve{a}$ & \verb"\breve{a}" \\ +$\acute{a}$ & \verb"\acute{a}" & $\bar{a}$ & \verb"\bar{a}" \\ +$\grave{a}$ & \verb"\grave{a}" & $\vec{a}$ & \verb"\vec{a}" \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption{Greek and Hebrew letters (math mode)} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{3em}}cl} +$\alpha$ & \verb"\alpha" & $\nu$ & \verb"\nu" \\ +$\beta$ & \verb"\beta" & $\xi$ & \verb"\xi" \\ +$\gamma$ & \verb"\gamma" & $o$ & \verb"o" \\ +$\delta$ & \verb"\delta" & $\pi$ & \verb"\pi" \\ +$\epsilon$ & \verb"\epsilon" & $\rho$ & \verb"\rho" \\ +$\zeta$ & \verb"\zeta" & $\sigma$ & \verb"\sigma" \\ +$\eta$ & \verb"\eta" & $\tau$ & \verb"\tau" \\ +$\theta$ & \verb"\theta" & $\upsilon$ & \verb"\upsilon" \\ +$\iota$ & \verb"\iota" & $\phi$ & \verb"\phi" \\ +$\kappa$ & \verb"\kappa" & $\chi$ & \verb"\chi" \\ +$\lambda$ & \verb"\lambda" & $\psi$ & \verb"\psi" \\ +$\mu$ & \verb"\mu" & $\omega$ & \verb"\omega" \\ + +$\digamma$ & \verb"\digamma" & +$\varkappa$ & \verb"\varkappa" \\ +$\varepsilon$ & \verb"\varepsilon" & $\varsigma$ & \verb"\varsigma" \\ +$\vartheta$ & \verb"\vartheta" & $\varphi$ & \verb"\varphi" \\ +$\varrho$ & \verb"\varrho" & & \\ + +$\Gamma$ & \verb"\Gamma" & $\Sigma$ & \verb"\Sigma" \\ +$\Delta$ & \verb"\Delta" & $\Upsilon$ & \verb"\Upsilon" \\ +$\Theta$ & \verb"\Theta" & $\Phi$ & \verb"\Phi" \\ +$\Lambda$ & \verb"\Lambda" & $\Psi$ & \verb"\Psi" \\ +$\Xi$ & \verb"\Xi" & $\Omega$ & \verb"\Omega" \\ +$\Pi$ & \verb"\Pi" & & \\ + +$\aleph$ & \verb"\aleph" & +$\beth$ & \verb"\beth" \\ +$\gimel$ & \verb"\gimel" & +$\daleth$ & \verb"\daleth" \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption{Binary operators (math mode)} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{3em}}cl} +$\pm$ & \verb"\pm" & $\cap$ & \verb"\cap" \\ +$\mp$ & \verb"\mp" & $\cup$ & \verb"\cup" \\ +$\setminus$ & \verb"\setminus" & $\uplus$ & \verb"\uplus" \\ +$\cdot$ & \verb"\cdot" & $\sqcap$ & \verb"\sqcap" \\ +$\times$ & \verb"\times" & $\sqcup$ & \verb"\sqcup" \\ +$\ast$ & \verb"\ast" & $\triangleleft$ & \verb"\triangleleft" \\ +$\star$ & \verb"\star" & $\triangleright$ & \verb"\triangleright" \\ +$\diamond$ & \verb"\diamond" & $\wr$ & \verb"\wr" \\ +$\circ$ & \verb"\circ" & $\bigcirc$ & \verb"\bigcirc" \\ +$\bullet$ & \verb"\bullet" & $\bigtriangleup$ & \verb"\bigtriangleup" \\ +$\div$ & \verb"\div" & $\bigtriangledown$ & \verb"\bigtriangledown" \\ +$\lhd$ & \verb"\lhd" & $\rhd$ & \verb"\rhd" \\%FIXME +$\vee$ & \verb"\vee" & $\odot$ & \verb"\odot" \\ +$\wedge$ & \verb"\wedge" & $\dagger$ & \verb"\dagger" \\ +$\oplus$ & \verb"\oplus" & $\ddagger$ & \verb"\ddagger" \\ +$\ominus$ & \verb"\ominus" & $\amalg$ & \verb"\amalg" \\ +$\otimes$ & \verb"\otimes" & $\unlhd$ & \verb"\unlhd" \\ +$\oslash$ & \verb"\oslash" & $\unrhd$ & \verb"\unrhd" +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\clearpage + +\begin{table} +\caption{AMS binary operators (math mode)} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{2em}}ll} +$\dotplus$ & \verb"\dotplus" & +$\ltimes$ & \verb"\ltimes" \\ +$\smallsetminus$ & \verb"\smallsetminus" & +$\rtimes$ & \verb"\rtimes" \\ +$\Cap$ & \verb"\Cap", \verb"\doublecap" & +$\leftthreetimes$ & \verb"\leftthreetimes" \\ +$\Cup$ & \verb"\Cup", \verb"\doublecup" & +$\rightthreetimes$ & \verb"\rightthreetimes" \\ +$\barwedge$ & \verb"\barwedge" & +$\curlywedge$ & \verb"\curlywedge" \\ +$\veebar$ & \verb"\veebar" & +$\curlyvee$ & \verb"\curlyvee" \\ +$\doublebarwedge$ & \verb"\doublebarwedge" & +\\ +$\boxminus$ & \verb"\boxminus" & +$\circleddash$ & \verb"\circleddash" \\ +$\boxtimes$ & \verb"\boxtimes" & +$\circledast$ & \verb"\circledast" \\ +$\boxdot$ & \verb"\boxdot" & +$\circledcirc$ & \verb"\circledcirc" \\ +$\boxplus$ & \verb"\boxplus" & +$\centerdot$ & \verb"\centerdot" \\ +$\divideontimes$ & \verb"\divideontimes" & +$\intercal$ & \verb"\intercal" \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption{Miscellaneous symbols} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{4em}}ll} +\dag & \verb"\dag" & \S & \verb"\S" \\ +\copyright & \verb"\copyright"& \ddag & \verb"\ddag"\\ + \P & \verb"\P" & \pounds & \verb"\pounds" \\ +\# & \verb"\#" & \$ & \verb"\$"\\ + \% & \verb"\%" & \& & \verb"\&" \\ + \_ & \verb"\_" & \{ & \verb"\{" \\ + \} & \verb"\}" & & \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption{Miscellaneous symbols (math mode)} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{3em}}cl} +$\aleph$ & \verb"\aleph" & $\prime$ & \verb"\prime" \\ +$\hbar$ & \verb"\hbar" & $\emptyset$ & \verb"\emptyset" \\ +$\imath$ & \verb"\imath" & $\nabla$ & \verb"\nabla" \\ +$\jmath$ & \verb"\jmath" & $\surd$ & \verb"\surd" \\ +$\ell$ & \verb"\ell" & $\top$ & \verb"\top" \\ +$\wp$ & \verb"\wp" & $\bot$ & \verb"\bot" \\ +$\Re$ & \verb"\Re" & $\|$ & \verb"\|" \\ +$\Im$ & \verb"\Im" & $\angle$ & \verb"\angle" \\ +$\partial$ & \verb"\partial" & $\triangle$ & \verb"\triangle" \\ +$\infty$ & \verb"\infty" & $\backslash$ & \verb"\backslash" \\ +$\Box$ & \verb"\Box" & $\Diamond$ & \verb"\Diamond" \\ +$\forall$ & \verb"\forall" & $\sharp$ & \verb"\sharp" \\ +$\exists$ & \verb"\exists" & $\clubsuit$ & \verb"\clubsuit" \\ +$\neg$ & \verb"\neg" & $\diamondsuit$ & \verb"\diamondsuit" \\ +$\flat$ & \verb"\flat" & $\heartsuit$ & \verb"\heartsuit" \\ +$\natural$ & \verb"\natural" & $\spadesuit$ & \verb"\spadesuit" \\ +$\mho$ & \verb"\mho" & & +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption{AMS miscellaneous symbols (math mode)} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{2em}}ll} +$\hbar$ & \verb"\hbar" & +$\backprime$ & \verb"\backprime" \\ +$\hslash$ & \verb"\hslash" & +$\varnothing$ & \verb"\varnothing" \\ +$\vartriangle$ & \verb"\vartriangle" & +$\blacktriangle$ & \verb"\blacktriangle" \\ +$\triangledown$ & \verb"\triangledown" & +$\blacktriangledown$ & \verb"\blacktriangledown" \\ +$\square$ & \verb"\square" & +$\blacksquare$ & \verb"\blacksquare" \\ +$\lozenge$ & \verb"\lozenge" & +$\blacklozenge$ & \verb"\blacklozenge" \\ +$\circledS$ & \verb"\circledS" & +$\bigstar$ & \verb"\bigstar" \\ +$\angle$ & \verb"\angle" & +$\sphericalangle$ & \verb"\sphericalangle" \\ +$\measuredangle$ & \verb"\measuredangle" & +\\ +$\nexists$ & \verb"\nexists" & +$\complement$ & \verb"\complement" \\ +$\mho$ & \verb"\mho" & +$\eth$ & \verb"\eth" \\ +$\Finv$ & \verb"\Finv" & +$\diagup$ & \verb"\diagup" \\ +$\Game$ & \verb"\Game" & +$\diagdown$ & \verb"\diagdown" \\ +$\Bbbk$ & \verb"\Bbbk" & +$\restriction$ & \verb"\restriction" \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\tabcolsep1pt +\caption{Arrows (math mode)} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{clcl} +$\leftarrow$ & \verb"\leftarrow" & +$\longleftarrow$ & \verb"\longleftarrow" \\ +$\Leftarrow$ & \verb"\Leftarrow" & +$\Longleftarrow$ & \verb"\Longleftarrow" \\ +$\rightarrow$ & \verb"\rightarrow" & +$\longrightarrow$ & \verb"\longrightarrow" \\ +$\Rightarrow$ & \verb"\Rightarrow" & +$\Longrightarrow$ & \verb"\Longrightarrow" \\ +$\leftrightarrow$ & \verb"\leftrightarrow" & +$\longleftrightarrow$ & \verb"\longleftrightarrow" \\ +$\Leftrightarrow$ & \verb"\Leftrightarrow" & +$\Longleftrightarrow$ & \verb"\Longleftrightarrow" \\ +$\mapsto$ & \verb"\mapsto" & +$\longmapsto$ & \verb"\longmapsto" \\ +$\hookleftarrow$ & \verb"\hookleftarrow" & +$\hookrightarrow$ & \verb"\hookrightarrow" \\ +$\leftharpoonup$ & \verb"\leftharpoonup" & +$\rightharpoonup$ & \verb"\rightharpoonup" \\ +$\leftharpoondown$ & \verb"\leftharpoondown" & +$\rightharpoondown$ & \verb"\rightharpoondown" \\ +$\rightleftharpoons$ & \verb"\rightleftharpoons" & +$\leadsto$ & \verb"\leadsto" \\ +$\uparrow$ & \verb"\uparrow" & +$\Updownarrow$ & \verb"\Updownarrow" \\ +$\Uparrow$ & \verb"\Uparrow" & +$\nearrow$ & \verb"\nearrow" \\ +$\downarrow$ & \verb"\downarrow" & +$\searrow$ & \verb"\searrow" \\ +$\Downarrow$ & \verb"\Downarrow" & +$\swarrow$ & \verb"\swarrow" \\ +$\updownarrow$ & \verb"\updownarrow" & +$\nwarrow$ & \verb"\nwarrow" +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\tabcolsep1pt +\caption{AMS arrows (math mode)} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{llll} +$\dashleftarrow$ & \verb"\dashleftarrow" & +$\dashrightarrow$ & \verb"\dashrightarrow" \\ +$\leftleftarrows$ & \verb"\leftleftarrows" & +$\rightrightarrows$ & \verb"\rightrightarrows" \\ +$\leftrightarrows$ & \verb"\leftrightarrows" & +$\rightleftarrows$ & \verb"\rightleftarrows" \\ +$\Lleftarrow$ & \verb"\Lleftarrow" & +$\Rrightarrow$ & \verb"\Rrightarrow" \\ +$\twoheadleftarrow$ & \verb"\twoheadleftarrow" & +$\twoheadrightarrow$ & \verb"\twoheadrightarrow" \\ +$\leftarrowtail$ & \verb"\leftarrowtail" & +$\rightarrowtail$ & \verb"\rightarrowtail" \\ +$\looparrowleft$ & \verb"\looparrowleft" & +$\looparrowright$ & \verb"\looparrowright" \\ +$\leftrightharpoons$ & \verb"\leftrightharpoons" & +$\rightleftharpoons$ & \verb"\rightleftharpoons" \\ +$\curvearrowleft$ & \verb"\curvearrowleft" & +$\curvearrowright$ & \verb"\curvearrowright" \\ +$\circlearrowleft$ & \verb"\circlearrowleft" & +$\circlearrowright$ & \verb"\circlearrowright" \\ +$\Lsh$ & \verb"\Lsh" & +$\Rsh$ & \verb"\Rsh" \\ +$\upuparrows$ & \verb"\upuparrows" & +$\downdownarrows$ & \verb"\downdownarrows" \\ +$\upharpoonleft$ & \verb"\upharpoonleft" & +$\upharpoonright$ & \verb"\upharpoonright" \\ +$\downharpoonleft$ & \verb"\downharpoonleft" & +$\downharpoonright$ & \verb"\downharpoonright" \\ +$\multimap$ & \verb"\multimap" & +$\rightsquigarrow$ & \verb"\rightsquigarrow" \\ +$\leftrightsquigarrow$ & \verb"\leftrightsquigarrow" & +\\ +$\nleftarrow$ & \verb"\nleftarrow" & +$\nrightarrow$ & \verb"\nrightarrow" \\ +$\nLeftarrow$ & \verb"\nLeftarrow" & +$\nRightarrow$ & \verb"\nRightarrow" \\ +$\nleftrightarrow$ & \verb"\nleftrightarrow" & +$\nLeftrightarrow$ & \verb"\nLeftrightarrow" \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption{Relations (math mode)} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{cl@{\hspace{4em}}cl} + +$\leq$ & \verb"\leq" & $\geq$ & \verb"\geq" \\ +$\prec$ & \verb"\prec" & $\succ$ & \verb"\succ" \\ +$\preceq$ & \verb"\preceq" & $\succeq$ & \verb"\succeq" \\ +$\ll$ & \verb"\ll" & $\gg$ & \verb"\gg" \\ +$\subset$ & \verb"\subset" & $\supset$ & \verb"\supset" \\ +$\subseteq$ & \verb"\subseteq" & $\supseteq$ & \verb"\supseteq" \\ +$\sqsubset$ & \verb"\sqsubset" & $\sqsupset$ & \verb"\sqsupset" \\ +$\sqsubseteq$ & \verb"\sqsubseteq" & $\sqsupseteq$ & \verb"\sqsupseteq" \\ +$\in$ & \verb"\in" & $\ni$ & \verb"\ni" \\ +$\vdash$ & \verb"\vdash" & $\dashv$ & \verb"\dashv" \\ +$\smile$ & \verb"\smile" & $\mid$ & \verb"\mid" \\ +$\frown$ & \verb"\frown" & $\parallel$ & \verb"\parallel" \\ +$\neq$ & \verb"\neq" & $\perp$ & \verb"\perp" \\ +$\equiv$ & \verb"\equiv" & $\cong$ & \verb"\cong" \\ +$\sim$ & \verb"\sim" & $\bowtie$ & \verb"\bowtie" \\ +$\simeq$ & \verb"\simeq" & $\propto$ & \verb"\propto" \\ +$\asymp$ & \verb"\asymp" & $\models$ & \verb"\models" \\ +$\approx$ & \verb"\approx" & $\doteq$ & \verb"\doteq" \\ + & & $\Join$ & \verb"\Join" +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\tabcolsep1pt +\caption{AMS binary relations (math mode)} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{1em}}ll} +$\leqq$ & \verb"\leqq" & +$\geqq$ & \verb"\geqq" \\ +$\leqslant$ & \verb"\leqslant" & +$\geqslant$ & \verb"\geqslant" \\ +$\eqslantless$ & \verb"\eqslantless" & +$\eqslantgtr$ & \verb"\eqslantgtr" \\ +$\lesssim$ & \verb"\lesssim" & +$\gtrsim$ & \verb"\gtrsim" \\ +$\lessapprox$ & \verb"\lessapprox" & +$\gtrapprox$ & \verb"\gtrapprox" \\ +$\approxeq$ & \verb"\approxeq" & +$\eqsim$ & \verb"\eqsim" \\ +$\lessdot$ & \verb"\lessdot" & +$\gtrdot$ & \verb"\gtrdot" \\ +$\lll$ & \verb"\lll", \verb"\llless" & +$\ggg$ & \verb"\ggg", \verb"\gggtr" \\ +$\lessgtr$ & \verb"\lessgtr" & +$\gtrless$ & \verb"\gtrless" \\ +$\lesseqgtr$ & \verb"\lesseqgtr" & +$\gtreqless$ & \verb"\gtreqless" \\ +$\lesseqqgtr$ & \verb"\lesseqqgtr" & +$\gtreqqless$ & \verb"\gtreqqless" \\ +$\doteqdot$ & \verb"\doteqdot", \verb"\Doteq" & +$\eqcirc$ & \verb"\eqcirc" \\ +$\risingdotseq$ & \verb"\risingdotseq" & +$\circeq$ & \verb"\circeq" \\ +$\fallingdotseq$ & \verb"\fallingdotseq" & +$\triangleq$ & \verb"\triangleq" \\ +$\backsim$ & \verb"\backsim" & +$\thicksim$ & \verb"\thicksim" \\ +$\backsimeq$ & \verb"\backsimeq" & +$\thickapprox$ & \verb"\thickapprox" \\ +$\subseteqq$ & \verb"\subseteqq" & +$\supseteqq$ & \verb"\supseteqq" \\ +$\Subset$ & \verb"\Subset" & +$\Supset$ & \verb"\Supset" \\ +$\sqsubset$ & \verb"\sqsubset" & +$\sqsupset$ & \verb"\sqsupset" \\ +$\preccurlyeq$ & \verb"\preccurlyeq" & +$\succcurlyeq$ & \verb"\succcurlyeq" \\ +$\curlyeqprec$ & \verb"\curlyeqprec" & +$\curlyeqsucc$ & \verb"\curlyeqsucc" \\ +$\precsim$ & \verb"\precsim" & +$\succsim$ & \verb"\succsim" \\ +$\precapprox$ & \verb"\precapprox" & +$\succapprox$ & \verb"\succapprox" \\ +$\vartriangleleft$ & \verb"\vartriangleleft" & +$\vartriangleright$ & \verb"\vartriangleright" \\ +$\trianglelefteq$ & \verb"\trianglelefteq" & +$\trianglerighteq$ & \verb"\trianglerighteq" \\ +$\vDash$ & \verb"\vDash" & +$\Vdash$ & \verb"\Vdash" \\ +$\Vvdash$ & \verb"\Vvdash" & +\\ +$\smallsmile$ & \verb"\smallsmile" & +$\shortmid$ & \verb"\shortmid" \\ +$\smallfrown$ & \verb"\smallfrown" & +$\shortparallel$ & \verb"\shortparallel" \\ +$\bumpeq$ & \verb"\bumpeq" & +$\between$ & \verb"\between" \\ +$\Bumpeq$ & \verb"\Bumpeq" & +$\pitchfork$ & \verb"\pitchfork" \\ +$\varpropto$ & \verb"\varpropto" & +$\backepsilon$ & \verb"\backepsilon" \\ +$\blacktriangleleft$ & \verb"\blacktriangleleft" & +$\blacktriangleright$ & \verb"\blacktriangleright" \\ +$\therefore$ & \verb"\therefore" & +$\because$ & \verb"\because" \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption{AMS negated relations (math mode)} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{ll@{\hspace{2em}}ll} +$\nless$ & \verb"\nless" & +$\ngtr$ & \verb"\ngtr" \\ +$\nleq$ & \verb"\nleq" & +$\ngeq$ & \verb"\ngeq" \\ +$\nleqslant$ & \verb"\nleqslant" & +$\ngeqslant$ & \verb"\ngeqslant" \\ +$\nleqq$ & \verb"\nleqq" & +$\ngeqq$ & \verb"\ngeqq" \\ +$\lneq$ & \verb"\lneq" & +$\gneq$ & \verb"\gneq" \\ +$\lneqq$ & \verb"\lneqq" & +$\gneqq$ & \verb"\gneqq" \\ +$\lvertneqq$ & \verb"\lvertneqq" & +$\gvertneqq$ & \verb"\gvertneqq" \\ +$\lnsim$ & \verb"\lnsim" & +$\gnsim$ & \verb"\gnsim" \\ +$\lnapprox$ & \verb"\lnapprox" & +$\gnapprox$ & \verb"\gnapprox" \\ +$\nprec$ & \verb"\nprec" & +$\nsucc$ & \verb"\nsucc" \\ +$\npreceq$ & \verb"\npreceq" & +$\nsucceq$ & \verb"\nsucceq" \\ +$\precneqq$ & \verb"\precneqq" & +$\succneqq$ & \verb"\succneqq" \\ +$\precnsim$ & \verb"\precnsim" & +$\succnsim$ & \verb"\succnsim" \\ +$\precnapprox$ & \verb"\precnapprox" & +$\succnapprox$ & \verb"\succnapprox" \\ +$\nsim$ & \verb"\nsim" & +$\ncong$ & \verb"\ncong" \\ +$\nshortmid$ & \verb"\nshortmid" & +$\nshortparallel$ & \verb"\nshortparallel" \\ +$\nmid$ & \verb"\nmid" & +$\nparallel$ & \verb"\nparallel" \\ +$\nvdash$ & \verb"\nvdash" & +$\nvDash$ & \verb"\nvDash" \\ +$\nVdash$ & \verb"\nVdash" & +$\nVDash$ & \verb"\nVDash" \\ +$\ntriangleleft$ & \verb"\ntriangleleft" & +$\ntriangleright$ & \verb"\ntriangleright" \\ +$\ntrianglelefteq$ & \verb"\ntrianglelefteq" & +$\ntrianglerighteq$ & \verb"\ntrianglerighteq" \\ +$\nsubseteq$ & \verb"\nsubseteq" & +$\nsupseteq$ & \verb"\nsupseteq" \\ +$\nsubseteqq$ & \verb"\nsubseteqq" & +$\nsupseteqq$ & \verb"\nsupseteqq" \\ +$\subsetneq$ & \verb"\subsetneq" & +$\supsetneq$ & \verb"\supsetneq" \\ +$\varsubsetneq$ & \verb"\varsubsetneq" & +$\varsupsetneq$ & \verb"\varsupsetneq" \\ +$\subsetneqq$ & \verb"\subsetneqq" & +$\supsetneqq$ & \verb"\supsetneqq" \\ +$\varsubsetneqq$ & \verb"\varsubsetneqq" & +$\varsupsetneqq$ & \verb"\varsupsetneqq" \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption{Variable-sized symbols (math mode)} +\begin{center} +\begin{displaymath} +\begin{array}{ccl@{\hspace{2em}}ccl} +\sum & \displaystyle \sum & \hbox{\verb"\sum"} & +\bigcap & \displaystyle \bigcap & \hbox{\verb"\bigcap"} \\ +\prod & \displaystyle \prod & \hbox{\verb"\prod"} & +\bigcup & \displaystyle \bigcup & \hbox{\verb"\bigcup"} \\ +\coprod & \displaystyle \coprod & \hbox{\verb"\coprod"} & +\bigsqcup & \displaystyle \bigsqcup & \hbox{\verb"\bigsqcup"} \\ +\int & \displaystyle \int & \hbox{\verb"\int"} & +\bigvee & \displaystyle \bigvee & \hbox{\verb"\bigvee"} \\ +\oint & \displaystyle \oint & \hbox{\verb"\oint"} & +\bigwedge & \displaystyle \bigwedge & \hbox{\verb"\bigwedge"} \\ +\bigodot & \displaystyle \bigodot & \hbox{\verb"\bigodot"} & +\bigotimes & \displaystyle \bigotimes & \hbox{\verb"\bigotimes"} \\ +\bigoplus & \displaystyle \bigoplus & \hbox{\verb"\bigoplus"} & +\biguplus & \displaystyle \biguplus & \hbox{\verb"\biguplus"} \\ +\end{array} +\end{displaymath} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption{Delimiters (math mode)} +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{lc@{\hspace{2em}}lc} +$($ & \verb"(" & $)$ & \verb")" \\ +$[$ & \verb"[" & $]$ & \verb"]" \\ +$\{$ & \verb"\{" & $\}$ & \verb"\}" \\ +$\lfloor$ & \verb"\lfloor" & $\rfloor$ & \verb"\rfloor" \\ +$\lceil$ & \verb"\lceil" & $\rceil$ & \verb"\rceil" \\ +$\langle$ & \verb"\langle" & $\rangle$ & \verb"\rangle" \\ +$/$ & \verb"/" & $\backslash$ & \verb"\backslash" \\ +$\vert$ & \verb"\vert" & $\Vert$ & \verb"\Vert" \\ +$\uparrow$ & \verb"\uparrow" & $\Uparrow$ & \verb"\Uparrow" \\ +$\downarrow$ & \verb"\downarrow" & $\Downarrow$ & \verb"\Downarrow" \\ +$\updownarrow$ & \verb"\updownarrow" & +$\Updownarrow$ & \verb"\Updownarrow" \\ +$\ulcorner$ & \verb"\ulcorner" & +$\urcorner$ & \verb"\urcorner" \\ +$\llcorner$ & \verb"\llcorner" & +$\lrcorner$ & \verb"\lrcorner" \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +\begin{table} +\caption{Function names (math mode)} +\begin{verbatim} + \arccos \csc \ker \min + \arcsin \deg \lg \Pr + \arctan \det \lim \sec + \arg \dim \liminf \sin + \cos \exp \limsup \sinh + \cosh \gcd \ln \sup + \cot \hom \log \tan + \coth \inf \max \tanh +\end{verbatim} +\end{table} +\end{document} +%</symbols> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Sample document modules +% +% Here begins the module `sample`. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*sample> +%% +%% Beginning of file 'sample.tex' +%% +%% Modified 2005 June 21 +%% +%% This is a sample manuscript marked up using the +%% AASTeX v5.x LaTeX 2e macros. + +%% The first piece of markup in an AASTeX v5.x document +%% is the \documentclass command. LaTeX will ignore +%% any data that comes before this command. + +%% The command below calls the preprint style +%% which will produce a one-column, single-spaced document. +%% Examples of commands for other substyles follow. Use +%% whichever is most appropriate for your purposes. +%% +%%\documentclass[12pt,preprint]{aastex} + +%% manuscript produces a one-column, double-spaced document: + +\documentclass[manuscript]{aastex} + +%% preprint2 produces a double-column, single-spaced document: + +%% \documentclass[preprint2]{aastex} + +%% Sometimes a paper's abstract is too long to fit on the +%% title page in preprint2 mode. When that is the case, +%% use the longabstract style option. + +%% \documentclass[preprint2,longabstract]{aastex} + +%% If you want to create your own macros, you can do so +%% using \newcommand. Your macros should appear before +%% the \begin{document} command. +%% +%% If you are submitting to a journal that translates manuscripts +%% into SGML, you need to follow certain guidelines when preparing +%% your macros. See the AASTeX v5.x Author Guide +%% for information. + +\newcommand{\vdag}{(v)^\dagger} +\newcommand{\myemail}{skywalker@galaxy.far.far.away} + +%% You can insert a short comment on the title page using the command below. + +\slugcomment{Not to appear in Nonlearned J., 45.} + +%% If you wish, you may supply running head information, although +%% this information may be modified by the editorial offices. +%% The left head contains a list of authors, +%% usually a maximum of three (otherwise use et al.). The right +%% head is a modified title of up to roughly 44 characters. +%% Running heads will not print in the manuscript style. + +\shorttitle{Collapsed Cores in Globular Clusters} +\shortauthors{Djorgovski et al.} + +%% This is the end of the preamble. Indicate the beginning of the +%% paper itself with \begin{document}. + +\begin{document} + +%% LaTeX will automatically break titles if they run longer than +%% one line. However, you may use \\ to force a line break if +%% you desire. + +\title{Collapsed Cores in Globular Clusters, \\ + Gauge-Boson Couplings, and AAS\TeX\ Examples} + +%% Use \author, \affil, and the \and command to format +%% author and affiliation information. +%% Note that \email has replaced the old \authoremail command +%% from AASTeX v4.0. You can use \email to mark an email address +%% anywhere in the paper, not just in the front matter. +%% As in the title, use \\ to force line breaks. + +\author{S. Djorgovski\altaffilmark{1,2,3} and Ivan R. King\altaffilmark{1}} +\affil{Astronomy Department, University of California, + Berkeley, CA 94720} + +\author{C. D. Biemesderfer\altaffilmark{4,5}} +\affil{National Optical Astronomy Observatories, Tucson, AZ 85719} +\email{aastex-help@aas.org} + +\and + +\author{R. J. Hanisch\altaffilmark{5}} +\affil{Space Telescope Science Institute, Baltimore, MD 21218} + +%% Notice that each of these authors has alternate affiliations, which +%% are identified by the \altaffilmark after each name. Specify alternate +%% affiliation information with \altaffiltext, with one command per each +%% affiliation. + +\altaffiltext{1}{Visiting Astronomer, Cerro Tololo Inter-American Observatory. +CTIO is operated by AURA, Inc.\ under contract to the National Science +Foundation.} +\altaffiltext{2}{Society of Fellows, Harvard University.} +\altaffiltext{3}{present address: Center for Astrophysics, + 60 Garden Street, Cambridge, MA 02138} +\altaffiltext{4}{Visiting Programmer, Space Telescope Science Institute} +\altaffiltext{5}{Patron, Alonso's Bar and Grill} + +%% Mark off your abstract in the ``abstract'' environment. In the manuscript +%% style, abstract will output a Received/Accepted line after the +%% title and affiliation information. No date will appear since the author +%% does not have this information. The dates will be filled in by the +%% editorial office after submission. + +\begin{abstract} +This is a preliminary report on surface photometry of the major +fraction of known globular clusters, to see which of them show the signs +of a collapsed core. +We also explore some diversionary mathematics and recreational tables. +\end{abstract} + +%% Keywords should appear after the \end{abstract} command. The uncommented +%% example has been keyed in ApJ style. See the instructions to authors +%% for the journal to which you are submitting your paper to determine +%% what keyword punctuation is appropriate. + +\keywords{globular clusters: general --- globular clusters: individual(NGC 6397, +NGC 6624, NGC 7078, Terzan 8} + +%% From the front matter, we move on to the body of the paper. +%% In the first two sections, notice the use of the natbib \citep +%% and \citet commands to identify citations. The citations are +%% tied to the reference list via symbolic KEYs. The KEY corresponds +%% to the KEY in the \bibitem in the reference list below. We have +%% chosen the first three characters of the first author's name plus +%% the last two numeral of the year of publication as our KEY for +%% each reference. + + +%% Authors who wish to have the most important objects in their paper +%% linked in the electronic edition to a data center may do so by tagging +%% their objects with \objectname{} or \object{}. Each macro takes the +%% object name as its required argument. The optional, square-bracket +%% argument should be used in cases where the data center identification +%% differs from what is to be printed in the paper. The text appearing +%% in curly braces is what will appear in print in the published paper. +%% If the object name is recognized by the data centers, it will be linked +%% in the electronic edition to the object data available at the data centers + +\section{Introduction} + +A focal problem today in the dynamics of globular clusters is core collapse. +It has been predicted by theory for decades \citep{hen61,lyn68,spi85}, but +observation has been less alert to the phenomenon. For many years the +central brightness peak in M15 \citep{kin75,new78} seemed a unique anomaly. +Then \citet{aur82} suggested a central peak in \object{NGC 6397}, and a +limited photographic survey of ours \citep[Paper I]{djo84} found three more +cases, \objectname{NGC 6624}, \objectname[M 15]{NGC 7078}, and +\object[Cl 1938-341]{Terzan 8}), whose sharp center had often been +remarked on \citep{can78}. + +\section{Observations} + +%% In a manner similar to \objectname authors can provide links to dataset +%% hosted at participating data centers via the \dataset{} command. The +%% second curly bracket argument is printed in the text while the first +%% parentheses argument serves as the valid data set identifier. Large +%% lists of data set are best provided in a table (see Table 3 for an example). +%% Valid data set identifiers should be obtained from the data center that +%% is currently hosting the data. + +All our observations were short direct exposures with CCD's. We also have + a random {\it Chandra} data set \dataset{ADS/Sa.ASCA\#X/86008020} and a +neat \dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#Y0Q70101T]{HST FOS spectrum} that readers can access +via the links in the electronic edition. Unfortunately this has nothing +whatsoever to do with this research. At Lick Observatory we used a TI 500$\times$500 +chip and a GEC 575$\times$385, on the 1-m Nickel reflector. The only +filter available at Lick was red. At CTIO we used a GEC 575$\times$385, with +$B, V,$ and $R$ filters, and an RCA 512$\times$320, with $U, B, V, R,$ and $I$ +filters, on the 1.5-m reflector. In the CTIO observations we tried to +concentrate on the shortest practicable wavelengths; but faintness, reddening, +and poor short-wavelength sensitivity often kept us from observing in $U$ or +even in $B$. All four cameras had scales of the order of 0.4 arcsec/pixel, and +our field sizes were around 3 arcmin. + +The CCD images are unfortunately not always suitable, for very poor +clusters or for clusters with large cores. Since the latter are easily +studied by other means, we augmented our own CCD profiles by collecting +from the literature a number of star-count profiles +\citep{kin68,pet76,har84,ort85}, as well as photoelectric profiles +\citep{kin66,kin75} and electronographic profiles \citep{kro84}. +In a few cases we judged normality by eye estimates on one of the Sky +Surveys. + +%% In this section, we use the \subsection command to set off +%% a subsection. \footnote is used to insert a footnote to the text. + +%% Observe the use of the LaTeX \label +%% command after the \subsection to give a symbolic KEY to the +%% subsection for cross-referencing in a \ref command. +%% You can use LaTeX's \ref and \label commands to keep track of +%% cross-references to sections, equations, tables, and figures. +%% That way, if you change the order of any elements, LaTeX will +%% automatically renumber them. + +%% This section also includes several of the displayed math environments +%% mentioned in the Author Guide. + +\section{Helicity Amplitudes} + +It has been realized that helicity amplitudes provide a convenient means +for Feynman diagram\footnote{Footnotes can be inserted like this.} +evaluations. These amplitude-level techniques +are particularly convenient for calculations involving many Feynman +diagrams, where the usual trace techniques for the amplitude +squared becomes unwieldy. Our calculations use the helicity techniques +developed by other authors \cite[]{hag86}; we briefly summarize below. + +\subsection{Formalism} \label{bozomath} + +%% The equation environment wil produce a numbered display equation. + +A tree-level amplitude in $e^+e^-$ collisions can be expressed in +terms of fermion strings of the form +\begin{equation} +\bar v(p_2,\sigma_2)P_{-\tau}\hat a_1\hat a_2\cdots +\hat a_nu(p_1,\sigma_1) , +\end{equation} +where $p$ and $\sigma$ label the initial $e^{\pm}$ four-momenta +and helicities $(\sigma = \pm 1)$, $\hat a_i=a^\mu_i\gamma_\nu$ +and $P_\tau=\frac{1}{2}(1+\tau\gamma_5)$ is a chirality projection +operator $(\tau = \pm1)$. The $a^\mu_i$ may be formed from particle +four-momenta, gauge-boson polarization vectors or fermion strings with +an uncontracted Lorentz index associated with final-state fermions. + +%% The \notetoeditor{TEXT} command allows the author to communicate +%% information to the copy editor. This information will appear as a +%% footnote on the printed copy for the manuscript style file. Nothing will +%% appear on the printed copy if the preprint or +%% preprint2 style files are used. + +%% The eqnarray environment produces multi-line display math. The end of +%% each line is marked with a \\. Lines will be numbered unless the \\ +%% is preceded by a \nonumber command. +%% Alignment points are marked by ampersands (&). There should be two +%% ampersands (&) per line. + +In the chiral \notetoeditor{Figures 1 and 2 should appear side-by-side in +print} representation the $\gamma$ matrices are expressed +in terms of $2\times 2$ Pauli matrices $\sigma$ and the unit matrix 1 as +\begin{eqnarray} +\gamma^\mu & = & + \left( +\begin{array}{cc} +0 & \sigma^\mu_+ \\ +\sigma^\mu_- & 0 +\end{array} \right) , + \gamma^5= \left( +\begin{array}{cc} +-1 & 0\\ +0 & 1 +\end{array} \right) , \nonumber \\ +\sigma^\mu_{\pm} & = & ({\bf 1} ,\pm \sigma) , \nonumber +\end{eqnarray} +giving +\begin{equation} +\hat a= \left( +\begin{array}{cc} +0 & (\hat a)_+\\ +(\hat a)_- & 0 +\end{array}\right), (\hat a)_\pm=a_\mu\sigma^\mu_\pm , +\end{equation} +The spinors are expressed in terms of two-component Weyl spinors as +\begin{equation} +u=\left( +\begin{array}{c} +(u)_-\\ +(u)_+ +\end{array}\right), v={\bf (}\vdag_+{\bf ,} \vdag_-{\bf )} . +\end{equation} + +%% Putting eqnarrays or equations inside the mathletters environment groups +%% the enclosed equations by letter. For instance, the eqnarray below, instead +%% of being numbered, say, (4) and (5), would be numbered (4a) and (4b). +%% LaTeX the paper and look at the output to see the results. + +The Weyl spinors are given in terms of helicity eigenstates +$\chi_\lambda(p)$ with $\lambda=\pm1$ by +\begin{mathletters} +\begin{eqnarray} +u(p,\lambda)_\pm & = & (E\pm\lambda|{\bf p}|)^{1/2}\chi_\lambda(p) , \\ +v(p,\lambda)_\pm & = & \pm\lambda(E\mp\lambda|{\bf p}|)^{1/2}\chi +_{-\lambda}(p) +\end{eqnarray} +\end{mathletters} + +%% This section contains more display math examples, including unnumbered +%% equations (displaymath environment). The last paragraph includes some +%% examples of in-line math featuring a couple of the AASTeX symbol macros. + +\section{Floating material and so forth} + +%% The displaymath environment will produce the same sort of equation as +%% the equation environment, except that the equation will not be numbered +%% by LaTeX. + +Consider a task that computes profile parameters for a modified +Lorentzian of the form +\begin{equation} +I = \frac{1}{1 + d_{1}^{P (1 + d_{2} )}} +\end{equation} +where +\begin{displaymath} +d_{1} = \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{R_{maj}} +\end{array} \right) ^{2} + +\left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{y_{1}}{R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} } +\end{displaymath} +\begin{displaymath} +d_{2} = \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{P R_{maj}} +\end{array} \right) ^{2} + +\left( \begin{array}{c} \case{y_{1}}{P R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} } +\end{displaymath} +\begin{displaymath} +x_{1} = (x - x_{0}) \cos \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \sin \Theta +\end{displaymath} +\begin{displaymath} +y_{1} = -(x - x_{0}) \sin \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \cos \Theta +\end{displaymath} + +In these expressions $x_{0}$,$y_{0}$ is the star center, and $\Theta$ is the +angle with the $x$ axis. Results of this task are shown in table~\ref{tbl-1}. +It is not clear how these sorts of analyses may affect determination of + $M_{\sun}$, but the assumption is that the alternate results +should be less than 90\degr\ out of phase with previous values. +We have no observations of \ion{Ca}{2}. +Roughly \slantfrac{4}{5} of the electronically submitted abstracts +for AAS meetings are error-free. + +%% If you wish to include an acknowledgments section in your paper, +%% separate it off from the body of the text using the \acknowledgments +%% command. + +%% Included in this acknowledgments section are examples of the +%% AASTeX hypertext markup commands. Use \url without the optional [HREF] +%% argument when you want to print the url directly in the text. Otherwise, +%% use either \url or \anchor, with the HREF as the first argument and the +%% text to be printed in the second. + +\acknowledgments + +We are grateful to V. Barger, T. Han, and R. J. N. Phillips for +doing the math in section~\ref{bozomath}. +More information on the AASTeX macros package is available \\ at +\url{http://www.aas.org/publications/aastex}. +For technical support, please write to +\email{aastex-help@aas.org}. + +%% To help institutions obtain information on the effectiveness of their +%% telescopes, the AAS Journals has created a group of keywords for telescope +%% facilities. A common set of keywords will make these types of searches +%% significantly easier and more accurate. In addition, they will also be +%% useful in linking papers together which utilize the same telescopes +%% within the framework of the National Virtual Observatory. +%% See the AASTeX Web site at http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/AAS/AASTeX +%% for information on obtaining the facility keywords. + +%% After the acknowledgments section, use the following syntax and the +%% \facility{} macro to list the keywords of facilities used in the research +%% for the paper. Each keyword will be checked against the master list during +%% copy editing. Individual instruments or configurations can be provided +%% in parentheses, after the keyword, but they will not be verified. + +{\it Facilities:} \facility{Nickel}, \facility{HST (STIS)}, \facility{CXO (ASIS)}. + +%% Appendix material should be preceded with a single \appendix command. +%% There should be a \section command for each appendix. Mark appendix +%% subsections with the same markup you use in the main body of the paper. + +%% Each Appendix (indicated with \section) will be lettered A, B, C, etc. +%% The equation counter will reset when it encounters the \appendix +%% command and will number appendix equations (A1), (A2), etc. + +\appendix + +\section{Appendix material} + +Consider once again a task that computes profile parameters for a modified +Lorentzian of the form +\begin{equation} +I = \frac{1}{1 + d_{1}^{P (1 + d_{2} )}} +\end{equation} +where +\begin{mathletters} +\begin{displaymath} +d_{1} = \frac{3}{4} \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{R_{maj}} +\end{array} \right) ^{2} + +\left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{y_{1}}{R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} } +\end{displaymath} +\begin{equation} +d_{2} = \case{3}{4} \sqrt{ \left( \begin{array}{c} \frac{x_{1}}{P R_{maj}} +\end{array} \right) ^{2} + +\left( \begin{array}{c} \case{y_{1}}{P R_{min}} \end{array} \right) ^{2} } +\end{equation} +\begin{eqnarray} +x_{1} & = & (x - x_{0}) \cos \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \sin \Theta \\ +y_{1} & = & -(x - x_{0}) \sin \Theta + (y - y_{0}) \cos \Theta +\end{eqnarray} +\end{mathletters} + +For completeness, here is one last equation. +\begin{equation} +e = mc^2 +\end{equation} + +%% The reference list follows the main body and any appendices. +%% Use LaTeX's thebibliography environment to mark up your reference list. +%% Note \begin{thebibliography} is followed by an empty set of +%% curly braces. If you forget this, LaTeX will generate the error +%% "Perhaps a missing \item?". +%% +%% thebibliography produces citations in the text using \bibitem-\cite +%% cross-referencing. Each reference is preceded by a +%% \bibitem command that defines in curly braces the KEY that corresponds +%% to the KEY in the \cite commands (see the first section above). +%% Make sure that you provide a unique KEY for every \bibitem or else the +%% paper will not LaTeX. The square brackets should contain +%% the citation text that LaTeX will insert in +%% place of the \cite commands. + +%% We have used macros to produce journal name abbreviations. +%% AASTeX provides a number of these for the more frequently-cited journals. +%% See the Author Guide for a list of them. + +%% Note that the style of the \bibitem labels (in []) is slightly +%% different from previous examples. The natbib system solves a host +%% of citation expression problems, but it is necessary to clearly +%% delimit the year from the author name used in the citation. +%% See the natbib documentation for more details and options. + +\begin{thebibliography}{} +\bibitem[Auri\`ere(1982)]{aur82} Auri\`ere, M. 1982, \aap, + 109, 301 +\bibitem[Canizares et al.(1978)]{can78} Canizares, C. R., + Grindlay, J. E., Hiltner, W. A., Liller, W., \& + McClintock, J. E. 1978, \apj, 224, 39 +\bibitem[Djorgovski \& King(1984)]{djo84} Djorgovski, S., + \& King, I. R. 1984, \apjl, 277, L49 +\bibitem[Hagiwara \& Zeppenfeld(1986)]{hag86} Hagiwara, K., \& + Zeppenfeld, D. 1986, Nucl.Phys., 274, 1 +\bibitem[Harris \& van den Bergh(1984)]{har84} Harris, W. E., + \& van den Bergh, S. 1984, \aj, 89, 1816 +\bibitem[H\`enon(1961)]{hen61} H\'enon, M. 1961, Ann.d'Ap., 24, 369 +\bibitem[Heiles \& Troland(2003)]{heiles03} Heiles, C. \& Troland, T. H., 2003, \apjs, preprint doi:10.1086/381753 +\bibitem[Kim, Ostricker, \& Stone(2003)]{kim03} Kim, W.-T., Ostriker, E., \& Stone, J. M., 2003, \apj, 599, 1157 +\bibitem[King(1966)]{kin66} King, I. R. 1966, \aj, 71, 276 +\bibitem[King(1975)]{kin75} King, I. R. 1975, Dynamics of + Stellar Systems, A. Hayli, Dordrecht: Reidel, 1975, 99 +\bibitem[King et al.(1968)]{kin68} King, I. R., Hedemann, E., + Hodge, S. M., \& White, R. E. 1968, \aj, 73, 456 +\bibitem[Kron et al.(1984)]{kro84} Kron, G. E., Hewitt, A. V., + \& Wasserman, L. H. 1984, \pasp, 96, 198 +\bibitem[Lynden-Bell \& Wood(1968)]{lyn68} Lynden-Bell, D., + \& Wood, R. 1968, \mnras, 138, 495 +\bibitem[Newell \& O'Neil(1978)]{new78} Newell, E. B., + \& O'Neil, E. J. 1978, \apjs, 37, 27 +\bibitem[Ortolani et al.(1985)]{ort85} Ortolani, S., Rosino, L., + \& Sandage, A. 1985, \aj, 90, 473 +\bibitem[Peterson(1976)]{pet76} Peterson, C. J. 1976, \aj, 81, 617 +\bibitem[Rudnick et al.(2003)]{rudnick03} Rudnick, G. et al., 2003, \apj, 599, 847 +\bibitem[Spitzer(1985)]{spi85} Spitzer, L. 1985, Dynamics of + Star Clusters, J. Goodman \& P. Hut, Dordrecht: Reidel, 109 +\bibitem[Treu et al.(2003)]{treu03} Treu, T. et al., 2003, \apj, 591, 53 +\end{thebibliography} + +\clearpage + +%% Use the figure environment and \plotone or \plottwo to include +%% figures and captions in your electronic submission. +%% To embed the sample graphics in +%% the file, uncomment the \plotone, \plottwo, and +%% \includegraphics commands +%% +%% If you need a layout that cannot be achieved with \plotone or +%% \plottwo, you can invoke the graphicx package directly with the +%% \includegraphics command or use \plotfiddle. For more information, +%% please see the tutorial on "Using Electronic Art with AASTeX" in the +%% documentation section at the AASTeX Web site, +%% http://www.journals.uchicago.edu/AAS/AASTeX. +%% +%% The examples below also include sample markup for submission of +%% supplemental electronic materials. As always, be sure to check +%% the instructions to authors for the journal you are submitting to +%% for specific submissions guidelines as they vary from +%% journal to journal. + +%% This example uses \plotone to include an EPS file scaled to +%% 80% of its natural size with \epsscale. Its caption +%% has been written to indicate that additional figure parts will be +%% available in the electronic journal. + +\begin{figure} +\epsscale{.80} +\plotone{f1.eps} +\caption{Derived spectra for 3C138 \citep[see][]{heiles03}. Plots for all sources are available +in the electronic edition of {\it The Astrophysical Journal}.\label{fig1}} +\end{figure} + +\clearpage + +%% Here we use \plottwo to present two versions of the same figure, +%% one in black and white for print the other in RGB color +%% for online presentation. Note that the caption indicates +%% that a color version of the figure will be available online. +%% + +\begin{figure} +\plottwo{f2.eps}{f2_color.eps} +\caption{A panel taken from Figure 2 of \citet{rudnick03}. +See the electronic edition of the Journal for a color version +of this figure.\label{fig2}} +\end{figure} + +%% This figure uses \includegraphics to scale and rotate the still frame +%% for an mpeg animation. + +\begin{figure} +\includegraphics[angle=90,scale=.50]{f3.eps} +\caption{Animation still frame taken from \citet{kim03}. +This figure is also available as an mpeg +animation in the electronic edition of the +{\it Astrophysical Journal}.} +\end{figure} + +%% If you are not including electonic art with your submission, you may +%% mark up your captions using the \figcaption command. See the +%% User Guide for details. +%% +%% No more than seven \figcaption commands are allowed per page, +%% so if you have more than seven captions, insert a \clearpage +%% after every seventh one. + +%% Tables should be submitted one per page, so put a \clearpage before +%% each one. + +%% Two options are available to the author for producing tables: the +%% deluxetable environment provided by the AASTeX package or the LaTeX +%% table environment. Use of deluxetable is preferred. +%% + +%% Three table samples follow, two marked up in the deluxetable environment, +%% one marked up as a LaTeX table. + +%% In this first example, note that the \tabletypesize{} +%% command has been used to reduce the font size of the table. +%% We also use the \rotate command to rotate the table to +%% landscape orientation since it is very wide even at the +%% reduced font size. +%% +%% Note also that the \label command needs to be placed +%% inside the \tablecaption. + +%% This table also includes a table comment indicating that the full +%% version will be available in machine-readable format in the electronic +%% edition. + +\clearpage + +\begin{deluxetable}{ccrrrrrrrrcrl} +\tabletypesize{\scriptsize} +\rotate +\tablecaption{Sample table taken from \citet{treu03}\label{tbl-1}} +\tablewidth{0pt} +\tablehead{ +\colhead{POS} & \colhead{chip} & \colhead{ID} & \colhead{X} & \colhead{Y} & +\colhead{RA} & \colhead{DEC} & \colhead{IAU$\pm$ $\delta$ IAU} & +\colhead{IAP1$\pm$ $\delta$ IAP1} & \colhead{IAP2 $\pm$ $\delta$ IAP2} & +\colhead{star} & \colhead{E} & \colhead{Comment} +} +\startdata +0 & 2 & 1 & 1370.99 & 57.35 & 6.651120 & 17.131149 & 21.344$\pm$0.006 & 2 +4.385$\pm$0.016 & 23.528$\pm$0.013 & 0.0 & 9 & - \\ +0 & 2 & 2 & 1476.62 & 8.03 & 6.651480 & 17.129572 & 21.641$\pm$0.005 & 2 +3.141$\pm$0.007 & 22.007$\pm$0.004 & 0.0 & 9 & - \\ +0 & 2 & 3 & 1079.62 & 28.92 & 6.652430 & 17.135000 & 23.953$\pm$0.030 & 2 +4.890$\pm$0.023 & 24.240$\pm$0.023 & 0.0 & - & - \\ +0 & 2 & 4 & 114.58 & 21.22 & 6.655560 & 17.148020 & 23.801$\pm$0.025 & 2 +5.039$\pm$0.026 & 24.112$\pm$0.021 & 0.0 & - & - \\ +0 & 2 & 5 & 46.78 & 19.46 & 6.655800 & 17.148932 & 23.012$\pm$0.012 & 2 +3.924$\pm$0.012 & 23.282$\pm$0.011 & 0.0 & - & - \\ +0 & 2 & 6 & 1441.84 & 16.16 & 6.651480 & 17.130072 & 24.393$\pm$0.045 & 2 +6.099$\pm$0.062 & 25.119$\pm$0.049 & 0.0 & - & - \\ +0 & 2 & 7 & 205.43 & 3.96 & 6.655520 & 17.146742 & 24.424$\pm$0.032 & 2 +5.028$\pm$0.025 & 24.597$\pm$0.027 & 0.0 & - & - \\ +0 & 2 & 8 & 1321.63 & 9.76 & 6.651950 & 17.131672 & 22.189$\pm$0.011 & 2 +4.743$\pm$0.021 & 23.298$\pm$0.011 & 0.0 & 4 & edge \\ +\enddata +%% Text for table notes should follow after the \enddata but before +%% the \end{deluxetable}. Make sure there is at least one \tablenotemark +%% in the table for each \tablenotetext. +\tablecomments{Table \ref{tbl-1} is published in its entirety in the +electronic edition of the {\it Astrophysical Journal}. A portion is +shown here for guidance regarding its form and content.} +\tablenotetext{a}{Sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-1} that was generated +with the deluxetable environment} +\tablenotetext{b}{Another sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-1}} +\end{deluxetable} + +%% If you use the table environment, please indicate horizontal rules using +%% \tableline, not \hline. +%% Do not put multiple tabular environments within a single table. +%% The optional \label should appear inside the \caption command. + +\clearpage + +\begin{table} +\begin{center} +\caption{More terribly relevant tabular information.\label{tbl-2}} +\begin{tabular}{crrrrrrrrrrr} +\tableline\tableline +Star & Height & $d_{x}$ & $d_{y}$ & $n$ & $\chi^2$ & $R_{maj}$ & $R_{min}$ & +\multicolumn{1}{c}{$P$\tablenotemark{a}} & $P R_{maj}$ & $P R_{min}$ & +\multicolumn{1}{c}{$\Theta$\tablenotemark{b}} \\ +\tableline +1 &33472.5 &-0.1 &0.4 &53 &27.4 &2.065 &1.940 &3.900 &68.3 &116.2 &-27.639\\ +2 &27802.4 &-0.3 &-0.2 &60 &3.7 &1.628 &1.510 &2.156 &6.8 &7.5 &-26.764\\ +3 &29210.6 &0.9 &0.3 &60 &3.4 &1.622 &1.551 &2.159 &6.7 &7.3 &-40.272\\ +4 &32733.8 &-1.2\tablenotemark{c} &-0.5 &41 &54.8 &2.282 &2.156 &4.313 &117.4 &78.2 &-35.847\\ +5 & 9607.4 &-0.4 &-0.4 &60 &1.4 &1.669\tablenotemark{c} &1.574 &2.343 &8.0 &8.9 &-33.417\\ +6 &31638.6 &1.6 &0.1 &39 &315.2 & 3.433 &3.075 &7.488 &92.1 &25.3 &-12.052\\ +\tableline +\end{tabular} +%% Any table notes must follow the \end{tabular} command. +\tablenotetext{a}{Sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-2} that was +generated with the \LaTeX\ table environment} +\tablenotetext{b}{Yet another sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-2}} +\tablenotetext{c}{Another sample footnote for table~\ref{tbl-2}} +\tablecomments{We can also attach a long-ish paragraph of explanatory +material to a table.} +\end{center} +\end{table} + +%% If the table is more than one page long, the width of the table can vary +%% from page to page when the default \tablewidth is used, as below. The +%% individual table widths for each page will be written to the log file; a +%% maximum tablewidth for the table can be computed from these values. +%% The \tablewidth argument can then be reset and the file reprocessed, so +%% that the table is of uniform width throughout. Try getting the widths +%% from the log file and changing the \tablewidth parameter to see how +%% adjusting this value affects table formatting. + +%% The \dataset{} macro has also been applied to a few of the objects to +%% show how many observations can be tagged in a table. + +\clearpage + +\begin{deluxetable}{lrrrrcrrrrr} +\tablewidth{0pt} +\tablecaption{Literature Data for Program Stars} +\tablehead{ +\colhead{Star} & \colhead{V} & +\colhead{b$-$y} & \colhead{m$_1$} & +\colhead{c$_1$} & \colhead{ref} & +\colhead{T$_{\rm eff}$} & \colhead{log g} & +\colhead{v$_{\rm turb}$} & \colhead{[Fe/H]} & +\colhead{ref}} +\startdata +HD 97 & 9.7& 0.51& 0.15& 0.35& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 2 \\ +& & & & & & 5015 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 10 \\ +\dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#O6H04VAXQ]{HD 2665} & 7.7& 0.54& 0.09& 0.34& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.30$ & 2 \\ +& & & & & & 5000 & 2.50 & 2.4 & $-1.99$ & 5 \\ +& & & & & & 5120 & 3.00 & 2.0 & $-1.69$ & 7 \\ +& & & & & & 4980 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.05$ & 10 \\ +HD 4306 & 9.0& 0.52& 0.05& 0.35& 20, 2& \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.70$ & 2 \\ +& & & & & & 5000 & 1.75 & 2.0 & $-2.70$ & 13 \\ +& & & & & & 5000 & 1.50 & 1.8 & $-2.65$ & 14 \\ +& & & & & & 4950 & 2.10 & 2.0 & $-2.92$ & 8 \\ +& & & & & & 5000 & 2.25 & 2.0 & $-2.83$ & 18 \\ +& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.80$ & 21 \\ +& & & & & & 4930 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.45$ & 10 \\ +HD 5426 & 9.6& 0.50& 0.08& 0.34& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.30$ & 2 \\ +\dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#O5F654010]{HD 6755} & 7.7& 0.49& 0.12& 0.28& 20, 2& \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 2 \\ +& & & & & & 5200 & 2.50 & 2.4 & $-1.56$ & 5 \\ +& & & & & & 5260 & 3.00 & 2.7 & $-1.67$ & 7 \\ +& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.58$ & 21 \\ +& & & & & & 5200 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.80$ & 10 \\ +& & & & & & 4600 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.75$ & 10 \\ +\dataset[ADS/Sa.HST#O56D06010]{HD 94028} & 8.2& 0.34& 0.08& 0.25& 20 & 5795 & 4.00 & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 22 \\ +& & & & & & 5860 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 4 \\ +& & & & & & 5910 & 3.80 & \nodata & $-1.76$ & 15 \\ +& & & & & & 5800 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.67$ & 17 \\ +& & & & & & 5902 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 11 \\ +& & & & & & 5900 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.57$ & 3 \\ +& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.32$ & 21 \\ +HD 97916 & 9.2& 0.29& 0.10& 0.41& 20 & 6125 & 4.00 & \nodata & $-1.10$ & 22 \\ +& & & & & & 6160 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.39$ & 3 \\ +& & & & & & 6240 & 3.70 & \nodata & $-1.28$ & 15 \\ +& & & & & & 5950 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.50$ & 17 \\ +& & & & & & 6204 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.36$ & 11 \\ +\cutinhead{This is a cut-in head} ++26\arcdeg2606& 9.7&0.34&0.05&0.28&20,11& 5980 & \nodata & \nodata &$<-2.20$ & 19 \\ +& & & & & & 5950 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.89$ & 24 \\ ++26\arcdeg3578& 9.4&0.31&0.05&0.37&20,11& 5830 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.60$ & 4 \\ +& & & & & & 5800 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.62$ & 17 \\ +& & & & & & 6177 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.51$ & 11 \\ +& & & & & & 6000 & 3.25 & \nodata & $-2.20$ & 22 \\ +& & & & & & 6140 & 3.50 & \nodata & $-2.57$ & 15 \\ ++30\arcdeg2611& 9.2&0.82&0.33&0.55& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 2 \\ +& & & & & & 4400 & 1.80 & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 12 \\ +& & & & & & 4400 & 0.90 & 1.7 & $-1.20$ & 14 \\ +& & & & & & 4260 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.55$ & 10 \\ ++37\arcdeg1458& 8.9&0.44&0.07&0.22&20,11& 5296 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.39$ & 11 \\ +& & & & & & 5420 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.43$ & 3 \\ ++58\arcdeg1218&10.0&0.51&0.03&0.36& 2 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.80$ & 2 \\ +& & & & & & 5000 & 1.10 & 2.2 & $-2.71$ & 14 \\ +& & & & & & 5000 & 2.20 & 1.8 & $-2.46$ & 5 \\ +& & & & & & 4980 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.55$ & 10 \\ ++72\arcdeg0094&10.2&0.31&0.09&0.26&12 & 6160 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.80$ & 19 \\ +\sidehead{I'm a side head:} +G5--36 & 10.8& 0.40& 0.07& 0.28& 20 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.19$ & 21 \\ +G18--54 & 10.7& 0.37& 0.08& 0.28& 20 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.34$ & 21 \\ +G20--08 & 9.9& 0.36& 0.05& 0.25& 20,11& 5849 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.59$ & 11 \\ +& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.03$ & 21 \\ +G20--15 & 10.6& 0.45& 0.03& 0.27& 20,11& 5657 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.00$ & 11 \\ +& & & & & & 6020 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.56$ & 3 \\ +& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.58$ & 21 \\ +G21--22 & 10.7& 0.38& 0.07& 0.27& 20,11& \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.23$ & 21 \\ +G24--03 & 10.5& 0.36& 0.06& 0.27& 20,11& 5866 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.78$ & 11 \\ +& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.70$ & 21 \\ +G30--52 & 8.6& 0.50& 0.25& 0.27& 11 & 4757 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.12$ & 11 \\ +& & & & & & 4880 & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.14$ & 3 \\ +G33--09 & 10.6& 0.41& 0.10& 0.28& 20 & 5575 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.48$ & 11 \\ +G66--22 & 10.5& 0.46& 0.16& 0.28& 11 & 5060 & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.77$ & 3 \\ +& & & & & & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-1.04$ & 21 \\ +G90--03 & 10.4& 0.37& 0.04& 0.29& 20 & \nodata & \nodata & \nodata & $-2.01$ & 21 \\ +LP 608--62\tablenotemark{a} & 10.5& 0.30& 0.07& 0.35& 11 & 6250 & \nodata & +\nodata & $-2.70$ & 4 \\ +\enddata +\tablenotetext{a}{Star LP 608--62 is also known as BD+1\arcdeg 2341p. We will +make this footnote extra long so that it extends over two lines.} +%% You can append references to a table using the \tablerefs command. +\tablerefs{ +(1) Barbuy, Spite, \& Spite 1985; (2) Bond 1980; (3) Carbon et al. 1987; +(4) Hobbs \& Duncan 1987; (5) Gilroy et al. 1988: (6) Gratton \& Ortolani 1986; +(7) Gratton \& Sneden 1987; (8) Gratton \& Sneden (1988); (9) Gratton \& Sneden 1991; +(10) Kraft et al. 1982; (11) LCL, or Laird, 1990; (12) Leep \& Wallerstein 1981; +(13) Luck \& Bond 1981; (14) Luck \& Bond 1985; (15) Magain 1987; +(16) Magain 1989; (17) Peterson 1981; (18) Peterson, Kurucz, \& Carney 1990; +(19) RMB; (20) Schuster \& Nissen 1988; (21) Schuster \& Nissen 1989b; +(22) Spite et al. 1984; (23) Spite \& Spite 1986; (24) Hobbs \& Thorburn 1991; +(25) Hobbs et al. 1991; (26) Olsen 1983.} +\end{deluxetable} + +%% Tables may also be prepared as separate files. See the accompanying +%% sample file table.tex for an example of an external table file. +%% To include an external file in your main document, use the \input +%% command. Uncomment the line below to include table.tex in this +%% sample file. (Note that you will need to comment out the \documentclass, +%% \begin{document}, and \end{document} commands from table.tex if you want +%% to include it in this document.) + +%% \input{table} + +%% The following command ends your manuscript. LaTeX will ignore any text +%% that appears after it. + +\end{document} + +%% +%% End of file `sample.tex'. +%</sample> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Here begins the module `table`. +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*table> +%% +%% Begining of file `table.tex' + +%% This complex but short example prepared in the deluxetable environment +%% demonstrates some of the techniques +%% that can be used to generate complex column headings and to align +%% variable-width columns. See the manuscript sample file, sample.tex, +%% for more table examples. + +%% Note this file has its own \documentclass, \begin{document}, and +%% \end{document} commands. If you want to insert this table in another +%% LaTeX document using the \input command, comment out these lines. + +\documentclass{aastex} +\begin{document} + +%% Note that the table will print double-spaced since we are using the +%% manuscript style. Change the style to preprint or preprint2 to see +%% how LaTeX formats the table in those styles. + +%% In this example the LaTeX \multicolumn command is used to span a heading +%% over several columns. When \multicolumn is used along with the +%% \cutinhead or \sidehead commands, the \tablecolumns command must +%% be used to specify the number of columns in the table - +%% otherwise \cutinhead and \sidehead will not work properly. + +%% \cline has been used to produce straddle rules below the spanning heads, +%% \cutinhead to produce a centered head in the body of the table, and +%% \sidehead to produce a flush-left head in the body. + +%% This table also makes use of the \phn command to better align some of the +%% columns. Also see \phd, \phs, and \phm{} - other commands useful for +%% column alignment. All of these commands insert a blank space +%% whose width is equal to that of a number (\phn), +%% a decimal point (\phd), a minus sign (\phs), or any +%% character you wish to use (\phm{text}). +%% Keep in mind that if you are preparing a table for electronic submission +%% to one of the journals, you need not worry too much about column +%% alignment. The editors will fix table alignment as appropriate. + +%% If a table is more than one page long, the width of the table can vary +%% from page to page when the default \tablewidth is used, as below. The +%% individual table widths for each page will be written to the log file; a +%% maximum tablewidth for the table can be computed from these values. +%% The \tablewidth argument can then be reset and the file reprocessed, so +%% that the table is uniform throughout the pages. Try getting the widths +%% from the log file and changing the \tablewidth parameter to see how +%% adjusting this value affects table formatting. + +%% The * option to the \\ command has been used in the lines after +%% the \sidehead to keep them together on the same page. Try taking +%% the *'s out and LaTeXing the manuscript again to see the difference +%% in the page breaks. You can group together as many lines as +%% you like using this command. + + +\begin{deluxetable}{rrrrrrrr} +\tablecolumns{8} +\tablewidth{0pc} +\tablecaption{Percentage of Fake Stars Lost} +\tablehead{ +\colhead{} & \multicolumn{3}{c}{Non-shell Stars} & \colhead{} & +\multicolumn{3}{c}{Shell Stars} \\ +\cline{2-4} \cline{6-8} \\ +\colhead{Mag} & \colhead{F336W} & \colhead{F555W} & \colhead{F814W} & +\colhead{} & \colhead{F336W} & \colhead{F555W} & \colhead{F814W}} +\startdata +20.25 & 2.2$\pm$7.4\phn & \nodata & \nodata & +& 0.9$\pm$6.8 & \nodata & 0.0$\pm$44.7 \\ +20.75 & 2.4$\pm$7.8\phn & \nodata & 2.8$\pm$7.4 & +& 1.7$\pm$6.6 & \nodata & 1.4$\pm$6.7\phn \\ +21.25 & 0.1$\pm$7.7\phn & \nodata & 1.7$\pm$7.6 & +& 2.6$\pm$6.5 & \nodata & 0.9$\pm$6.6\phn \\ +21.75 & 2.4$\pm$4.5\phn & 2.2$\pm$7.4 & 0.1$\pm$7.6 & +& 7.1$\pm$4.5 & 0.9$\pm$6.8 & 3.3$\pm$6.5\phn \\ +22.25 & 3.4$\pm$3.1\phn & 1.8$\pm$7.7 & 2.9$\pm$4.4 & +& 11.8$\pm$3.6 & 0.4$\pm$6.6 & 5.7$\pm$4.4\phn \\ +22.75 & 4.5$\pm$2.9\phn & 1.8$\pm$7.7 & 4.7$\pm$3.1 & +& 26.2$\pm$3.6 & 3.4$\pm$6.5 & 10.9$\pm$3.6\phn \\ +23.25 & 7.0$\pm$2.4\phn & 3.4$\pm$4.5 & 3.7$\pm$2.9 & +& 44.2$\pm$3.3 & 10.7$\pm$4.5 & 20.6$\pm$3.5\phn \\ +\cutinhead{More Data} +23.75 & 12.4$\pm$2.7\phn & 4.1$\pm$3.1 & 6.7$\pm$2.5 & +& 59.8$\pm$4.0 & 20.1$\pm$3.6 & 32.6$\pm$3.4\phn \\ +24.25 & 30.2$\pm$3.1\phn & 5.3$\pm$2.9 & 10.0$\pm$2.7 & +& 74.9$\pm$5.1 & 35.8$\pm$3.6 & 43.1$\pm$4.0\phn \\ +24.75 & 66.8$\pm$5.5\phn & 10.4$\pm$2.4 & 16.5$\pm$3.2 & +& 83.7$\pm$6.1 & 56.3$\pm$3.3 & 57.0$\pm$5.2\phn \\ +25.25 & 87.5$\pm$35.4 & 20.0$\pm$2.7 & 28.0$\pm$5.6 & +& \nodata & 71.5$\pm$4.0 & 71.8$\pm$6.2\phn \\ +25.75 & \nodata\phn & 55.3$\pm$3.1 & \nodata & +& \nodata & 81.2$\pm$5.1 & \nodata\phn \\ +26.25 & \nodata\phn & 85.1$\pm$5.5 & \nodata & +& \nodata & 85.6$\pm$6.1 & \nodata\phn \\ +\sidehead{More Data} +27.75 & 12.4$\pm$2.7\phn & 4.1$\pm$3.1 & 6.7$\pm$2.5 & +& 59.8$\pm$4.0 & 20.1$\pm$3.6 & 32.6$\pm$3.4\phn \\ +28.25 & 30.2$\pm$3.1\phn & 5.3$\pm$2.9 & 10.0$\pm$2.7 & +& 74.9$\pm$5.1 & 35.8$\pm$3.6 & 43.1$\pm$4.0\phn \\ +29.75 & 66.8$\pm$5.5\phn & 10.4$\pm$2.4 & 16.5$\pm$3.2 & +& 83.7$\pm$6.1 & 56.3$\pm$3.3 & 57.0$\pm$5.2\phn \\ +30.25 & 87.5$\pm$35.4 & 20.0$\pm$2.7 & 28.0$\pm$5.6 & +& \nodata & 71.5$\pm$4.0 & 71.8$\pm$6.2\phn \\ +31.75 & \nodata\phn & 55.3$\pm$3.1 & \nodata & +& \nodata & 81.2$\pm$5.1 & \nodata\phn \\ +32.25 & \nodata\phn & 85.1$\pm$5.5 & \nodata & +& \nodata & 85.6$\pm$6.1 & \nodata\phn \\ +33.75 & 12.4$\pm$2.7\phn & 4.1$\pm$3.1 & 6.7$\pm$2.5 & +& 59.8$\pm$4.0 & 20.1$\pm$3.6 & 32.6$\pm$3.4\phn \\ +34.25 & 30.2$\pm$3.1\phn & 5.3$\pm$2.9 & 10.0$\pm$2.7 & +& 74.9$\pm$5.1 & 35.8$\pm$3.6 & 43.1$\pm$4.0\phn \\ +35.75 & 66.8$\pm$5.5\phn & 10.4$\pm$2.4 & 16.5$\pm$3.2 & +& 83.7$\pm$6.1 & 56.3$\pm$3.3 & 57.0$\pm$5.2\phn \\ +36.25 & 87.5$\pm$35.4 & 20.0$\pm$2.7 & 28.0$\pm$5.6 & +& \nodata & 71.5$\pm$4.0 & 71.8$\pm$6.2\phn \\ +37.75 & \nodata\phn & 55.3$\pm$3.1 & \nodata & +& \nodata & 81.2$\pm$5.1 & \nodata\phn \\ +38.25 & \nodata\phn & 85.1$\pm$5.5 & \nodata & +& \nodata & 85.6$\pm$6.1 & \nodata\phn \\ +\enddata +\end{deluxetable} + + \end{document} + +%% +%% End of file `table.tex'. + + +%</table> +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% docstrip will complete its |\generate| command at the following line: +\endinput + +Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 12:29 +(aasclass +LaTeX2e <1998/06/01> +(aasclass.dtx +File: aasclass.dtx 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class + +LaTeX Warning: File `ltxdoc.cfg' already exists on the system. + Not generating it from this source. + +(ltxdoc.cls +Document Class: ltxdoc 1996/01/11 v2.0r Standard LaTeX documentation class +************************************* +* Local config file ltxdoc.cfg used +************************************* +(ltxdoc.cfg) (article.cls +Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class +(size10.clo +File: size10.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) +) +\c@part=\count79 +\c@section=\count80 +\c@subsection=\count81 +\c@subsubsection=\count82 +\c@paragraph=\count83 +\c@subparagraph=\count84 +\c@figure=\count85 +\c@table=\count86 +\abovecaptionskip=\skip41 +\belowcaptionskip=\skip42 +\bibindent=\dimen102 +) (doc.sty +Package: doc 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi) +\c@StandardModuleDepth=\count87 +\guard@level=\count88 +\MacrocodeTopsep=\skip43 +\MacroIndent=\dimen103 +\macro@cnt=\count89 +\MacroTopsep=\skip44 +\index@excludelist=\toks14 +(multicol.sty +Package: multicol 1998/01/19 v1.5q multicolumn formatting (FMi) +\c@tracingmulticols=\count90 +\mult@box=\box26 +\multicol@leftmargin=\dimen104 +\c@unbalance=\count91 +\c@collectmore=\count92 +\doublecol@number=\count93 +\multicoltolerance=\count94 +\multicolpretolerance=\count95 +\full@width=\dimen105 +\page@free=\dimen106 +\premulticols=\dimen107 +\postmulticols=\dimen108 +\multicolsep=\skip45 +\multicolbaselineskip=\skip46 +\partial@page=\box27 +\last@line=\box28 +\mult@rightbox=\box29 +\mult@grightbox=\box30 +\mult@gfirstbox=\box31 +\mult@firstbox=\box32 +\@tempa=\box33 +\@tempa=\box34 +\@tempa=\box35 +\@tempa=\box36 +\@tempa=\box37 +\@tempa=\box38 +\@tempa=\box39 +\@tempa=\box40 +\@tempa=\box41 +\@tempa=\box42 +\@tempa=\box43 +\@tempa=\box44 +\@tempa=\box45 +\@tempa=\box46 +\@tempa=\box47 +\@tempa=\box48 +\@tempa=\box49 +\c@columnbadness=\count96 +\c@finalcolumnbadness=\count97 +\last@try=\dimen109 +\multicolovershoot=\dimen110 +\multicolundershoot=\dimen111 +\mult@nat@firstbox=\box50 +) +\IndexMin=\dimen112 +\c@IndexColumns=\count98 +\GlossaryMin=\dimen113 +\c@GlossaryColumns=\count99 +\check@sum=\count100 +\bslash@cnt=\count101 +\wrong@table=\toks15 +\c@CodelineNo=\count102 +)) +\@indexfile=\write3 +Writing index file aasclass.idx +(shortvrb.sty +Package: shortvrb 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi) +) +Package shortvrb Info: Made | a short reference for \verb on input line 321. +LaTeX Info: Redefining \cs on input line 358. + +LaTeX Warning: Writing file `:aasclass.ins'. + + + +LaTeX Warning: Writing file `:Read.Me'. + + +(aasclass.aux) +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 585. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 585. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 585. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 585. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 585. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 585. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 585. +Package shortvrb Info: | already a short reference for \verb on input line 585. +(aasclass.dtx +*************************** +* Character table correct * +*************************** +(Read.Me +LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size +(Font) <17.28> on input line 16. +LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size +(Font) <12> on input line 16. +LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size +(Font) <8> on input line 16. +LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size +(Font) <6> on input line 16. +LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size +(Font) <5> on input line 16. + +Overfull \hbox (8.91502pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 24--27 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The dis-tri-bu-tion point for AAST[]X is \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 ftp: +//ftp.aas.org/pubs/aastex50.zip\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,| + [] + +LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size +(Font) <7> on input line 29. +(aasclass.toc [1 + +] [2]) +\tf@toc=\write4 +[3] +Overfull \hbox (15.35983pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 65--68 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Now type-set \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 aasclass.ins\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , th +ereby gen-er-at-ing \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 aastex.cls \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 and \OT1/cmtt/m/ +n/10 aasguide.tex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . | + [] + +) +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/cmtt/bx/n' in size <10> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/cmtt/m/n' tried instead on input line 79. +[4] +Overfull \hbox (0.5877pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 140--140 + [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 %<style> \@obsoletefile{aasclass.cls}{aasclass.sty}\LoadCl +ass{aasclass}% | + [] + +[5] +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OT1/cmtt/bx/n' in size <12> not available +(Font) Font shape `OT1/cmtt/m/n' tried instead on input line 171. +[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] +Overfull \hbox (10.0376pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 579--579 + [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 % For version number and date, search on "\fileversion" i +n the .dtx file, | + [] + +[11] [12] +Overfull \hbox (5.11002pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 610--613 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The macro []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \aas@ptsize \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 works + very much like the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \@ptsize \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 macro of \OT1/cm +tt/m/n/10 classes.dtx\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ,| + [] + +[13] [14] +Overfull \hbox (47.83716pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784 + [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\exp +andafter\@secondoftwo\fi | + [] + +[15] +Overfull \hbox (5.31265pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784 + [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \expandafter\PassOptionsToClass\expandafter{\expandafter1 +\aas@ptsizept}% | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (47.83716pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784 + [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \ifx\undefined\aas@ptsize\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\exp +andafter\@secondoftwo\fi | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (5.31265pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 784--784 + [][] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \expandafter\PassOptionsToClass\expandafter{\expandafter1 +\aas@ptsizept}% | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (36.30128pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 792--794 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 AAST[]X is a vari-ant of the stan-dard L[]T[]X ar-ti-cle class: +[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/unpacked\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (14.63516pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 798--800 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 We al-ways load the stan-dard L[]T[]X sym-bol pack-age: []\OT1 +/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/base\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (129.57907pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 804--806 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 We al-ways load the stan-dard L[]T[]X ex-tended graph-ics pack +-age: []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/packages/graphics\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . +| + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (50.91344pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 810--812 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The AMS []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 amsmath \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 pack-age re +-places []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 amssym\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 : []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://mac +ros/latex/packages/amslatex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (67.91158pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 816--818 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The con-tributed L[]T[]X []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 natbib \OT1/cmr/m/ +n/10 pack-age: []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib\O +T1/cmr/m/n/10 . | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (48.02657pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 822--825 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 code may serve as a model for load-ing other classes: []\OT1/cmt +t/m/n/10 CTAN://macros/latex/packages/tools\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . | + [] + +LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size +(Font) <14.4> on input line 830. +[16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] +[31] [32] [33] [34] +Overfull \hbox (19.66588pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2107--2110 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The for-mat-ting of the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \slugcomment \OT1/cmr +/m/n/10 in-for-ma-tion is con-trolled by the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \@makeslugcmmnt| + + [] + +[35] [36] [37] +Overfull \hbox (27.72055pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2338--2338 +[] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \authoraddr{<author's postal address>}% Deprecated (V5.0) + in favor of \affil[] | + [] + +[38] [39] [40] [41] [42] [43] [44] [45] [46] [47] [48] [49] +Overfull \hbox (12.01851pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3200--3202 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \@makecaption \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 de-ter-mines for-mat-ting for + fig-ure and ta-ble cap-tions. For manuscripts,| + [] + +[50] [51] [52] [53] [54] [55] [56] [57] [58] [59] +Overfull \hbox (19.48749pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3895--3895 + [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \newcommand\tablebreak{\substitute@command\tablebreak\\}%{\ +cr\ptable@@split}% | + [] + +[60] [61] [62] [63] [64] [65] [66] [67] +Overfull \hbox (10.0376pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 4479--4479 + [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 %\def\ascnode{\astro{N}}% ascending node (dragon's head), ( +only in cmastro) | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (19.48749pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 4479--4479 + [][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 %\def\descnode{\astro{D}}% descending node (dragon's tail), + (only in cmastro) | + [] + +[68] [69] [70] [71] [72] [73] [74] +LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for OMS+cmr on input line 4980. + +(omscmr.fd +File: omscmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions +) +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OMS/cmr/m/n' in size <10> not available +(Font) Font shape `OMS/cmsy/m/n' tried instead on input line 4980. +[75] [76] +Overfull \hbox (10.59657pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5145--5147 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 What should hap-pen to a com-pat-i-bil-ity mode doc-u-ment? Wo +uldn't| + [] + +[77] +Overfull \hbox (24.22153pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5220--5221 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Deprecate []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \nl\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/ +m/n/10 \nextline\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablevspace\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 + , and []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablebreak\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .| + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (83.01173pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5223--5229 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Functionality cov-ered by []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 hyperref \OT1/cmr +/m/n/10 pack-age. Syn-tax: []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \anchor{[]}{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .| + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (67.96008pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5223--5229 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Ref: \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 url.sty \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 in []\OT1/cmtt/m/n +/10 /contrib/other/misc\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 hyperref.sty \OT1/cmr/ +m/n/10 in []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 /contrib/supported/hyperref\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .| + [] + +[78] +Overfull \hbox (11.78822pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 5275--5279 +[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \journal{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \articleID{[]} +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \volno{[]}{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . | + [] + +[79] +******************* +* Checksum passed * +******************* +) (aasclass.ind +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 6--7 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1971, 2000, 2055 + [] + +LaTeX Font Info: External font `cmex10' loaded for size +(Font) <9> on input line 14. + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 15--16 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1000, 1002-- + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 15--16 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1006, 1008, 1019 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 26--28 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1342, 1347, 1671 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 36--37 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 36--37 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 58--60 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 58--60 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 61--62 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1417, 1498, 1540 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 63--65 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1073, 1088, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 63--65 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1102, 1112, 1549 + [] + +[80] +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 81--82 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1107, 1118, $[]$ + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (14.06262pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 84--85 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@latex@warning@no@line | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 90--91 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@make@caption@text@aj | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (14.06262pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 91--92 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@make@caption@text@apj | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 92--93 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@make@caption@text@pptt | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 95--96 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (32.9624pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 96--97 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont@aj | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (37.68735pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 97--98 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont@apj | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (42.4123pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 98--99 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \@makecaption@plano@cont@pptt | + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 102--103 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1037, 1970, 2050 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 126--128 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1600, 1603, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 126--128 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1606, 1612, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 126--128 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1615, 1618, 1624 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 148--150 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1191, 1216, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 148--150 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 2028, 2033, 2037 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 156--157 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1332, 1468, 2017 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 167--169 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 434, 453--455, + [] + +[81] +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 173--175 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1163, 1166, 1175 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 178--180 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1166, 1499, 1703 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 187--189 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 187--189 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943 + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 212--213 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \abovedisplayshortskip | + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 224--225 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1348, 1564, 1672 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 247--249 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1002--1006, 1084 + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 250--251 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \appendix@figtab@defs | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (28.23746pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 251--252 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \appendix@figtab@defs@pptt | + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 252--253 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1328, 1641, 1647 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 258--259 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1170, 1210, 1211 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1869--1871, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1874--1880, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1882--1884, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1886--1891, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 273--275 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1893--1897, $[]$ + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 276--278 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1135, 1324, 1398 + [] + +[82] +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 293--295 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1995, 2043, 2045 + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 302--303 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \belowdisplayshortskip | + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1038, 1043, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1051, 1055, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1066, 1072, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1083, 1422, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1431, 1434, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1439, 1442, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 332--335 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1448, 1451, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 332--335 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1457, 1460, 1511 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 335--336 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1688, 1693, 1701 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1869--1871, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1874--1880, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1884, 1886-- + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 336--338 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1891, 1893--1897 + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (32.9624pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 348--350 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \clear@thebibliography@page | + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 348--350 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1275, 2012, 2058 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 350--351 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1563, 2057, 2058 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 355--357 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1056, 1073, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 355--357 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1088, 1102, 1112 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 361--362 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1695, 1696, 1698 + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 387--388 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \DeclareRobustCommand | + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1917, 1924, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1925, 1929-- + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1931, 1933, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 391--393 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1938, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 391--393 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1940, 1941, 1943 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1917, 1924, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1925, 1929-- + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1931, 1933, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 393--395 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1938, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 393--395 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1940, 1941, 1943 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 395--397 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1925, 1930, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 395--397 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1932, 1933, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 395--397 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1939, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 395--397 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1940, 1942, 1943 + [] + +[83] +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 417--418 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1483, 1562, 2023 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1047, 1051, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1058, 1066, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1076, 1083, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1426, 1431, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1434, 1439, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1442, 1448, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 419--422 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1451, 1457, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 419--422 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1460, 1477, 1561 + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 437--438 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \eqnarray@fleqn@fixed | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (4.61273pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 475--476 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \fnum@ptablecont@pptt | + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 476--477 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1503, 1565, $[]$ + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 485--486 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1317, 1322, 2059 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 491--492 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1847, 1849--1853 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1377, 1381, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1389, 1474, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1517, 1526, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1527, 1575, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 516--518 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1576, 1599, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 516--518 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1605, 1611, 1617 + [] + +[84] +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 541--542 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1696, 1698, 1705 + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (23.51251pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 544--545 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \interfootnotelinepenalty | + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 552--554 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1094, 1106, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 552--554 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1117, 1192, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 552--554 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1437, 1446, 2038 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 585--587 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1044, 1056, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 585--587 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1115, 1457, 1460 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 617--618 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1014, $[]$, 1973 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 626--627 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1972, 2001, 2056 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 637--638 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1150, 1152, 1157 + [] + +[85] +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 646--647 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1822--1825, 1831 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1818--1827, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1829, 1831, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1832, 1837, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1840, 1846, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 648--650 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1848, 1855--1859 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 663--664 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1614, 1623, 1862 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1520, 1547, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1575, 1598, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1601, 1604, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1607, 1610, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 676--678 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1613, 1616, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 676--678 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1619, 1622, 1625 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1056, 1073, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1181, 1187, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1192, 1210, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 685--688 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1218, 2030, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 685--688 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 2034, 2038, 2059 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 714--716 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1629, 1645, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 714--716 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1651, 1656, 1660 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 717--718 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1279, 1634, 1990 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 748--749 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1149, 1336, 1337 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 751--752 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1821, 1827, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 751--752 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1829, 1837, 1842 + [] + +[86] +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 762--763 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1515, 1523, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 762--763 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1524, 1557, 1558 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 765--766 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1370, 1470, 1567 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 767--768 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1386, 1400, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 767--768 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1516, 1517, 1571 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 769--770 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1548, 1549, 1568 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 770--772 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1371, 1469, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 770--772 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1472, 1567, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 770--772 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1602, 1614, 1623 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 772--774 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1410, 1493, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 772--774 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1549, 1586, 1592 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 774--776 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1471, 1492, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 774--776 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1560, 1579, 1585 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 +[]$\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 , 1396, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1402, 1417, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1418, 1487, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1493, 1498, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1499, 1524, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1558, 1580, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1586, 1592, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 779--782 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1629, 1645, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 779--782 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1651, 1656, 1660 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1714, 1716, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1718, 1720, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1722, 1724, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1726, 1728, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1730, 1732, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1734, 1736, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1738, 1740, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1742, 1744, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1746, 1748, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1750, 1752, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1754, 1756, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1758, 1760, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1762, 1764, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1766, 1768, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1770, 1772, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1774, 1776, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1778, 1780, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1782, 1784, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1786, 1788, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1790, 1792, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1794, 1796, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 802--808 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1798, 1800, 1802 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 809--810 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1982, 2015, 2063 + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (9.33768pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 810--811 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \references@refpar@mss | + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 810--811 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1292, 1982, 2063 + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (14.06262pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 811--812 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \references@refpar@pptt | + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 812--813 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1280, 1282, 1301 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 821--822 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1967, 1986, 2041 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 840--842 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1442, 1448, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 840--842 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1451, 1457, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 840--842 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1460, 1656, 1660 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 847--848 +[]$\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 , 1215, 2007 + [] + +[87] +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 873--875 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1105, 1113, 1860 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 880--881 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1336, 1337, 1475 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 895--896 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1249, 1276, 2008 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 897--899 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1529, 1595, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 897--899 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1596, 1847, 1958 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 929--930 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1328, 1331-- + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 929--930 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1333, 1641, 1647 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 937--939 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1420, 1969, 2049 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 943--945 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1233, 1235, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 943--945 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1239, 1243, 1244 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 945--947 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1223, 1346, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 945--947 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1347, $[]$, 1677 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 950--951 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1671, $[]$, 1679 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 951--953 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1189, 1208, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 951--953 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1211, 1223, 1225 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1225, 1341, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1342, 1428, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1429, 1437, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1445, 1446, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1454, 1455, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1487, 1492, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 955--958 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1579, 1585, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 955--958 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1591, $[]$, 1678 + [] + +[88] +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 969--970 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1066, 1071, 1083 + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 987--988 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \typeout@deluxetable@mss | + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (18.78757pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 988--989 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \typeout@deluxetable@ppt | + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 1022--1024 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1930, 1933, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5726) in paragraph at lines 1022--1024 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/9 1937, 1940, 1943 + [] + +) [89] (aasclass.aux) ) +Here is how much of TeX's memory you used: + 687 strings out of 3926 + 7187 string characters out of 65536 + 95346 words of memory out of 192512 + 3530 multiletter control sequences out of 10000 + 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001 + 31i,7n,21p,286b,1420s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s + +Output written on aasclass (89 pages, 323624 bytes). +elapsed seconds = 124.88 + +Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=plain 96.6.7) 20 JAN 1999 21:48 +(aasclass (docstrip.tex +\blockLevel=\count26 +\emptyLines=\count27 +\processedLines=\count28 +\commentsRemoved=\count29 +\commentsPassed=\count30 +\codeLinesPassed=\count31 +\TotalprocessedLines=\count32 +\TotalcommentsRemoved=\count33 +\TotalcommentsPassed=\count34 +\TotalcodeLinesPassed=\count35 +\NumberOfFiles=\count36 +\inFile=\read0 +\inputcheck=\read1 +\@tempcnta=\count37 +\off@0=\count38 +\off@1=\count39 +\off@2=\count40 +\off@3=\count41 +\off@4=\count42 +\off@5=\count43 +\off@6=\count44 +\off@7=\count45 +\off@8=\count46 +\off@9=\count47 +\off@10=\count48 +\off@11=\count49 +\off@12=\count50 +\off@13=\count51 +\off@14=\count52 +\off@15=\count53 +\@temptokena=\toks12 +\@maxfiles=\count54 +\@maxoutfiles=\count55 +Utility: `docstrip' 2.5b <1998/04/28> +English documentation <1998/04/03> + +********************************************************** +* This program converts documented macro-files into fast * +* loadable files by stripping off (nearly) all comments! * +********************************************************** + +******************************************************** +* No Configuration file found, using default settings. * +******************************************************** + +) + +Generating file(s) aastex.cls aasclass.tex aasguide.tex aassymbols.tex sample.tex table.tex + +Processing file aasclass.dtx (class) -> aastex.cls + (doc) -> aasclass.tex + (guide) -> aasguide.tex + (symbols) -> aassymbols.tex + (sample) -> sample.tex + (table) -> table.tex +File aasclass.dtx ended by \endinput. +Lines processed: 9686 +Comments removed: 3461 +Comments passed: 42 +Codelines passed: 6142 + +*********************************************************** +* +* To finish the installation, please move the following +* files into a directory searched by TeX: +* +* aastex.cls +* +* To produce the user documentation, run aasguide.tex through LaTeX. +* +* To produce the AMS and AAS symbols crib sheet, run aassymbols.tex through LaTEX. +* +* To typeset the aastex sample documents, run sample.tex, sample2.tex, and samp +tbls.tex through LaTeX. +* +* To produce the programmer documentation, run aasclass.dtx through LaTeX. +* +* Happy TeXing +*********************************************************** +No pages of output. +elapsed seconds = 46.72 + +Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 23 JAN 1999 02:30 +(aasguide +LaTeX2e <1998/06/01> +(aasguide.tex +File: aasguide.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class +(aastex.cls +Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class +Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber +ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 74. +(article.cls +Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class +(size10.clo +File: size10.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) +) +\c@part=\count79 +\c@section=\count80 +\c@subsection=\count81 +\c@subsubsection=\count82 +\c@paragraph=\count83 +\c@subparagraph=\count84 +\c@figure=\count85 +\c@table=\count86 +\abovecaptionskip=\skip41 +\belowcaptionskip=\skip42 +\bibindent=\dimen102 +) (latexsym.sty +Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) +\symlasy=\mathgroup4 +LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold' +(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85. +) (graphicx.sty +Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) +(keyval.sty +Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) +\KV@toks@=\toks14 +) (graphics.sty +Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) +(trig.sty +Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) +) (graphics.cfg) +Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85. +(textures.def +File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later + (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) +)) +\Gin@req@height=\dimen103 +\Gin@req@width=\dimen104 +) (amssymb.sty +Package: amssymb 1996/11/03 v2.2b +(amsfonts.sty +Package: amsfonts 1997/09/17 v2.2e +\@emptytoks=\toks15 +\symAMSa=\mathgroup5 +\symAMSb=\mathgroup6 +LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting math alphabet `\mathfrak' in version `bold' +(Font) U/euf/m/n --> U/euf/b/n on input line 133. +)) (natbib.sty +Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) +\bibhang=\skip43 +\bibsep=\skip44 +LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467. +\c@NAT@ctr=\count87 +) (verbatim.sty +Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements +\every@verbatim=\toks16 +\verbatim@line=\toks17 +\verbatim@in@stream=\read1 +) +\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen105 +\abstract@box=\box26 +\c@editornote=\count88 +\c@cureqno=\count89 +\pt@box=\box27 +\pt@width=\dimen106 +\pt@line=\count90 +\pt@column=\count91 +\pt@nlines=\count92 +\pt@ncol=\count93 +\pt@page=\count94 +\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen107 +\c@plate=\count95 +) +\@indexfile=\write3 +Writing index file aasguide.idx +(shortvrb.sty +Package: shortvrb 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi) +) +Package shortvrb Info: Made | a short reference for \verb on input line 102. +(aasguide.aux) +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 170. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 170. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 170. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 170. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 170. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 170. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 170. +AAS 2-column preprint substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>. +LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 172. +(ulasy.fd +File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions +) +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `U/lasy/b/n' in size <7> not available +(Font) Font shape `U/lasy/m/n' tried instead on input line 172. +LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+msa on input line 172. +(umsa.fd +File: umsa.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions +) +LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+msb on input line 172. +(umsb.fd +File: umsb.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions +) (aasguide.toc +Underfull \hbox (badness 1675) in paragraph at lines 33--33 + [][] []\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Abbreviations for Jour-nal + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (0.41202pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 42--42 + [][] []\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Using the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \twocolumn \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Co +m- + [] + +[1 + + +]) +\tf@toc=\write4 + +Underfull \hbox (badness 3179) in paragraph at lines 204--209 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Information about ac-quir-ing the AAST[]X + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1796) in paragraph at lines 204--209 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 pack-age will be mailed to you elec-tron-i-cally + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1297) in paragraph at lines 204--209 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 if you send an empty e-mail mes-sage (some + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (57.47958pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 229--235 +[][] + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (1.29999pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 237--243 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The AAS pro-vides user sup-port for the AAST[]X + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (17.18939pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 237--243 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 tron-i-cally by send-ing e-mail to \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 aastex-help@ +aas.org\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 .[][] + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 3536) in paragraph at lines 255--255 +[]\OT1/cmr/bx/n/10 Command De-scrip-tions for Jour-nal + [] + +[2] +Overfull \hbox (11.4403pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 306--309 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The re-main-der of this sec-tion refers to manuscripts + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (34.9874pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 318--318 + [] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \lower 0.5ex\hbox{${}\buildrel\lt\over\sim{}$}%[] + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (6.35497pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 338--361 +[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lower[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \rlap[]\OT1/cmr/ +m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \kern[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lineski +p[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \baselineskip[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , + [] + +[3] +Overfull \hbox (25.97986pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 399--406 +[][] + [] + + +LaTeX Warning: Characters dropped after `\end{verbatim}' on input line 487. + +[4] +Overfull \hbox (18.55078pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 557--563 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 It is up to the au-thor to make sure that []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \al +taffilmark[] + [] + +[5] +Underfull \hbox (badness 1019) in paragraph at lines 644--664 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 the proper el-e-ments for as-sist-ing the ed-i-tors. + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1127) in paragraph at lines 644--664 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 en-vi-ron-ment (see Sec-tions 3.15[] and 5[]); in a + [] + +[6] +Overfull \hbox (2.85645pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 824--828 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Authors should be aware that in the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 manuscrip +t[] + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (7.1341pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 831--838 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 This sec-tion de-scribes the use of the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 delux +etable + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 839--847 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 deluxetable[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 en-vi-ron-m +ent is de-lim-ited + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (16.66133pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 882--891 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (11pt), the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \footnotesize[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ( +10pt) or the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \scriptsize[] + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1394) in paragraph at lines 897--909 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The width of a delux-etable is de-fined by + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 3612) in paragraph at lines 910--921 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 num-ber-ing within the \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 deluxetable \OT1/cmr/m/n +/10 en-vi-ron- + [] + +[7] +Overfull \hbox (3.66202pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 949--970 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Column head-ings are spec-i-fied with []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tabl +ehead[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (1.81458pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 971--982 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 pro-duced by []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablehead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 or +other L[]T[]Xcommands + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (64.80882pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1040--1049 +[][] + [] + +[8] +Underfull \hbox (badness 2165) in paragraph at lines 1158--1160 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Tabular in-for-ma-tion is type-set within the + [] + +[9] +Underfull \hbox (badness 1005) in paragraph at lines 1202--1213 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 to []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablenum[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 is used as the + ta-ble iden-ti-fier. + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1418) in paragraph at lines 1269--1272 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Two op-tions are avail-able for sym-bol-i-cally + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1072) in paragraph at lines 1269--1272 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 dard L[]T[]X method and the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 natbib \OT1/cmr/m +/n/10 pack-age + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 2753) in paragraph at lines 1336--1348 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Clusters of galax-ies dis-play X-ray + [] + +[10] +Underfull \hbox (badness 2376) in paragraph at lines 1428--1436 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 mul-ti-ple ci-ta-tion keys, e.g., []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \citep[]{sa +ra86, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1314) in paragraph at lines 1428--1436 +[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 odea97,[]maoz95} \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 will pro-duce ``(Sarazin 198 +6; + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (17.03613pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1439--1443 +[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \citet[]*[[]][[]]{[]} + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (17.03613pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1439--1443 +\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \citep[]*[[]][[]]{[]} + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1565) in paragraph at lines 1467--1480 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 mech-a-nism as-so-ciates ci-ta-tions and ref-er-ences + [] + +[11] +Underfull \hbox (badness 1019) in paragraph at lines 1516--1525 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The AAST[]X class uses the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 natbib \OT1/cmr/ +m/n/10 pack- + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (30.9122pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1570--1613 + [] + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (1.94704pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1626--1626 + []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \figcaption[[]]{[]\label{[]}}[] + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 3128) in paragraph at lines 1643--1649 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 manuscript is be-ing sub-mit-ted elec-tron-i-cally. + [] + +[12] [13] +Underfull \hbox (badness 1394) in paragraph at lines 1750--1790 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 bols avail-able in AAST[]X. If you wish to + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1728) in paragraph at lines 1750--1790 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 use any of these sym-bols, you must ob-tain + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 4144) in paragraph at lines 1750--1790 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 avail-able from CTAN: ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex- + [] + +[14] +Underfull \hbox (badness 1314) in paragraph at lines 1890--1904 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 tures, OzT[]X, and CMacT[]X for Mac-in-tosh, + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1742) in paragraph at lines 1890--1904 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Win-dows, and, on UNIX com-put-ers, \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 dvips\OT1/c +mr/m/n/10 . + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (22.93831pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1890--1904 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 T[]XLive CD, see []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 http://www.tug.org/texlive.h +tml\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (8.66833pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1916--1916 + [] \OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 {[]}{[]}{[]}{[]}{[]}[] + [] + +[15] +Overfull \hbox (11.05083pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 1942--1948 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 For the ad-ven-ture-some, there is also []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \pl +otfiddle[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 2006--2014 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 A []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 flushrt.sty \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 file op-tion +is avail-able for + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1609) in paragraph at lines 2045--2047 +[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \singlespace[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 sets the ver-ti-cal spac-ing t +o a + [] + +[16] +Underfull \hbox (badness 1838) in paragraph at lines 2095--2099 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The pre-ced-ing de-tailed ex-pla-na-tion of the + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (0.93925pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2105--2114 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 A more com-pre-hen-sive ex-am-ple re-quir-ing nearly + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1325) in paragraph at lines 2105--2114 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 has three ta-bles: two marked up us-ing the + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1014) in paragraph at lines 2115--2120 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ta-bles are con-tained in the files []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 table1.te +x\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1490) in paragraph at lines 2115--2120 +[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 table2.tex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 table3.tex\OT1 +/cmr/m/n/10 , and []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 complext.tex\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 . + [] + +[17] +Underfull \hbox (badness 1558) in paragraph at lines 2171--2173 +\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 Com-mand Sum-mary \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (Prov-i-dence, RI: T[]X + [] + +LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for OMS+cmr on input line 2215. + +(omscmr.fd +File: omscmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions +) +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OMS/cmr/m/n' in size <10> not available +(Font) Font shape `OMS/cmsy/m/n' tried instead on input line 2215. + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1087) in paragraph at lines 2219--2224 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 takes care of hy-phen-ation au-to-mat-i-cally. + [] + +! Extra }, or forgotten \endgroup. +l.2242 ...\verb`\}`---end group} + . +? + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1394) in paragraph at lines 2259--2268 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 the equa-tion be-tween []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \[[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 a +nd []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \][] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com-mands, + [] + +[18] +Underfull \hbox (badness 1990) in paragraph at lines 2301--2312 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The \OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 deluxetable[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 en-vi-ron-m +ent is in-tended + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (27.21739pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2313--2317 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Notes in ta-bles should be marked by []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \table +notemark[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 ; + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (19.93968pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2313--2317 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 cor-re-spond-ing text should ap-pear in a []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \ta +blenotetext[] + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (20.81256pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2334--2334 + []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/9 \tablecaption{This is a caption.\label{tab1}}[] + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 2361--2369 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 type-set-ting []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 CTAN://[]macros/[]latex/[]packa +ges/ + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (2.5793pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2388--2393 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 manuscripts that will be sub-mit-ted electronically--- + [] + +[19] +LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for OML+cmr on input line 2410. + +(omlcmr.fd +File: omlcmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions +) +LaTeX Font Info: Font shape `OML/cmr/m/n' in size <10> not available +(Font) Font shape `OML/cmm/m/it' tried instead on input line 2410. + +Overfull \hbox (15.18954pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2409--2416 + [] + [] + +! Missing { inserted. +<inserted text> + { +l.2441 ...erb`\}`---end group} & + & +? + +Overfull \hbox (85.96729pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2432--2444 + [] + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (5.38377pt too wide) detected at line 2629 +[] + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (54.88292pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2672--2737 + [] + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1210) in paragraph at lines 2794--2798 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 mented in Sec-tion E.3[]), ex-cept that you do + [] + +[20] +Overfull \hbox (3.27318pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2808--2809 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 style op-tion, if used, with the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 preprint2 + [] + +[21] [22] +Underfull \hbox (badness 2680) in paragraph at lines 2826--2828 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Replace any []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com +-mand with + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (7.85611pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2835--2836 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \markcite[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (Headroom + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (2.7778pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2843--2844 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \reference[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (51.45876pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2847--2848 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \bibitem[][[]]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1783) in paragraph at lines 2865--2868 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 means that V5.0 can-not be run un-der + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 2351) in paragraph at lines 2909--2912 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 land-scape ori-en-ta-tion by us-ing the + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 5563) in paragraph at lines 2913--2918 +[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \\[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , the com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \table +vspace[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , + [] + +[23] +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in paragraph at lines 2924--2926 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Hypertext-oriented com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \anchor[]\OT1/ +cmr/m/n/10 , + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 3482) in paragraph at lines 2929--2931 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The data com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shorttitle[] \OT1/cmr/m +/n/10 and + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 6032) in paragraph at lines 2929--2931 +[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shortauthors[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 re-place []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \ +lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 and + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 3849) in paragraph at lines 2939--2944 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablevspace[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , []\ +OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \tablebreak[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 , + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 3482) in paragraph at lines 2945--2948 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The data com-mands []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shorttitle[] \OT1/cmr/m +/n/10 and + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 6032) in paragraph at lines 2945--2948 +[]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \shortauthors[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 re-place []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \ +lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 and + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 2962--2964 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The com-mand []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \markcite[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 is + dep-re-cated. + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1142) in paragraph at lines 2966--2968 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 The com-mand []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \SGMLcite[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 is + dep-re-cated. + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 1275) in paragraph at lines 2975--2976 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Replace your []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \documentstyle[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/ +10 state-ment + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (3.27318pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 2984--2986 +\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 style op-tion, if used, with the []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 preprint2 + [] + + +Underfull \hbox (badness 2680) in paragraph at lines 3004--3006 +[]\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Replace any []\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \lefthead[] \OT1/cmr/m/n/10 com +-mand with + [] + +[24] +Overfull \hbox (7.85611pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3027--3028 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \markcite[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 (Headroom + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (2.7778pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3035--3036 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \reference[]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (51.45876pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 3039--3040 +[][]\OT1/cmtt/m/n/10 \bibitem[][[]]{[]}\OT1/cmr/m/it/10 reference + [] + +(aasguide.ind [25] +! Undefined control sequence. +l.95 ...X\ Archive Network, \see + CTAN{2} +? + [26 + +] [27] [28] [29] [30]) (aasguide.aux) + + *File List* + aastex.cls 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class + article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class + size10.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) +latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) +graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) + keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) +graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) + trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) +graphics.cfg +textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A +rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) + amssymb.sty 1996/11/03 v2.2b +amsfonts.sty 1997/09/17 v2.2e + natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) +verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements +shortvrb.sty 1998/05/19 v2.0b Standard LaTeX documentation package (FMi) + ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions + umsa.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions + umsb.fd 1995/01/05 v2.2e AMS font definitions + omscmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions + omlcmr.fd 1998/03/27 v2.5g Standard LaTeX font definitions +aasguide.ind + *********** + + ) +Here is how much of TeX's memory you used: + 1876 strings out of 3926 + 18884 string characters out of 65536 + 95730 words of memory out of 200704 + 4653 multiletter control sequences out of 10000 + 15 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001 + 33i,15n,26p,322b,419s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s + +Output written on aasguide (30 pages, 146198 bytes). +elapsed seconds = 62.18 + +Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 23:13 +(sample1 +LaTeX2e <1998/06/01> +(sample.tex +File: sample.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class +(aastex.cls +Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class +Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber +ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 68. +(article.cls +Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class +(size12.clo +File: size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) +) +\c@part=\count79 +\c@section=\count80 +\c@subsection=\count81 +\c@subsubsection=\count82 +\c@paragraph=\count83 +\c@subparagraph=\count84 +\c@figure=\count85 +\c@table=\count86 +\abovecaptionskip=\skip41 +\belowcaptionskip=\skip42 +\bibindent=\dimen102 +) (latexsym.sty +Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) +\symlasy=\mathgroup4 +LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold' +(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85. +) (graphicx.sty +Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) +(keyval.sty +Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) +\KV@toks@=\toks14 +) (graphics.sty +Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) +(trig.sty +Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) +) (graphics.cfg) +Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85. +(textures.def +File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later + (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) +)) +\Gin@req@height=\dimen103 +\Gin@req@width=\dimen104 +) (amsmath.sty +Package: amsmath 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features +\@mathmargin=\skip43 +(amstext.sty +Package: amstext 1996/10/28 v1.2b +(amsgen.sty +File: amsgen 1996/10/29 v1.2b +\@emptytoks=\toks15 +\ex@=\dimen105 +)) (amsbsy.sty +Package: amsbsy 1996/10/28 v1.2b +\pmbraise@=\dimen106 +) (amsopn.sty +Package: amsopn 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names +) +LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 188. +\uproot@=\count87 +\leftroot@=\count88 +\classnum@=\count89 +\DOTSCASE@=\count90 +LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 335. +LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 418. +LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 422. +\Mathstrutbox@=\box26 +\strutbox@=\box27 +\big@size=\dimen107 +LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 500. +LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 501. +\skewcharcount@=\count91 +\familycount@=\count92 +\pointcount@=\count93 +\accentdimen@=\dimen108 +\accentmu@=\count94 +\minaw@=\dimen109 +\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count95 +\dotsspace@=\muskip10 +\c@parentequation=\count96 +\dspbrk@lvl=\count97 +\tag@help=\toks16 +\row@=\count98 +\column@=\count99 +\maxfields@=\count100 +\andhelp@=\toks17 +\eqnshift@=\dimen110 +\alignsep@=\dimen111 +\tagshift@=\dimen112 +\tagwidth@=\dimen113 +\totwidth@=\dimen114 +\lineht@=\dimen115 +\@envbody=\toks18 +\multlinegap=\skip44 +\multlinetaggap=\skip45 +) (natbib.sty +Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) +\bibhang=\skip46 +\bibsep=\skip47 +LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467. +\c@NAT@ctr=\count101 +) (verbatim.sty +Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements +\every@verbatim=\toks19 +\verbatim@line=\toks20 +\verbatim@in@stream=\read1 +) +\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen116 +\abstract@box=\box28 +\c@editornote=\count102 +\c@cureqno=\count103 +\pt@box=\box29 +\pt@width=\dimen117 +\pt@line=\count104 +\pt@column=\count105 +\pt@nlines=\count106 +\pt@ncol=\count107 +\pt@page=\count108 +\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen118 +\c@plate=\count109 +) (sample1.aux) +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 65. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 65. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 65. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 65. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 65. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 65. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 65. +AAS manuscript substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>. + +Class aastex Warning: Command \authoremail is deprecated in aastex V 5.0. Using +\email instead (please fix your document). on input line 70. + +[1 + +] +LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 97. +(ulasy.fd +File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions +) [2 + +] [3] [4 + +] (sample1.aux) + + *File List* + aastex.cls 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class + article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class + size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) +latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) +graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) + keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) +graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) + trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) +graphics.cfg +textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A +rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) + amsmath.sty 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features + amstext.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b + amsgen.sty + amsbsy.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b + amsopn.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names + natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) +verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements + ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions + *********** + + ) +Here is how much of TeX's memory you used: + 1909 strings out of 3926 + 19413 string characters out of 65536 + 72809 words of memory out of 169984 + 4744 multiletter control sequences out of 10000 + 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001 + 35i,8n,23p,263b,265s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s + +Output written on sample1 (4 pages, 3183 bytes). +elapsed seconds = 13.10 + +Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 23:15 +(sample2 +LaTeX2e <1998/06/01> +(sample2.tex +File: sample2.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class +(aastex.cls +Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class +Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber +ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 68. +(article.cls +Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class +(size12.clo +File: size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) +) +\c@part=\count79 +\c@section=\count80 +\c@subsection=\count81 +\c@subsubsection=\count82 +\c@paragraph=\count83 +\c@subparagraph=\count84 +\c@figure=\count85 +\c@table=\count86 +\abovecaptionskip=\skip41 +\belowcaptionskip=\skip42 +\bibindent=\dimen102 +) (latexsym.sty +Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) +\symlasy=\mathgroup4 +LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold' +(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85. +) (graphicx.sty +Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) +(keyval.sty +Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) +\KV@toks@=\toks14 +) (graphics.sty +Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) +(trig.sty +Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) +) (graphics.cfg) +Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85. +(textures.def +File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later + (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) +)) +\Gin@req@height=\dimen103 +\Gin@req@width=\dimen104 +) (amsmath.sty +Package: amsmath 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features +\@mathmargin=\skip43 +(amstext.sty +Package: amstext 1996/10/28 v1.2b +(amsgen.sty +File: amsgen 1996/10/29 v1.2b +\@emptytoks=\toks15 +\ex@=\dimen105 +)) (amsbsy.sty +Package: amsbsy 1996/10/28 v1.2b +\pmbraise@=\dimen106 +) (amsopn.sty +Package: amsopn 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names +) +LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 188. +\uproot@=\count87 +\leftroot@=\count88 +\classnum@=\count89 +\DOTSCASE@=\count90 +LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 335. +LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 418. +LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 422. +\Mathstrutbox@=\box26 +\strutbox@=\box27 +\big@size=\dimen107 +LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 500. +LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 501. +\skewcharcount@=\count91 +\familycount@=\count92 +\pointcount@=\count93 +\accentdimen@=\dimen108 +\accentmu@=\count94 +\minaw@=\dimen109 +\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count95 +\dotsspace@=\muskip10 +\c@parentequation=\count96 +\dspbrk@lvl=\count97 +\tag@help=\toks16 +\row@=\count98 +\column@=\count99 +\maxfields@=\count100 +\andhelp@=\toks17 +\eqnshift@=\dimen110 +\alignsep@=\dimen111 +\tagshift@=\dimen112 +\tagwidth@=\dimen113 +\totwidth@=\dimen114 +\lineht@=\dimen115 +\@envbody=\toks18 +\multlinegap=\skip44 +\multlinetaggap=\skip45 +) (natbib.sty +Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) +\bibhang=\skip46 +\bibsep=\skip47 +LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467. +\c@NAT@ctr=\count101 +) (verbatim.sty +Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements +\every@verbatim=\toks19 +\verbatim@line=\toks20 +\verbatim@in@stream=\read1 +) +\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen116 +\abstract@box=\box28 +\c@editornote=\count102 +\c@cureqno=\count103 +\pt@box=\box29 +\pt@width=\dimen117 +\pt@line=\count104 +\pt@column=\count105 +\pt@nlines=\count106 +\pt@ncol=\count107 +\pt@page=\count108 +\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen118 +\c@plate=\count109 +) (sample2.aux) +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 145. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 145. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 145. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 145. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 145. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 145. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 145. +AAS manuscript substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>. +LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 150. +(ulasy.fd +File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions +) [1 + +] [2 + +] [3] [4] [5] [6] +Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 436--445 + [][] + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457 + []$[]$ + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457 + []$[]$ + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457 + []$[]$ + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457 + []$[]$ + [] + + +Overfull \hbox (29.01564pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 457--457 + []$[]$ + [] + +Table 1 has been set to width 498.77063pt +[7] +Page 1 of table 2 has been set to width 424.88113pt with 23 lines per page +[8] [9] +Page 2 of table 2 has been set to width 438.58932pt with 23 lines per page +[10] +Page 3 of table 2 has been set to width 427.9186pt with 23 lines per page +[11] +Page 4 of table 2 has been set to width 426.20332pt with 23 lines per page +[12] +Page 5 of table 2 has been set to width 421.53383pt with 23 lines per page +[13] +Table 2 has been set to width 438.2089pt +[14] [15 + + + + + + + + +] [16 + +] (sample2.aux) + + *File List* + aastex.cls 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class + article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class + size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) +latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) +graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) + keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) +graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) + trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) +graphics.cfg +textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A +rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) + amsmath.sty 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features + amstext.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b + amsgen.sty + amsbsy.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b + amsopn.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names + natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) +verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements + ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions + *********** + + ) +Here is how much of TeX's memory you used: + 1937 strings out of 3926 + 19626 string characters out of 65536 + 84103 words of memory out of 169984 + 4769 multiletter control sequences out of 10000 + 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001 + 35i,18n,24p,422b,491s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s + +Output written on sample2 (16 pages, 30435 bytes). +elapsed seconds = 17.47 + +Textures 2.0.2 (preloaded format=LaTeX R9P0 98.10.16) 20 JAN 1999 23:17 +(samptbls +LaTeX2e <1998/06/01> +(samptbls.tex +File: samptbls.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class +(aastex.cls +Document Class: aastex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class +Class aastex Info: Original \LaTeX2.09 style by Chris Biemesderfer (chris@ferber +ts.com). Adapted to \LaTeXe by A. Ogawa (ogawa@teleport.com) on input line 68. +(article.cls +Document Class: article 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class +(size12.clo +File: size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) +) +\c@part=\count79 +\c@section=\count80 +\c@subsection=\count81 +\c@subsubsection=\count82 +\c@paragraph=\count83 +\c@subparagraph=\count84 +\c@figure=\count85 +\c@table=\count86 +\abovecaptionskip=\skip41 +\belowcaptionskip=\skip42 +\bibindent=\dimen102 +) (latexsym.sty +Package: latexsym 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) +\symlasy=\mathgroup4 +LaTeX Font Info: Overwriting symbol font `lasy' in version `bold' +(Font) U/lasy/m/n --> U/lasy/b/n on input line 85. +) (graphicx.sty +Package: graphicx 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) +(keyval.sty +Package: keyval 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) +\KV@toks@=\toks14 +) (graphics.sty +Package: graphics 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) +(trig.sty +Package: trig 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) +) (graphics.cfg) +Package graphics Info: Driver file: textures.def on input line 85. +(textures.def +File: textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later + (Arthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) +)) +\Gin@req@height=\dimen103 +\Gin@req@width=\dimen104 +) (amsmath.sty +Package: amsmath 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features +\@mathmargin=\skip43 +(amstext.sty +Package: amstext 1996/10/28 v1.2b +(amsgen.sty +File: amsgen 1996/10/29 v1.2b +\@emptytoks=\toks15 +\ex@=\dimen105 +)) (amsbsy.sty +Package: amsbsy 1996/10/28 v1.2b +\pmbraise@=\dimen106 +) (amsopn.sty +Package: amsopn 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names +) +LaTeX Info: Redefining \frac on input line 188. +\uproot@=\count87 +\leftroot@=\count88 +\classnum@=\count89 +\DOTSCASE@=\count90 +LaTeX Info: Redefining \dots on input line 335. +LaTeX Info: Redefining \ldots on input line 418. +LaTeX Info: Redefining \cdots on input line 422. +\Mathstrutbox@=\box26 +\strutbox@=\box27 +\big@size=\dimen107 +LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OML on input line 500. +LaTeX Font Info: Redeclaring font encoding OMS on input line 501. +\skewcharcount@=\count91 +\familycount@=\count92 +\pointcount@=\count93 +\accentdimen@=\dimen108 +\accentmu@=\count94 +\minaw@=\dimen109 +\c@MaxMatrixCols=\count95 +\dotsspace@=\muskip10 +\c@parentequation=\count96 +\dspbrk@lvl=\count97 +\tag@help=\toks16 +\row@=\count98 +\column@=\count99 +\maxfields@=\count100 +\andhelp@=\toks17 +\eqnshift@=\dimen110 +\alignsep@=\dimen111 +\tagshift@=\dimen112 +\tagwidth@=\dimen113 +\totwidth@=\dimen114 +\lineht@=\dimen115 +\@envbody=\toks18 +\multlinegap=\skip44 +\multlinetaggap=\skip45 +) (natbib.sty +Package: natbib 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) +\bibhang=\skip46 +\bibsep=\skip47 +LaTeX Info: Redefining \cite on input line 467. +\c@NAT@ctr=\count101 +) (verbatim.sty +Package: verbatim 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements +\every@verbatim=\toks19 +\verbatim@line=\toks20 +\verbatim@in@stream=\read1 +) +\@slugcmmntwidth=\dimen116 +\abstract@box=\box28 +\c@editornote=\count102 +\c@cureqno=\count103 +\pt@box=\box29 +\pt@width=\dimen117 +\pt@line=\count104 +\pt@column=\count105 +\pt@nlines=\count106 +\pt@ncol=\count107 +\pt@page=\count108 +\pt@tmpcapwidth=\dimen118 +\c@plate=\count109 +) (samptbls.aux (table1.aux) (table2.aux) (table3.aux) (complext.aux)) +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OML/cmm/m/it on input line 70. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for T1/cmr/m/n on input line 70. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OT1/cmr/m/n on input line 70. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMS/cmsy/m/n on input line 70. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for OMX/cmex/m/n on input line 70. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70. +LaTeX Font Info: Checking defaults for U/cmr/m/n on input line 70. +LaTeX Font Info: ... okay on input line 70. +AAS manuscript substyle, v5.0 <25 Sep 98>. +(table1.tex +File: table1.tex 1999/01/22 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class +LaTeX Font Info: Try loading font information for U+lasy on input line 73. +(ulasy.fd +File: ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions +) +Overfull \hbox (28.88113pt too wide) in alignment at lines 73--94 +[][][][][][][][][][][] + [] + +Page 1 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page +[1] +Overfull \hbox (42.58932pt too wide) in alignment at lines 94--114 +[][][][][][][][][][][] + [] + +Page 2 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page +[2] + +Class aastex Warning: Command \tablebreak is deprecated in aastex V 5.0. Using \ +\ instead (please fix your document). on input line 133. + + +Overfull \hbox (28.54768pt too wide) in alignment at lines 114--134 +[][][][][][][][][][][] + [] + +Page 3 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page +[3] +Overfull \hbox (22.67274pt too wide) in alignment at lines 134--154 +[][][][][][][][][][][] + [] + +Page 4 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page +[4] +Overfull \hbox (32.13792pt too wide) in alignment at lines 154--174 +[][][][][][][][][][][] + [] + +Page 5 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page +[5] +Overfull \hbox (22.67274pt too wide) in alignment at lines 174--194 +[][][][][][][][][][][] + [] + +Page 6 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page +[6] +Overfull \hbox (22.67274pt too wide) in alignment at lines 194--214 +[][][][][][][][][][][] + [] + +Page 7 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page +[7] +Overfull \hbox (47.96555pt too wide) in alignment at lines 214--234 +[][][][][][][][][][][] + [] + +Page 8 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page +[8] +Overfull \hbox (26.39375pt too wide) in alignment at lines 234--254 +[][][][][][][][][][][] + [] + +Page 9 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page +[9] + +Class aastex Warning: Command \tablebreak is deprecated in aastex V 5.0. Using \ +\ instead (please fix your document). on input line 255. + + +Overfull \hbox (30.20332pt too wide) in alignment at lines 254--274 +[][][][][][][][][][][] + [] + +Page 10 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page +[10] +Overfull \hbox (35.85893pt too wide) in alignment at lines 274--294 +[][][][][][][][][][][] + [] + +Page 11 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page +[11] +Overfull \hbox (30.20332pt too wide) in alignment at lines 294--314 +[][][][][][][][][][][] + [] + +Page 12 of table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt with 23 lines per page +[12] +Overfull \hbox (51.67407pt too wide) in alignment at lines 314--345 +[][][][][][][][][][][] + [] + +Table 1 has been set to width 396.0pt +) [13] (table2.tex +File: table2.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class +Page 1 of table 2 has been set to width 358.29579pt with 23 lines per page +[14] +Page 2 of table 2 has been set to width 358.29579pt with 23 lines per page +[15] +Page 3 of table 2 has been set to width 366.29016pt with 23 lines per page +[16] +Page 4 of table 2 has been set to width 350.48625pt with 23 lines per page +[17] +Table 2 has been set to width 355.84999pt +) [18] (table3.tex +File: table3.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class + +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 71--92 +[][][][][] + [] + +Page 1 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page +[19] +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 92--112 +[][][][][] + [] + +Page 2 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page +[20] +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 112--132 +[][][][][] + [] + +Page 3 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page +[21] +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 132--152 +[][][][][] + [] + +Page 4 of table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt with 23 lines per page +[22] +Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment at lines 152--166 +[][][][][] + [] + +Table 3 has been set to width 324.0pt +) [23] (complext.tex +File: complext.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class +Table 4 has been set to width 405.92818pt +) [24] (samptbls.aux (table1.aux) (table2.aux) (table3.aux) (complext.aux)) + + *File List* + aastex.cls 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class + article.cls 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX document class + size12.clo 1998/05/05 v1.3y Standard LaTeX file (size option) +latexsym.sty 1996/11/20 v2.2d Standard LaTeX package (lasy symbols) +graphicx.sty 1997/06/09 v1.0d Enhanced LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) + keyval.sty 1998/06/05 v1.11 key=value parser (DPC) +graphics.sty 1998/05/27 v1.0h Standard LaTeX Graphics (DPC,SPQR) + trig.sty 1994/10/16 v1.08 sin cos tan (DPC) +graphics.cfg +textures.def 1997/5/28 v0.4 Graphics extensions for Textures 1.7 and later (A +rthur Ogawa/ogawa@teleport.com) + amsmath.sty 1997/03/20 v1.2d AMS math features + amstext.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b + amsgen.sty + amsbsy.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b + amsopn.sty 1996/10/28 v1.2b operator names + natbib.sty 1998/07/14 6.8c (PWD) +verbatim.sty 1997/04/30 v1.5k LaTeX2e package for verbatim enhancements + table1.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class + ulasy.fd 1996/11/20 v2.2dLaTeX symbol font definitions + table2.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class + table3.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class +complext.tex 1999/01/20 5.0rc2 AAS markup document class + *********** + + ) +Here is how much of TeX's memory you used: + 1977 strings out of 3926 + 19844 string characters out of 65536 + 80327 words of memory out of 169984 + 4746 multiletter control sequences out of 10000 + 14 hyphenation exceptions out of 3001 + 35i,12n,24p,264b,455s stack positions out of 200i,100n,120p,5000b,4000s + +Output written on samptbls (24 pages, 52470 bytes). +elapsed seconds = 27.12 +\par +} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.ins new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..48b3cdc4ada --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/aastex/aasclass.ins @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +%% LaTeX2e file `aasclass.ins' +%% generated by the `filecontents' environment +%% from source `aasclass' on 2005/06/22. +%% +%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files +%% from aasclass.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX. +\input docstrip +\preamble + +This is a generated file; +altering it directly is inadvisable; +instead, modify the original source file. +%See the URL in the file Read.Me. + +Copyright notice. + + These files are distributed + WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +\endpreamble +\keepsilent +\generate{% + \file{aastex.cls}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{class}}% + \file{aastex.sty}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{style}}% + \file{aasclass.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{doc}}% + \file{aasguide.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{guide}}% + \file{aassymbols.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{symbols}}% + \file{sample.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{sample}}% + \file{table.tex}{\from{aasclass.dtx}{table}}% +}% +\ifToplevel{ +\Msg{***********************************************************} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move the following} +\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* \space\space aastex.cls} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* To produce the user documentation, + run aasguide.tex through LaTeX.} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* To produce the AAS and AMS symbols crib sheet, + run aassymbols.tex through LaTeX.} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* To typeset the aastex sample document, + run sample.tex and table.tex + through LaTeX.} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* To produce the programmer documentation, + run aasclass.dtx through LaTeX.} +\Msg{*} +\Msg{* Happy TeXing} +\Msg{***********************************************************} +} +\endbatchfile +\iffalse ltxdoc klootch +This file has version number 5.2/AAS, last revised 2005/06/22.\fi |